JP2019154751A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: In a jackpot type "time-shortening A" of a first special pattern and "latent probability variation B", and an effective pattern "A" of respective probability variable areas 73, 74 in a jackpot type "time-shortening C" of a second pattern, a right-side probability variable area 73 is set to be effective and a left-side probability variable area 74 is set to be ineffective in a second round. In the effective pattern "A", the left-side probability variable area 74 is set to be effective in a fifth round and the right-side probability variable area 73 is set to be ineffective. In the effective pattern "A", both the probability variable areas 73, 74 are set to be ineffective in the other rounds (namely, a first round, a third round, a fourth round, a sixth round, a seventh round, and thereafter).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 12

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is launched toward a gaming area provided on the gaming board, and the gaming ball is entered into one of a plurality of entrances provided in the gaming area. When the winning / losing lottery is performed based on the player's entry and the winning / winning lottery is won, the variable closing means, which is normally closed, is opened to give the player a predetermined game value. (For example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-148264 A

  However, in the above gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of games.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is characterized in that a launching means for launching a game ball, a entrance means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launch means, and a game in the entrance means. Information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information due to the ball entering, a determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and a first in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter By using variable entry means that can change between a state and a second state into which a game ball can enter, and a determination result by the determination means, the variable entry means is changed from the first state to the second state. An advantageous state means for making an advantageous state, a special region through which a game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass, and a second advantageous state that can generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means. State means, and before The advantageous state means includes special area switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special area, and the second advantageous state means uses the special area effectively set by the special area switching means as a game ball. The second advantageous state is generated when the game ball passes, while the second advantageous state is not generated when the game ball passes through the special area which is not effectively set by the special area switching means. A plurality of timing inflow means configured to allow the game ball to flow into the special area that is effectively set at a plurality of timings during the advantageous state when the second advantageous state is generated.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the launching means for launching the game ball, the entrance means for allowing the game ball launched by the launch means to enter, and the game ball entered the entrance means Information acquiring means for acquiring predetermined information, determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquiring means, a first state in which a game ball is difficult or impossible to enter, and a game ball By using variable entry means that can be changed to a second state in which the vehicle can enter, and a determination result by the determination means, the variable entry means is changed from the first state to the second state. Advantageous state means, a special region through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass, and a second advantageous state means capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means. And the advantageous state means comprises: Special area switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special area, the second advantageous state means when the game ball passes through the special area that has been effectively set by the special area switching means The second advantageous state is generated, and the second advantageous state is not generated when a game ball passes through the special area that is not effectively set by the special area switching means. In the case where two advantageous states are generated, a plurality of timing inflow means for causing the game ball to flow into the special area that is effectively set at a plurality of timings during the advantageous state. Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is the front enlarged view which represented the front view of the variable prize-winning apparatus typically. (A) is a schematic diagram of a variable winning device for explaining the behavior of a ball that has flowed into the big winning opening when the right probability changing region opening / closing plate is in an open state and the left probability changing region opening / closing plate 74a is in a closed state. (B) is a variable prize for explaining the behavior of a ball that has flowed into the big prize opening when the left probability changing area opening / closing plate is in an open state and the right probability changing area opening / closing plate is in a closed state. It is a typical sectional view of the device, and (c) is a variable prize for explaining the behavior of a sphere that has flowed into the big prize opening when both the right probability changing area opening and closing plate and the left probability changing area opening and closing plate are closed. It is typical sectional drawing of an apparatus. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, the buffer for counters, the 1st reservation ball storage area, the 2nd reservation ball storage area, the reservation ball execution area, the usual reservation ball storage area, and the usual reservation ball execution area. . (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot random number table. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot classification table for special figures 1, (b) is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot classification table for special figures 2. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the probability variation area | region opening / closing table. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the probability variation area | region effective table. The action timing of the big winning opening solenoid, the right probability changing area solenoid and the left probability changing area solenoid in each round of the first special symbol jackpot type “hour short A”, and the ball in the big winning opening switch, the right probability changing area switch and the left probability changing area switch Is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of the right and the setting timing of the right probability variation valid flag, the left probability variation valid flag, and the probability variation transition flag. The first special symbol jackpot type “Time-short A” in the first and second rounds of the big winning hole solenoid, the right probability changing area solenoid and the left probability changing area solenoid, and the big winning opening switch, right probability changing area switch and left 5 is a timing chart schematically showing respective times of detection timing of a sphere in a probability variation area switch and timings for setting a right probability variation valid flag, a left probability variation valid flag, and a probability variation transition flag. The action timing of the big winning opening solenoid, the right probability changing area solenoid, and the left probability changing area solenoid in each round of the first special symbol jackpot type “latency probability variation A”, the big winning opening switch, the right probability changing area switch, and the left probability changing area switch 5 is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of a sphere and the setting timing of a right probability variation valid flag, a left probability variation valid flag, and a probability variation transition flag. The first special symbol jackpot type “latency probability variation A” of the first to third rounds of the big winning opening solenoid, the right probability changing area solenoid and the left probability changing area solenoid, the timing of the big winning opening switch, the right probability changing area switch 4 is a timing chart schematically showing respective times of the detection timing of a sphere in the left probability variation area switch and the setting timing of a right probability variation valid flag, a left probability variation valid flag, and a probability variation transition flag. Action timings of the big winning opening solenoid, the right probability changing area solenoid and the left probability changing area solenoid in each round of the first special symbol jackpot type “Time B”, and the balls in the big winning opening switch, right probability changing area switch and left probability changing area switch Is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of the right and the setting timing of the right probability variation valid flag, the left probability variation valid flag, and the probability variation transition flag. Action timing of the big winning opening solenoid, the right probability changing area solenoid and the left probability changing area solenoid in each round of the first special symbol jackpot type “latency probability variation B”, the big winning opening switch, the right probability changing area switch and the left probability changing area switch 5 is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of a sphere and the setting timing of a right probability variation valid flag, a left probability variation valid flag, and a probability variation transition flag. In the first special symbol jackpot type “probability variation A” round, the timing of operation of the large winning opening solenoid, the right probability variation area solenoid and the left probability variation area solenoid, and the big winning opening switch, right probability variation area switch and left probability variation area switch 4 is a timing chart schematically showing a detection timing of a sphere and timings for setting a right probability variation valid flag, a left probability variation valid flag, and a probability variation transition flag. Action timing of the big winning opening solenoid, the right probability changing area solenoid and the left probability changing area solenoid in each round of the second special symbol jackpot type “Time C”, and the ball in the big winning opening switch, the right probability changing area switch and the left probability changing area switch Is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of the right and the setting timing of the right probability variation valid flag, the left probability variation valid flag, and the probability variation transition flag. The action timing of the big winning opening solenoid, the right probability changing area solenoid and the left probability changing area solenoid in each round of the second special symbol jackpot type “latency probability variation C”, the big winning opening switch, the right probability changing area switch and the left probability changing area switch 5 is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of a sphere and the setting timing of a right probability variation valid flag, a left probability variation valid flag, and a probability variation transition flag. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the big prize opening opening / closing control processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the open setting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the process during open | release performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot end process which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a typical sectional view in the front view of the variable prize apparatus and the 2nd variable prize apparatus of a 2nd embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the big prize opening opening / closing table of 2nd Embodiment. Actuation of the large winning opening solenoid, the second large winning opening solenoid, the right probability variation area solenoid, and the left probability variation area solenoid in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type “latency probability variation C” of the second special symbol of the second embodiment Each of the timing, the detection timing of the ball in the big winning opening switch, the second winning opening switch, the right probability changing area switch and the left probability changing area switch, and the setting timing of the right probability changing effective flag, the left probability changing effective flag and the probability changing transition flag 4 is a timing chart schematically showing time. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot process performed by MPU in the main controller of 2nd Embodiment. It is a typical sectional view in the front view of the variable prize apparatus and the 2nd variable prize apparatus of a 3rd embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the big prize opening opening / closing table of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot process performed by MPU in the main controller of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the open setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during open | release performed by MPU in the main control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. (A) is typical sectional drawing in the front view of the variable prize-winning apparatus of 4th Embodiment, (b) is the state which the probability variation area | region opening / closing plate slid to the downstream, Comprising: The right probability variation area | region is open | released FIG. 4C is a schematic enlarged cross-sectional view for explaining the behavior of a sphere flowing down in the guide passage when the left-side probability variation region is in a closed state, and (c) is a probability variation region opening and closing plate on the upstream side. It is a schematic enlarged cross-sectional view for explaining the behavior of a sphere flowing down in a guide passage when the left probability variation region is in an open state and the right probability variation region is in a closed state in a slide drive state, FIG. 5 is a schematic enlarged cross-sectional view for explaining the behavior of a sphere flowing down in a guide passage when the probability variation region opening / closing plate is in an initial state and both the right probability variation region and the left probability variation region are in a closed state. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the probability variation area | region opening / closing table of 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the open setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during open | release performed by MPU in the main controller of 4th Embodiment. Actuation timings of the big winning opening solenoid, the right probability changing area solenoid and the left probability changing area solenoid in the first and second rounds of the first special symbol jackpot type “Time A” of the fifth embodiment, the big winning opening switch, the right 4 is a timing chart schematically showing respective times of a sphere detection timing in a probability variation area switch and a left probability variation area switch, and setting timings of a right probability variation valid flag, a left probability variation valid flag, and a probability variation transition flag. Actuation timings of the big winning opening solenoid, the right probability changing area solenoid, the left probability changing area solenoid in the first to third rounds of the first special symbol jackpot type “latency probability variation A” of the fifth embodiment, and the big winning opening switch 5 is a timing chart schematically showing respective times of the detection timing of the sphere in the right probability variation area switch and the left probability variation area switch, and the setting timing of the right probability variation valid flag, the left probability variation valid flag, and the probability variation transition flag. It is the flowchart which showed the open | release setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during open | release performed by MPU in the main controller of 5th Embodiment. Actuation timings of the big winning opening solenoid, the right probability changing area solenoid and the left probability changing area solenoid in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type “latency probability variation A” of the first special symbol of the sixth embodiment, and the big winning opening switch 5 is a timing chart schematically showing respective times of the detection timing of the sphere in the right probability variation area switch and the left probability variation area switch, and the setting timing of the right probability variation valid flag, the left probability variation valid flag, and the probability variation transition flag. It is a figure which shows the structure of the variable winning apparatus of 7th Embodiment, (a) is typical sectional drawing in the front view of the variable winning apparatus of 7th Embodiment, (b) is A of (a). It is typical sectional drawing (cross-sectional top view) of the variable winning apparatus in the -A line.

<First Embodiment>
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, a first embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and has an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 3) having a large number of nails and winning holes (ball holes) 63, 64b, 64c, 65a and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 7) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached. Details of the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 7). A frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the top surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

  The frame button 22 is, for example, a button that is pressed by the player when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later. The frame button 22 corresponds to the first special symbol used in the first lottery game or the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol used in the second lottery game (hereinafter referred to as the third symbol). Is also used as an operation button for causing the player to select the content of the effect in the notice display executed in “variable effect”.

  The first lottery game refers to the ball entry into the special figure 1 winning opening 64b (see FIG. 3) provided in the alternating distribution unit 64 (see FIG. 3) to be described later (hereinafter referred to as the ball entry). This is a lottery game that may be referred to as “winning”. Also, the second lottery game is a lottery game resulting from winning in the special figure 2 winning slot 64c (see FIG. 3) provided in the alternate distribution unit 64 (see FIG. 3) (hereinafter referred to as the first lottery game). The lottery game and the second lottery game may be collectively referred to simply as “lottery game”).

  The variation effect is an effect displayed on a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later. As described later, a ball fired on the front area of the game board 13 has a specific winning opening ( For example, it is executed in response to winning a special figure 1 winning port 64b or a special figure 2 winning port 64c (see FIG. 3), which will be described later, and stops after the symbol (the third symbol described later) fluctuates for a predetermined time. This is an effect of presenting the player with the result of the lottery performed for the winning (whether or not a big hit) by the combination of the displayed symbols. In the first embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute only one lottery game, and the first special symbol based on the first lottery game and the second special based on the second lottery game. Based on the first lottery game using the third symbol in common with the symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as “special symbol” in some cases). Either the lottery result or the lottery result based on the second lottery game is displayed.

  Furthermore, the stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) to be described later are made uniform. In the pachinko machine 10, the “town stage”, “sky” There are three stages, “Stage” and “Island Stage”. Various effects such as the above-described variation effects and “reach display” executed during the variation effects are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage.

  The “reach display” refers to a display one step before the “big hit display” indicating that a big win is generated in a variation effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later. . Specifically, the third symbol of the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 6), which will be described later, stops at the same symbol, and the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6) does not stop yet and continues to change. It means the state that is.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the “reach display” is roughly divided into one unit element constituting the effect of “normal reach” (hereinafter, one unit element constituting the effect is referred to as “variable element”), It is executed by developing from the fluctuation element of the “normal reach”, and is executed by developing from the fluctuation element of the “super reach” having a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the fluctuation element of the “normal reach”, and from the fluctuation element of the “normal reach”, “Special reach” variables with higher expectation of jackpot than “super reach” variables are prepared.

  The stage change can be made during a period during which the fluctuating effect is not performed (that is, during the demonstration display), or during a fluctuating factor of “high-speed fluctuation” in which the third symbol is fluctuated at high speed without being visible to the player. This is performed when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player. Each time the frame button 22 is operated, the change is repeated in the order of “city stage” → “empty stage” → “island stage” → “city stage” →. In addition, immediately after the power is turned on, “city stage” is set as the initial stage.

  In addition, when a variation factor of “normal reach” is started in a variation effect performed by a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later, a variation factor of “super reach” from a variation factor of “normal reach” or When the variable element of “special reach” is developed, the selection screen of the variable element of “super reach” or the variable element of “special reach” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variable element of “normal reach”. You may comprise as follows.

  Specifically, on the selection screen, a plurality of candidates that can be selected as a variation factor of “super reach” or a variation factor of “special reach” are displayed, and the frame button 22 is displayed while the selection screen is displayed. When the player presses down, the selected candidate is changed. Then, based on the production candidates selected when developing into the “super reach” variable element or the “special reach” variable element, the “super reach” variable element or the “special reach” variable element is determined. In accordance with the determination, the variable element of “super reach” is executed by the third symbol display device 81 as the variable element of “special reach”.

  In the first embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button that is pressed down. However, instead of the frame button 22, the player makes a predetermined direction with respect to the pachinko machine 10 (for example, with respect to the pachinko machine 10, You may comprise by the operation lever which can be tilted to the front, back, right side, and left). Then, based on the direction in which the operation lever is tilted, the effect stage may be selected and changed, or the “super reach” variation factor or the “special reach” variation factor may be determined.

  The frame button 22 is arranged on the front side of the upper plate 17 as viewed from the side, but the frame button 22 may be arranged at any position as long as the player can perform a pressing operation. For example, you may arrange | position to the upper surface side of the upper plate 17, and may arrange | position in the vicinity (upper surface or side surface) of the lower plate | plate 50 mentioned later.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game by changing the light-emission mode by turning on or flashing according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined “reach display”. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided lighting portions 29 to 33 having built-in light emitting means such as light emitting diodes (Light Emitting Diodes, hereinafter referred to as “LEDs”). .

  In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when the jackpot or “reach display” or the like, the respective illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on and blinking by the built-in LEDs. Lights up or flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that “reach display” is being made one step before the jackpot. Further, on the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front, there is provided a display lamp 34 with a built-in light emitting means such as an LED that can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  A small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 3). ) Can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (hereinafter, abbreviated as “ABS”), in which a region around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 is chrome-plated in order to bring out more gorgeousness. .) A resin plated member 36 is attached.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit, not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit.

  In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed. Inside the operation handle 51, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 7). The touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the motor, the push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by changing the electric resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) for detection is incorporated.

  When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 2, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. Each control board has a micro-processing unit (hereinafter referred to as “MPU”) as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, and various lotteries. A random number generator used in the above, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, and the like are mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, in order to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 3, in the game board 13, a large number of balls for nails, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and balls win a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. There are a general winning port 63 through which a predetermined winning ball can be obtained, a special drawing 1 winning port 64b for the first lottery game, a special drawing 2 winning port 64c for the second lottery game, and an ordinary electric accessory 67a. Alternate allocation unit 64, variable winning device 65 that is opened when a big win by the first lottery game or the second lottery game occurs, normal symbol gate 67 for driving lottery of the ordinary electric accessory 67a, third symbol display The variable display device unit 80 having the device 81 is assembled and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12.

  The general winning opening 63, the alternating distribution unit 64, the variable winning device 65, the normal symbol gate 67, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by the router processing, and the front face of the game board 13 It is fixed from the side with wood screws. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 7) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 3) to prevent a situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once returns to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 3) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is damped and bounced back to the center (hereinafter referred to as “right-handed” is an act of launching a sphere with a momentum or the like hitting the return rubber 69 and passing the sphere through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in front view) The act of causing the fired ball to pass through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front is referred to as “left-handed”). In the first embodiment, in a left-handed game, a ball can enter the distribution entrance ball port of the alternating distribution unit 64, but the ball is difficult to enter the variable winning device 65. In the right-handed game, the ball can enter the variable winning device 65, but the ball is difficult (impossible) to enter the distribution entrance port of the alternate distribution unit 64. A specific configuration will be described later.

  A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A special symbol display device 37 provided with a first LED group 37a and a second LED group 37b made up of a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, is disposed in the upper right part of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right part of FIG. 3). Has been. The special symbol display device 37 performs a variable display of each special symbol corresponding to each control performed by a main controller 110 (see FIG. 7) described later (hereinafter, the special symbol variation display is referred to as “dynamic display”). At the same time, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

  The first LED group 37a is a reserved ball that is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been executed among the balls that have won (entered) a special figure 1 winning port 64b or a special figure 2 winning port 64c described later. The number is indicated by the lighting state. The number of rounds and the error display are also indicated by the lighting state of the first LED group 37a corresponding to the state. The first LED group 37a is configured such that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and suggests various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs depending on the combination of the light emission colors. be able to.

  Note that the “round” in the jackpot means that the bonus winning opening 65a, which will be described later, is opened and closed in order to delimit the number of winning balls in the jackpot. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, “30 seconds” have elapsed after the winning opening 65a is started to be opened, or one “round” is executed by winning ten balls while the large winning opening 65a is opened.

  The second LED group 37b is composed of a total of 16 LEDs including an upper LED group composed of 8 LEDs and a lower LED group composed of 8 LEDs. In the upper LED group, a first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game (hereinafter, the first special symbol may be abbreviated as “special symbol 1”) is variably displayed. In the lower LED group, a second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game (hereinafter, the second special symbol may be abbreviated as “special symbol 2”) is variably displayed.

  Specifically, the upper LED group varies until a variation time (dynamic display time) determined based on winning in a special figure 1 winning port 64b provided in the alternating distribution unit 64 described later elapses. After the display (in the first embodiment, the left LED in the upper LED group is turned on one by one in order and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), the pattern indicating the determination result (in the first embodiment) , The stop display is performed in any of 256 kinds of stop symbols) by the combination of the lighting patterns of the eight LEDs.

  In addition, the lower LED group displays a variable display until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on winning in a special figure 2 winning port 64c provided in the alternating distribution unit 64 described later passes. In one embodiment, the left LED in the lower LED group is lit in order from the leftmost LED one by one, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), and then a pattern indicating the determination result (eight in the first embodiment) Depending on the combination of each LED lighting pattern, any one of 256 types of stop symbols) is stopped and displayed.

  In any LED group, when the determination result is lost, only the leftmost LED is lit and displayed, and when the determination result is a jackpot, each LED group is lit and displayed with a lighting pattern corresponding to the jackpot. Is done. Details of the stop pattern of each LED group will be described later.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit with respect to the ball entering the special figure 1 winning port 64b or the special figure 2 winning port 64c (a jackpot lottery), The jackpot type is also determined according to the winning ports 64b and 64c.

  The jackpot type determined here corresponds to “15 rounds (hereinafter, the round may be simply expressed as“ R ”) based on winning in the special figure 1 winning opening 64b”. "Rate probability variation A" and "latency probability variation B" corresponding to "7R latent probability variation jackpot", and "time shortening A" and "time shortening B" corresponding to "7R hour crash bonus" are prepared. (See FIG. 10A). Further, based on the winning at the special figure 2 winning opening 64c, “probability variation A” corresponding to “15R probability variation jackpot”, “latency probability variation C” corresponding to “15R latent probability variation jackpot”, and “15R time shortening” “Time saving C” corresponding to “big hit” is prepared (see FIG. 10B).

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to the “probability variation state” after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and “15R latent probability variation jackpot” is the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds It shifts to the “probability fluctuation state” after the big jackpot of, but is a jackpot that does not notify that the “probability fluctuation state” is given, and “15R short-time jackpot” is a maximum round number of 15 rounds It is a jackpot that shifts to a “time saving state” after the jackpot. The “7R latent probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot that does not notify that the “probability variation state” is given, although the maximum number of rounds shifts to the “probability variation state” after the seven-round jackpot. In other words, the “7R short jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to the “time reduction state” after the maximum number of rounds is seven.

  Here, “normal gaming state” means a low probability state that is not “probability variation state” or “time shortening state”, and means that the special symbol jackpot probability and the normal symbol hit probability are normal. . That is, in the “normal game state”, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is lower than in the “probability variation state”, and the normal symbol hit probability is lower than that in the “probability variation state” and the “time reduction state”. There is not a gaming state in which the ball is likely to win the special figure 2 winning opening 64c (hereinafter, the state where the ball is easy to win the special figure 2 winning opening 64c may be referred to as a “winning assist state”). This is the most unfavorable gaming state for the player.

  Next, the “time reduction state” is a state in which a special symbol jackpot probability is a low probability state as in the “normal gaming state”, but a state in which a so-called “time reduction function” in which the normal symbol hit probability has been increased is given. Say. That is, in the “time shortening state”, a later-described ordinary electric accessory 67a provided on the right side of the later-described alternate distribution unit 64 is likely to be in an open state, and as a result, a special figure in the alternate distribution unit 64 is obtained. 2. A gaming state in which a ball can easily enter the winning opening 64c, that is, a winning assist state.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the “time reduction state” is determined in advance for each jackpot after the jackpot of the jackpot type “time-short A”, “time-short B” or “time-short C” (see FIG. 10) described later. This is maintained until the specified design variation (50 or 100 in the first embodiment) is performed. Then, after the predetermined number of times of dynamic display of the special symbol is executed, it is configured to shift from the “time reduction state” to the “normal game state”.

  Next, the “probability fluctuation state” refers to a high probability state in which the jackpot probability of the subsequent special symbol is increased as an added value after the jackpot ends. In other words, the “probability variation state” refers to a time when so-called probability change is occurring, in other words, a state of a game that is easily shifted to a special game state.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the jackpot of the jackpot type “probability variation A”, “latency probability variation A”, “latent probability variation B” or “latency probability variation C” (see FIG. 10) described later, Until the symbol variation effect is executed 50 times or 100 times (so-called special time, hereinafter, the initial of Special Time may be abbreviated as “ST”). The symbol jackpot probability becomes a high probability state.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, as the “probability variation state”, the “probability state with time reduction” to which the above “time reduction function” is assigned and the “probability change without time reduction” to which the “time reduction function” is not given. State "is provided. In other words, the “probable state with a short time” is a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a high probability state, and the ordinary electric accessory 67a, which will be described later, is likely to be in an open state. The winning assistance state is such that the ball easily wins the winning opening 64c. On the other hand, the “probability change state without a short time” is a state with a high probability of jackpot of a special symbol, but since the ordinary electric accessory 67a is not likely to be in an open state (not likely to be), the special figure is similar to the “normal game state”. 2. It becomes a non-winning assist state that is not a winning assist state for the winning port 64c.

  The “prone change state with short time” is a jackpot type “probability variation A”, “latency probability variation A”, “latency probability variation B” or “latency probability variation C” (see FIG. 10), which will be described later. The number of special symbol fluctuation effects is maintained for a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 in the first embodiment). On the other hand, after the specified number of special symbols have been dynamically displayed, the “probable state with time reduction” based on the jackpot of the jackpot type “latency probability variation A” or “latency probability variation B” (see FIG. 10) described later. ”Is the“ probability change state without time reduction ”, and is the“ probability change state with time reduction ”based on the jackpot of the jackpot type“ probability variation A ”or“ latency probability variation C ”(see FIG. 10) described later. Is configured to shift to the “normal gaming state”.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as a “probability variation state” effect mode, a “probability change notification effect mode” for informing the player that the special symbol jackpot probability is high probability state and In addition, there is provided a “latent probability change effect mode” that does not notify the player that the jackpot probability is in a high probability state.

  The “probability change notification effect mode” is to notify the player by the third symbol display device 81 or the like, which will be described later, during the “probability change notification effect mode” that the special symbol jackpot probability is high. It is configured. In the first embodiment, when a jackpot type “probability variation A” (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, is won, the “probability change notification effect mode” is executed after the jackpot is completed.

  On the other hand, the “latency probability changing effect mode” is a high probability state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased during the “latency probability changing effect mode”, and the player is notified by the third symbol display device 81 and the like described later. It is configured not to. In other words, the “latency probability variation effect mode” performs an effect equivalent to the effect corresponding to the “short-time notification effect mode” or “normal notification mode” described later, and determines whether the player is in “probability variation state” or “reduced time”. It is configured to make it impossible to identify whether it is “state” or “normal game state” (difficulty), and to give a game property that makes it possible to predict which game state the user is in.

  In the first embodiment, when a jackpot type “latency probability variation A”, “latency probability variation B” or “latency probability variation C” (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, is won, "Aspect" is performed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a “time reduction notification effect mode” that notifies the player that the “time reduction function” is provided is provided as an effect mode of the “time reduction state”. . In this “short time notification effect mode”, during the “short time notification effect mode”, the player is notified by the third symbol display device 81 or the like, which will be described later, that the normal symbol hit probability has been increased. It is configured. In the first embodiment, when winning a jackpot type “Time-short A”, “Time-short B” or “Time-short C” (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, “time-short notification effect mode” is executed after the jackpot is over. .

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, as the “normal gaming state” effect mode, a “normal effect mode” different from the “short-time notification effect mode (latent probability change effect mode)” and “probability change notification effect mode” is provided. It has been. This “normal effect mode” is informed to the player by the 3rd symbol display device 81, etc., which will be described later, during the “normal effect mode” that the player has not shifted to a state advantageous to the player. It is configured. In the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, when the “probability variation state” or “time shortening state” ends, or the jackpot type “latency probability variation A” or “latency probability variation B”. When the special symbol variation effect is completed 50 times after the jackpot of (see FIG. 10), the “normal effect mode” is executed.

  In other words, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is configured such that the “latency probability changing effect mode” executes an effect equivalent to the “short time notification effect mode” or the “normal effect mode”. By configuring in this way, the player can determine whether the current gaming state is a “probability variation state”, a “time reduction state”, or a “probability variation state”. It is impossible to clearly identify which game state the player is staying in, because it is impossible to identify (difficult). By configuring in this way, while the “latency probability changing effect mode” is being executed, gameability that allows the player to infer which game state is in effect is born, and the interest of the game can be improved. .

  In addition, after the jackpot of the jackpot type “latency probability variation A” or “latency probability variation B” (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, is finished, the special game variation effect is terminated 50 times. Until the special symbol variation effect is executed 50 times, it is internally in a “probability variation state”, which is advantageous to the player, but on the effect, the “normal effect mode” is being executed. . On the other hand, after the jackpot of the jackpot type “Time A” or “Time B” (see FIG. 10), when the special symbol variation effect ends 50 times, the subsequent game state is internally “normal game state”. In this case, the “normal effect mode” is being executed. For this reason, the player can win the jackpot even after the jackpot type “Time A” or “Time B” has been played 50 times and the “Time Reduction State” has ended. It is impossible to identify whether the jackpot is based on the type “Time A” or “Time B” or the jackpot based on the jackpot type “latency probability variation A” or “latency probability variation B”.

  By configuring in this way, the situation where the “normal effect mode” indicating the “normal game state” is executed by not allowing the player to recognize whether the state is the “probability variation state” or the “normal game state”. Even so, it is possible to cause the player to guess the possibility of being in the “probability fluctuation state” internally, and to continuously execute the game. Therefore, even after the “time reduction state” has ended, the player's willingness to continue playing can be improved and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

  Here, the display mode of the second LED group 37b for each jackpot type will be described. As the stop display (lighting display) of the upper LED group for the first special symbol, the display pattern corresponding to the loss is one type, the display pattern corresponding to the jackpot type “Time A” is 63 types, and the jackpot type “Time B” The corresponding display patterns are 63 types, the display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type “latency probability variation A” are 64 types, the display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type “latency probability variation B” are 64 types, and the jackpot type “probability variation A”. A total of 256 display patterns are provided, one corresponding display pattern. Each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type, and is associated with a random display pattern in advance. Therefore, when the player looks at the display pattern of the upper LED group, the stop display of the loss and the stop display of the jackpot type “probability variation A” can be recognized, while the jackpot types “time-short A”, “time-short B” "," Latency probability variation A "or" latency probability variation B "is configured to be difficult to identify.

  In addition, as a stop display (lighting display) of the lower LED group for the second special symbol, there are one display pattern corresponding to the loss, 127 display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type “time short C”, and a jackpot type “latency probability”. There are a total of 256 types of display patterns, 127 types of display patterns corresponding to “variation C” and one type of display pattern corresponding to jackpot type “probability variation A”. And each display pattern does not have specific regularity for every jackpot type like the upper LED group, and the random display pattern is matched beforehand. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the lower LED group, the stop display of the loss and the stop display of the jackpot type “probability variation A” can be recognized, while the jackpot type “time-short C” or “latency probability” It is difficult to identify which stop display of “variation C” is displayed.

  By configuring in this way, even if each jackpot type is displayed in the stop display of the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, it is not necessary to grasp all the jackpot types corresponding to each stop display. Since it is difficult for the player to recognize the winning jackpot type, a game is created that allows the player to guess which gaming state the player is in while the “latent probability change effect mode” is being executed. , You can improve the fun of the game.

  Returning to FIG. 3, the description will be continued. The game area of the game board 13 is provided with one or a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win.

  In addition, an alternating distribution unit 64 in which a ball flowing down the game area can enter is arranged at the lower center of the game area. The alternating distribution unit 64 mainly includes a distribution entrance port into which a ball flowing down the game area can enter, and a left path in the alternating distribution unit 64 for the ball that has entered the distribution entrance port. Alternatively, the distribution device 64a that alternately distributes to the right path, the special figure 1 winning port 64b in which the balls distributed to the left path by the distribution device 64a can enter, and the distribution device 64a are distributed to the right path. And a special figure 2 winning opening 64c into which a ball can enter.

  When a ball wins a special figure 1 prize opening 64b provided in this alternate distribution unit 64, a special figure 1 prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the special figure 1 prize is awarded. Due to the turn-on of the mouth switch, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 13) wins the first special symbol jackpot (that is, the first lottery game). The dynamic display of the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the upper LED group in the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81 provides the variation effect of the third symbol. Executed.

  In addition, when a ball wins a special figure 2 winning port 64c provided in the alternating distribution unit 64, a special figure 2 winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. The main special control device 110 (see FIG. 13) wins the big special lottery (that is, the second lottery game) due to the turn-on of the winning prize switch. The dynamic display of the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the lower LED group in the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81 provides the variation effect of the third symbol. Executed.

  Note that the special figure 1 winning opening 64b and the special figure 2 winning opening 64c are each one of the winning openings through which two balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won.

  Here, a mode in which the balls that have entered the alternating distribution unit 64 are alternately distributed to the left path or the right path by the distribution device 64a will be described. The ball that has entered the alternating sorting unit 64 and has flowed down from the sorting entrance port fits into the space formed by the central plate portion and the right receiving plate of the sorting device 64a. Then, the right side receiving plate is pushed down by its own weight to rotate the sorting device 64a, and the right side receiving plate comes into contact with the wall portion below the sorting device 64a of the alternating sorting unit 64 so that the right side receiving plate comes into contact with the right side receiving plate. The whole is on the lower side of the rotating shaft portion and the left receiving plate is on the upper side of the rotating shaft portion. Accordingly, the allocating device 64a is allowed to flow down the sphere to the right path, and in this state, the sphere rolls on the upper surface of the right receiving plate and is guided to the right path. At this time, rather than the repulsive force between the sorting side magnet (not shown) and the unit side magnet (not shown), the force that pushes down the right support plate (turns the sorting device 64a) by its own weight. Is large, the sorting device 64a is rotated against the repulsive force of the magnet. Again, the repulsive force of the magnet maintains the state where the left receiving plate is above the rotating shaft and the right receiving plate is below the rotating shaft, that is, the left guide position.

  Then, the ball that has entered the alternating sorting unit 64 and then flowed down from the sorting ball inlet fits into the space formed by the central plate portion and the left receiving plate of the sorting device 64a. Then, by pushing down the left receiving plate by its own weight, the sorting device 64a rotates, the leading end side of the left receiving plate abuts against the wall portion of the alternating sorting unit 64, and the entire left receiving plate is moved from the rotating shaft portion. On the lower side, the right side receiving plate is in a state above the rotating shaft portion. Accordingly, the sorting device 64a is allowed to flow down the sphere to the left path, and in this state, the sphere rolls on the upper surface of the left receiving plate and is guided to the left path. Also at this time, the force of pushing down the left receiving plate by the weight of the sphere (turning the sorting device 64a) rather than the repulsive force of the sorting side magnet (not shown) and the unit side magnet (not shown). Since the direction is larger, the sorting device 64a is rotated against the repulsive force of the magnet. Again, the repulsive force of the magnet maintains the state in which the left receiving plate is below the rotating shaft portion and the right receiving plate is above the rotating shaft portion, that is, the right guide position. By repeating these movements alternately, the balls that have entered the alternate sorting unit 64 are alternately distributed to the left path and the right path.

  The left path of the alternating sorting unit 64 is a path through which the sphere guided to the left side in the alternating sorting unit 64 flows down by the sorting device 64a. A left outlet from which the sphere flowing down the left path flows out is provided below the left path, and a special figure 1 winning port 64b is disposed below the left outlet. Therefore, the sphere guided to the left route is configured to win a special figure 1 winning opening 64b after flowing down the left route.

  The right path of the alternating sorting unit 64 is a path through which the sphere guided to the right side in the alternating sorting unit 64 flows down by the sorting device 64a. Below the right side of the right side path is provided a right side outlet through which a sphere flowing down the right side path flows out, and a special figure 2 winning port 64c is disposed below the right side outlet. Therefore, the sphere guided to the right route is configured to win the special figure 2 winning opening 64c after flowing down the right route.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the alternating distribution unit 64 as viewed from the front, and a horizontally-long rectangular large winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 7) is a big hit, after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, The second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a jackpot stop symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. Thereafter, the opening / closing plate 65b (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable winning device 65 is opened, and the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which a ball is likely to win in the big winning opening 65a. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until “30 seconds” elapses or 10 balls are won).

  The special winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the special winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state (big win state) advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of gaming value (game value) than usual. Prize balls are paid out.

  Further, in the big prize opening 65a of the variable prize winning device 65, a right probability variation area 73 (see FIG. 4) and a left certain probability variation area 74 (see FIG. 4) in which a ball that has flowed into the big prize winning opening 65a can flow down, A discharge passage 75 (see FIG. 4) is provided. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, in the special game state (big hit state), the right or wrong change area 73 and the left chance change area 74 are controlled to be valid or invalid, and the ball that has flowed into the big prize opening 65a becomes effective. By passing through the set right probability variation region 73 or left probability variation region 74, the “probability variation state” is generated after the special gaming state is completed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the detail of the variable winning apparatus 65 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view schematically showing a front view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning device 65 is configured to open and close the open / close plate 65b forward with the lower side of the open / close plate 65b as an axis, covering the large winning opening 65a. A prize winning solenoid 65c (see FIG. 7), a prize winning switch 71 for detecting a ball won in the prize winning opening 65a, a guide passage 72 through which the ball detected by the prize winning switch 71 flows down, A right probability variation area 73 provided on the downstream side (left side) of the guide passage 72, a left probability variation area 74 provided on the downstream side (left side) of the right probability variation area 73, and a downstream side (left side) of the left probability variation area 74. ) And a discharge passage 75 provided in the above.

  The big prize opening switch 71 is embedded in the passage in the vicinity of the big prize opening 65a, and when the balls are detected by the big prize opening switch 71, 15 prize balls are paid out. In addition, when 10 balls are detected by the big prize opening switch 71 after the opening / closing plate 65b is opened, the opening / closing plate 65b is closed and one round is completed.

  The guide passage 72 is a passage through which the ball that has flowed into the special winning opening 65a flows down, and a right side probability variation region 73 and a left side probability variation region 74, which will be described later, are provided at predetermined positions of the guide passage 72, and the right side probability variation. A discharge passage 75 described later is provided on the downstream side of the region 73 and the left side probability variation region 74. Accordingly, the sphere flowing into the special winning opening 65a and flowing down the guide passage 72 passes through the right side probability variation region 73, the left side probability variation region 74, or the discharge passage 75.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, after the ball that has flowed into the big prize opening 65a is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, it passes through the guide passage 72 until it reaches the upper side of the right-side probability changing area 73 described later. .5 seconds ", and the ball that has flowed into the big prize opening 65a is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, and then reaches the upper part of the left-side probability changing area 74 described later via the guide passage 72. It takes about 1.6 seconds. Accordingly, the sphere detected by the special winning opening switch 71 is configured to be able to flow into the right probability variation region 73 or the left probability variation region 74 within “2 seconds”.

  The right-side probability changing region 73 is disposed in a closed state (protruding state) so that an upper surface thereof is flush with a bottom surface (rolling surface of a sphere) of the guide passage 72, and is changed from a closed state to an open state (immersion state). A right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a configured to be displaceable, a right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a capable of opening / closing the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a (see FIG. 7), and a right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a. The right probability change region passage 73c that allows the sphere to flow down, and the right probability change region switch 73d that is embedded in the right probability change region passage 73c and that can detect the sphere passing through the right probability change region passage 73c. ing.

  The left probability variation region 74 is closed (protruded), and its upper surface is flush with the bottom surface of the guide passage 72 so that the left probability variation region can be displaced from the closed state to the open state (immersion state). A left probability variation region solenoid 74b (see FIG. 7) capable of opening and closing the left probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a, and a left probability variation region passage provided on the downstream side of the left probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a and allowing a sphere to flow down. 74c and a left probability variation region switch 74d that is embedded in the left probability variation region passage 74c and can detect a sphere passing through the left probability variation region passage 74c.

  When the ball that has flowed into the special winning opening 65a does not flow into either the right probability variation area 73 or the left certain probability variation area 74, the discharge passage 75 removes the ball from the variable winning device 65 (the back side of the game board 13). It is a passage for discharging to.

  The right probability change region opening / closing plate 73a and the left probability change region opening / closing plate 74a are made of a transparent or substantially transparent resin. Therefore, the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are opened or closed by the probability variation region opening and closing plates 73a and 74a by making it difficult for the player to recognize the positions (driving modes) of the probability variation region opening and closing plates 73a and 74a. It can be made difficult for the player to determine whether or not. Note that the right probability change region opening / closing plate 73a and the left probability change region opening / closing plate 74a may be made of a colored resin.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the inflow pattern of the sphere that has flowed into the large winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 will be described. FIG. 5A shows a case where the right probability changing area opening / closing plate 73a is in an open state (immersion state) and the left probability changing area opening / closing plate 74a is in a closed state (protruding state). FIG. 5B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 for explaining the behavior of the inflowing sphere, and FIG. 5B is a diagram in which the left probability changing area opening / closing plate 74a is in an open state (immersion state) and a right probability change. FIG. 5C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 for explaining the behavior of a ball that has flowed into the big winning opening 65a when the area opening / closing plate 73a is in a closed state (protruding state). When the right probability changing area opening / closing plate 73a and the left probability changing area opening / closing plate 74a are both in the closed state (projecting state), a schematic diagram of the variable winning device 65 for explaining the behavior of the ball flowing into the big winning opening 65a. It is sectional drawing.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, when a special game state is generated by winning a jackpot, the opening / closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened, and a ball can flow into the big winning opening 65a. When the right probability variation area opening / closing plate 73a is in an open state (immersion state) and the left probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a is in a closed state (protrusion state), the ball that has flowed into the big prize opening 65a is: First, it is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, and then flows down the guide passage 72. Since the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a is opened (immersed) by the right probability variation region solenoid 73b (see FIG. 7), the sphere flows into the right probability variation region passage 73c. Thereafter, the sphere is detected by a right probability variation region switch 73d embedded in the right probability variation region passage 73c. Note that the ball detected by the right probability change area switch 73d is discharged out of the variable winning device 65 (on the back side of the game board 13) through a discharge path (not shown).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 5B, when the right probability change region opening / closing plate 73a is in a closed state (projecting state) and the left probability change region opening / closing plate 74a is in an open state (immersion state), The ball that has flowed into the winning opening 65a is first detected by the large winning opening switch 71, and then flows down the guide passage 72. Then, the upper surface of the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a in the closed state (protruding state) rolls, and the left probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a provided on the downstream side of the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a is replaced with a left probability variation region opening / closing solenoid 74b (FIG. 7), the sphere flows into the left probability changing region passage 74c. Thereafter, the sphere is detected by a left probability changing region switch 74d embedded in the left probability changing region passage 74c. The ball detected by the left probability changing area switch 74d is discharged out of the variable winning device 65 (on the back side of the game board 13) through a discharge path (not shown).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 5 (c), when both the right probability changing area opening / closing plate 73a and the left probability changing area opening / closing plate 74a are in the closed state (protruding state), , Detected by the big prize opening switch 71, and then flows down the guide passage 72. Then, the upper surface of the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a in the closed state (protruding state) and the upper surface of the left probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a are rolled to the outside of the variable winning device 65 (game) from the discharge passage 75 provided on the downstream side. It is discharged to the back side of the panel 13).

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening (not shown) that is opened and closed separately from the big winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the second LED group 37b corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the special symbol display device 37, the big winning opening 65a is predetermined. Opened for a certain period of time, and during the opening of the grand prize winning opening 65a, a large opening opening provided separately from the big winning prize opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins the prize winning opening 65a. The gaming state may be formed as a special gaming state (see the second and subsequent embodiments).

  Returning to FIG. 3, the description will be continued. A normal symbol gate 67 is provided above the variable winning device 65 in the front view and on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later. The normal symbol gate 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) for passing a sphere in the vertical direction. When the ball passes through the normal symbol gate 67, a normal symbol switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main controller 110 draws a normal symbol in accordance with the on state. The normal symbol gate 67 only serves as a lottery for variable display of the normal symbol, and is configured such that no prize ball or the like is paid out even when the ball passes.

  On the downstream side of the variable winning device 65 and on the right side of the alternating distribution unit 64, a normal electric accessory 67a is disposed. The ordinary electric accessory 67a mainly includes a rotating plate and a rotating solenoid (not shown) that opens and closes the rotating plate.

  The main controller 110 according to the first embodiment normally maintains the rotating plate of the ordinary electric accessory 67a in an upright state and covers the right side portion of the alternating distribution unit 64 so that the alternating distribution unit 64 is in a normal state. Is prevented from flowing into the special figure 2 winning opening 64c from the right side portion of the ball. When the normal symbol is variably displayed and the win is won, the solenoid for rotation (not shown) is driven for a predetermined time, and the rotary plate of the ordinary electric accessory 67a is moved for the predetermined time. Driving from an upright state to an open state (tilted state) tilted to the right by a predetermined angle (for example, 45 degrees) allows the inflow of balls from the right side of the alternating distribution unit 64 to the special figure 2 winning port 64c. In this way, the sphere flowing down the right side of the alternating distribution unit 64 is in a state where it is easy to win a special figure 2 winning port 64c, that is, in a winning assist state.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning in the variable display of the normal symbol changes according to the gaming state. Specifically, in the “normal game state” or “probability change state without time reduction”, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to a low probability state (for example, 1/10), and it is difficult to win in the normal symbol variable display. Thus, the rotating plate of the ordinary electric accessory 67a is made difficult to be in the open state (tilted state) so that it is difficult to win the special figure 2 winning opening 64c. On the other hand, in the “probable state with short time” or “time shortened state”, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to a high probability state (for example, 9/10), and it is easy to win in the variable symbol normal display. It is configured so that the rotating plate of the electric accessory 67a can be easily opened (tilted), and the special figure 2 winning port 64c can be easily won.

  Instead of changing the probability of hitting a normal symbol from “normal game state” or “probability change state without time reduction”, such as “probability change state with time reduction” or “time reduction state”, it depends on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 In addition, the time for which the rotating plate of the ordinary electric accessory 67a rotates and the number of times the rotating plate of the ordinary electric accessory 67a rotates may be changed. Specifically, in the “probable change state with time reduction” or “time reduction state”, the time for which the rotating plate of the ordinary electric accessory 67a rotates is set longer than that in the “normal game state” or “non-time reduction probability change state”. Alternatively, the number of rotations of the rotating plate of the ordinary electric accessory 67a per hit may be made larger than that in the “normal gaming state” or the “timeless probability changing state”. Further, in the “probable state with time reduction” or “time shortening state”, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, the rotation time of the rotation plate of the normal electric accessory 67a is increased, and the normal electric accessory 67a is increased. You may make it perform simultaneously at least 2 with the increase in the frequency | count of rotation of a rotation board simultaneously.

  A variable display device unit 80 is disposed from the central portion of the game area to the right area. The variable display unit 80 has a third symbol in synchronization with the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37, triggered by a ball entering the special symbol 1 winning port 64b or the special symbol 2 winning port 64c (start winning award). The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”), and an LED that variably displays a normal symbol triggered by the passage of a ball of the normal symbol gate 67. A normal symbol display device 83 is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 17-inch large liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 7) to be described later, for example, left, middle and right The three symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6) are displayed.

  Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6) is composed of a plurality of symbols. These symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row Z1 to Z3, and the third symbol is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is displayed variably. The third symbol display device 81 of the first embodiment is commonly used in the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol, and is used for the control of the main controller 110. The accompanying game state is displayed on the special symbol display device 37, while a decorative display corresponding to the display on the special symbol display device 37 is performed using the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Is. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 6, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 6 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is configured by attaching a number from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which odd numbers (“1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, In the main symbol with “9”), a large number is added almost to the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (“0”, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) show characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box. An accompanying symbol is added, and an even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery result of any special symbol by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7) described later is a big hit, a variation effect in which the same main symbols are arranged is produced. It is configured so that a jackpot is generated after the variation production is finished. When winning a jackpot type of “probability variation A” to be described later, a variation effect in which main symbols (corresponding to “probability variation notification symbol”) with the number “7” are arranged is performed. On the other hand, jackpot types other than “probability variation A” to be described later, that is, “time reduction A”, “time reduction B”, “time reduction C”, “latency probability variation A”, “latency probability variation B” or “latency probability variation C”. When winning the jackpot type of “”, the main symbols with numbers other than “7”, that is, the main symbols with numbers “1” to “6”, “8” or “9” (“ Fluctuation effect is performed that corresponds to “non-probable change notification symbol”. By configuring in this way, the player can identify the jackpot type of the jackpot to be generated only by confirming the main symbols (except for the main symbol with the number “7”) arranged in the variation effect. Can not.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into three in the vertical direction, and the lower 2/3 holds the main display area Dm that produces the variation of the third symbol. It is composed of a cockpit display area Db for displaying the number of balls, and the other upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, the left symbol row Z1 is displayed in the display region Dm1, and the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in the display region Dm2. The right symbol row Z3 is displayed in the display area Dm3.

  In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending order (or descending order) of the numbers in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, and the scrolling effect is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In addition, in each symbol row Z1-Z3, you may comprise so that the arrangement | sequence of a number may differ, respectively. For example, the symbols may be arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, while the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each variation effect, the third symbol is displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Stopped display. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination; hereinafter referred to as “jacket display”) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, while the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing the variation effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the sphere is special. When entering the winning opening 64b in FIG. 1, the number of times of entering (the number of reserved balls) is reserved up to 4 times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, and the special symbols 1st to 4th reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d of the first reserved symbol display area Db1 corresponding to the first special symbol of the cockpit display area Db. Also shown. In the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, one reserved symbol (“○” symbol in the normal display mode) per reserved ball (the number of reserved balls once) of the first special symbol ( White circle symbols)) are respectively displayed, and the number of reserved balls is displayed in accordance with the number of reserved symbols displayed in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d.

  That is, when one reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol Indicates that the number of reserved balls is 1 and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed when two reserved symbols are displayed in the first and second reserved symbol display areas Db1a and Db1b. If the total number of three reserved symbols is displayed in each of the special figure 1 first to third reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1c, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol Is four times, and when four total symbols are displayed in each of the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol Indicates 4 times. In addition, when the reserved symbols are not displayed in the special figure 1 1st to 4th reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 0 and there is a variation effect that is reserved. Indicates not to.

  In addition, while the 3rd symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing the variation effect (dynamic display) of the 3rd symbol corresponding to the 1st special symbol or the 2nd special symbol, the sphere is special. When entering the winning entrance 64c in FIG. 2, the number of times of entering (the number of reserved balls) is reserved up to 4 times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, and the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d of the second reserved symbol display area Db2 corresponding to the second special symbol of the cockpit display area Db. Also shown. In the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, one reserved symbol ("○" symbol in the normal display mode) for one reserved ball (the number of reserved balls once) of the second special symbol ( White circle symbols)) are displayed, respectively, and the number of reserved balls is displayed in accordance with the number of reserved symbols displayed in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d.

  That is, when one reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a in the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a to Db2d, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol Indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is displayed when two reserved symbols are displayed in the first and second reserved symbol display areas Db2a and Db2b, respectively. Indicates that the number is 2 times, and when the total number of three reserved symbols is displayed in each of the special figure 2 first to third reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2c, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol Is four times, and when four total symbols are displayed one by one in each of the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol Indicates 4 times. In addition, when the reserved symbols are not displayed in the special figure 2 1st to 4th reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 and there is a variation effect that is reserved. Indicates not to.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time, and only one of the lottery games is executed. It is configured. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when any of the lottery games being executed is finished, the holding ball of the first special symbol and the holding ball of the second special symbol are respectively stored. The second lottery game of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the first lottery game of the first special symbol (so-called special figure 2 priority fluctuation). The lottery game may be executed in the order of winning, or the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol may be executed simultaneously.

  In the center portion of the cockpit display area Db, there is provided an execution symbol display area Db0 in which an execution symbol indicating that a variation effect is being executed in the main display area Dm is displayed. The execution symbol display area Db0 is provided at the center of the cockpit display area Db, that is, on the right side of the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a and on the left side of the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a. An execution symbol larger than each reserved symbol displayed in each reserved symbol display area Db1a to Db1d, Db2a to Db2d is configured to be displayed. The execution symbol display area Db0 is displayed as an execution symbol by shifting (shifting) the reserved symbols displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a or the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a. The

  The execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is erased when the variation effect ends, and with the deletion of the execution symbol, the displayed holding symbol is the lower side (if the first special symbol, the right side, If it is a 2 special symbol, it is moved and displayed as a reserved symbol on the left side). Specifically, for example, in the situation where there is no reserved symbol of the second special symbol and there are four reserved symbols of the first special symbol, the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends. As a result, when the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is erased, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 first holding symbol display area Db1a, the execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0 is Moved (shifted) and displayed. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a. Furthermore, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 fourth reserved symbol display area Db1d, the symbol is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c.

  Also, for example, in a situation where there are four reserved symbols of the second special symbol, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 with the end of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is deleted. In this case, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special symbol 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a, the symbol is moved (shifted) and displayed as the executed symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0. In addition, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 second reserved symbol display area Db2b, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a. Furthermore, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 third reserved symbol display area Db2c, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 2 second reserved symbol display area Db2b. In addition, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 fourth reserved symbol display area Db2d, the symbol is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 2 third reserved symbol display area Db2c.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the execution symbol is continuously displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 while the variation effect is being executed in the main display area Dm (in the variable element of “super reach” or “special reach”. Excluding some of the fluctuation factors). On the other hand, when the variation effect ends, or when the variation factor of “super reach” or the variation factor of “special reach” is being executed, the execution symbol is deleted. That is, when the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, it indicates that the variation effect is being executed (continues) in the main display area Dm, and the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0. If it is not performed, it indicates that the variation effect is not executed (not continued) in the main display area Dm, or the variation factor of “super reach” or the variation factor of “special reach” is being executed.

  Further, the cockpit display area Db is configured to be able to execute a “hold change notice” using the hold symbol and the execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display region Db. This “pending change notice” means changing the jackpot expectation degree of the variation effect executed in the main display area Dm to a plurality of levels of the hold symbol and the display color of the execution symbol from before the execution of the variation effect to during execution. It is a notice to suggest.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, as the “hold change notice”, the display color of the hold symbol and the execution symbol is changed from “white”, which is a normal display mode, to “blue”, red display of a blue display mode. It is configured to be changeable to “red” in the aspect or “rainbow” in the rainbow display form. This pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the selection ratio of the display color of the reserved symbol and the execution symbol is different when the “big hit display” occurs in the variation effect or when the “reach display” occurs. By changing the display color of the reserved symbol and the execution symbol from the normal display mode (“white”) to another display mode (for example, “blue”), in the variation effect indicated by the reserved symbol and the execution symbol “ The possibility of the occurrence of “reach display” or “hit display” can be suggested to the player for each display color.

  Specifically, in the “hold change notice”, the change that the hold symbol and the execution symbol show when the hold symbol and the execution symbol are in the “blue” display mode rather than the normal display mode (“white”). In the production, the ratio of “reach display” or “hit display” is set high. In addition, when the hold symbol and the execution symbol are in the display mode of “red” rather than “blue”, the ratio of “reach display” or “jacket display” is higher in the variation effect indicated by the hold symbol and the execution symbol. Is set. Furthermore, when the hold symbol and the execution symbol are in the display mode of “rainbow” rather than “red”, the ratio of “reach display” and “big hit display” in the variation effect indicated by the hold symbol and the execution symbol is higher. Set high.

  In addition, when the display mode of the reserved symbol and the execution symbol is “red”, the variation mode indicated by the “red” reserved symbol or the execution symbol is an aspect of the effect (mainly, “super reach”). The production mode may be referred to as “production mode” or “special reach” production mode (hereinafter referred to as “super reach” production mode or “special reach” production mode. ) Is set to be confirmed. In addition, when the display form of the reserved symbol and the execution symbol is “rainbow color”, it is set so that the appearance of the “big hit display” is confirmed in the variation effect indicated by the “rainbow color” reserved symbol or the execution symbol. Has been. Therefore, in this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved symbol and the execution symbol is “reach display” or “big hit display” step by step in the order of normal (“white”) → “blue” → “red” → “rainbow”. Is set to have high expectation.

  It should be noted that the display form of “rainbow color” of “holding change notice” is set so that it can appear only in the execution symbol, not appearing in the holding symbol. This is because if the reserved symbol is not executed due to some abnormality (for example, power-off) after the display form of “rainbow color” in which the occurrence of the jackpot is confirmed in the reserved symbol is revealed, the player obtains Dissatisfaction occurs because the jackpot that should be made is not obtained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the above dissatisfaction from occurring by configuring the “rainbow color” display mode in which the occurrence of the jackpot is confirmed in advance in the reserved symbol.

  In addition, when the hold symbol is shifted in accordance with the execution (digestion) of the change effect in the state where the display manner of the hold symbol is changed by the “hold change notice”, the display mode of the changed hold symbol is shifted. It is configured to be inherited (inherited) and reflected to the previous reserved symbol or execution symbol. That is, when the display mode of the reserved symbol is changed, the display before the shift is also performed when the changed reserved symbol is shifted to another reserved symbol display area Db1 to Db3 or the execution symbol display area Db0 in accordance with the execution of the variation effect. The mode is configured to be maintained as it is as the display mode of the suspended symbol or the execution symbol after the shift.

  Therefore, for example, when the display color of the reserved symbol changes to “red” in the special figure 1 fourth reserved symbol display area Db1d, the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c → the special figure 1 second reserved. When the symbol display area Db1b → the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a → the execution symbol display area Db0 is shifted, the “red” reserved symbol or the execution symbol is continuously displayed. The

  In addition, in 1st Embodiment, although it comprised so that the holding | maintenance ball number of the fluctuating effect based on the entrance to the special figure 1 prize opening 64b or the special figure 2 prize opening 64c might be each held up to four times, The maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls is a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the four divided areas are different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, the color or lighting pattern may be displayed. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, when information on the number of held balls (holding symbols, etc.) is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the “holding change notice” based on the holding symbols cannot be executed. By making it appear, a pre-reading notice similar to the “holding change notice” may be executed.

  Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of balls to be held corresponding to the maximum number of holdings of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and the holding balls according to the number of lighting lamps in the lit state. It is good also as what displays a number. In the case where the number of held balls is displayed by the holding lamp, it is natural that the pre-reading notice similar to the “holding change notice” of the first embodiment is executed by providing a plurality of display colors of the holding lamp. Is possible.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying characters and notice effect images, respectively. The image displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 gives the player a sense of expectation that is a big hit as a result of the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm. The cockpit display area Db is a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been subjected to the changing effect among the balls that have entered the special figure 1 winning port 64b or the special figure 2 winning port 64c. And an execution symbol related to the variation effect being executed.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 6B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, in the left small area Ds1, a moving image such as a notice symbol appears is displayed, and the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm may be in a state where it is easy to make a transition to a big hit than usual. Suggested to the player.

  In the sub display area Ds, in the central small area Ds2, usually, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in the first embodiment) performs a predetermined action, and the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm is performed. Based on a special action that is different from the specified action, usually the black boy's hair color, usually the white bee color changes, or another character appears, etc. Is done.

  Furthermore, in the sub display area Ds, in the small right area Ds3, a level meter (not shown) that suggests in a stepwise manner whether or not a big hit is generated in the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm appears. Is displayed. This level meter increases (adds) every time the expected level of occurrence of "reach display" or the jackpot expectation level in the variable effect being executed is increased based on the appearance of the notice symbol etc. in the variable effect, When reaching the display limit (MAX display) of the level meter, the jackpot is configured to be confirmed. Accordingly, the sub display area Ds has a function of suggesting the occurrence of “reach display” in the main display area Dm.

  Returning to FIG. 3, the description will be continued. The normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display in which a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” are alternately lit as a display symbol (ordinary symbol) every time the sphere passes the normal symbol gate 67. . In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in the first embodiment, the symbol “◯”), the ordinary electric accessory 67a enters an operating state according to the gaming state. (The rotating plate is rotated).

  The number of balls held in the normal symbol gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is lit and displayed in the normal symbol holding lamp 84. Four normal symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged above the third symbol display device 81. Then, the number of holdings is displayed by the number of lighting of the normal symbol holding lamp 84.

  Note that the normal symbol variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the normal symbol display device 83 as in the first embodiment, as well as the special symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. A part of 81 may be used. Similarly, the normal symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, like the special figure 1 winning port 64b or the special figure 2 winning port 64c, the normal symbol gate 67 is not limited to four times, and is less than three times or five times. You may set to the above number of times (for example, 8 times). Further, when the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol holding lamp 84 may not perform the lighting display.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning entrances (entrance entrances) 63, 64, 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out entrance 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a read only memory (hereinafter abbreviated as “ROM”) 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and controls stored in the ROM 202. Random access memory (hereinafter abbreviated as “RAM”) 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data during the execution of the program, and other interrupt circuits, timer circuits, Various circuits such as a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, the main features of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of dynamic display and variation effects in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results of variable display in the normal symbol display device 83 are included. Perform appropriate processing. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203c that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

  The ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a holding number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, a variation pattern table 202e, a probability variation area open / close table 202f, and a probability variation area valid table 202g. The main controller 110 executes the above main control by using various counters stored in the RAM 203 and various tables stored in the ROM 202.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 8, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are used for lottery lottery, setting of dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37, setting of variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of variable display in the normal symbol display device 83, etc. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to do this. In the description of the various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will also be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 12.

  For the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display setting of the special symbol display device 37, and the variable effect setting of the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the type of stoppage of the jackpot symbol are set. The jackpot type counter C2 used for selection, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting the effect mode of the variation effect, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the variation pattern selection The variation type counter CS1 used for the above is used.

  In addition, the random symbol counter C4 is used for lottery of the normal symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the random number counter C4 per universal symbol. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of “4 milliseconds”, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and some counters are irregular in the main process (see FIG. 33). The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203c set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 has a first reserved ball storage area 203d composed of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) related to the first special symbol and four reserved symbols related to the second special symbol. A second reserved ball storage area 203e composed of areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) is provided, and in each of these areas, a special figure 1 winning port 64b or a special figure 2 winning port 64c is provided. The values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 899”) to a maximum value (for example, “899” in the case of a counter that can take a value of “0 to 899”). After reaching, “0” is set. In particular, when the big hit random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1, and the big hit random number counter C1 is updated from the initial value. Done.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of “0 to 899”, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of “0 to 899”. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 33).

  The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22)). The ball is provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special figure 1 winning port 64b (first special symbol) at the timing when the ball wins the special figure 1 winning port 64b (starting prize). Stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved area of any of the first reserved first to fourth areas. In addition, the ball is provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special figure 2 winning port 64c (second special symbol) at the timing when the ball has won (start winning prize) in the special figure 2 winning port 64c. Stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reserved area of any of the second reserved first to fourth areas.

  The value of the random number for which the jackpot random number counter C1 is a jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the jackpot stored in the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1 and 203e1 in the holding area. A jackpot is determined when the value of the random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number set by the jackpot random number table 202a.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202 a stored in the ROM 202. The jackpot random number table 202a is used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state (a period that is not a “probability variation state”) of a special symbol that is a “normal gaming state” or a “time reduction state”. For the probability state and for the high probability state used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a “probability variation state (probability variation)” which is a high probability state of a special symbol with a higher probability of being a big hit than the low probability state And can be divided into two types. The numbers of random numbers that are jackpots included in the low-probability state and the high-probability state are set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of jackpot random number counters C1 (jackpot random number values) that are jackpots in the low probability state is three, and the value “7,307,582” is the jackpot random number. It is stored in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the low probability state (that is, “normal game state” and “time reduction state”) is set to be 3/900 = 1/300.

  On the other hand, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are jackpots in the high probability state is nine, and the values “28, 122, 298, 390, 486, 567, 656, 750, 866” are It is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the high probability state (that is, the “probability variation state”) is set to be 9/900 = 1/100.

  In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number value is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a so that the jackpot random number value for the low probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state are not duplicated. Is set. Here, if there is a value that is a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, and there is a possibility that the possibility that the jackpot will be illegally assigned increases. On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), by changing the value of the random number that is a jackpot, Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraud.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the jackpot type when the jackpot is reached, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 99”), and the maximum value (for example, “0 to 99, for example). In the case of a counter that can take a value of “”, the counter returns to “0” after reaching “99”). The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22)). The ball is provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special figure 1 winning port 64b (first special symbol) at the timing when the ball wins the special figure 1 winning port 64b (starting prize). Of the first reserved first to fourth areas, the big hit random number counter C1 is stored in the big hit type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reserved area as the first reserved area. In addition, the ball is provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special figure 2 winning port 64c (second special symbol) at the timing when the ball has won (start winning prize) in the special figure 2 winning port 64c. Of the second reserved first to fourth areas, the big hit random number counter C1 is stored in the big hit type counter storage area 203e2 of the second reserved area that is the same as the second reserved area.

  Here, for example, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in one holding area in the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, it is lost. If it is a random number, the variation pattern in the variation effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) are those at the time of the loss. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in one holding area in the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e is a random number that is a big hit, the change pattern or stop in the changing effect The type will be that of the jackpot. In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of “0 to 99”. The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202. The jackpot type table 202b includes a special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 referred to in the first lottery game of the first special symbol and a special figure 2 jackpot type referred to in the second lottery game of the second special symbol. A table 202b2 is provided.

  Here, the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b). FIG. 10A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202. FIG. 10B is also stored in the ROM 202. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot classification table 202b2 for special figure 2 corresponding to the 2nd special symbol. As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the jackpot type table 202b associates a special symbol type, a jackpot type corresponding to the special symbol type, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. It is a table.

  As described above, as described above, after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds is hit, the special symbol jackpot probability and the normal symbol hit probability are both high until the special symbol variation effect is executed 100 times. The state (so-called ST 100 times and 100 time reductions), and “probability variation A” that is a “15R probability variation big hit” informing that the state is a “probability fluctuation state”, and a maximum hit of 15 rounds Later, until the special symbol variation effect is executed 100 times, the special symbol jackpot probability and the normal symbol hit probability are both in a high probability state (so-called ST 100 times and 100 time reductions). “Hidden probability variation C”, which is “15R latent probability variation jackpot” that does not notify that the state is “probability variation state”, and a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds In addition, until the special symbol variation effect is executed 100 times, the normal symbol hit probability is in a high probability state, but the special symbol jackpot probability is in a low probability state (so-called 100 time reduction). The probability of a special symbol jackpot between the “short-time C jackpot” that is “15R hour short jackpot” and the special symbol variation effect is executed 100 times after the maximum number of rounds is seven. Will be in a high probability state (so-called ST100 times), and until the special symbol variation effect is executed 50 times, the normal symbol hit probability will be in a high probability state (so-called 50 time reductions). The change of special symbol after "Large probability variation A" and "Hidden probability variation B" which are "7R latent probability variation jackpot" that does not notify that it is "probability variation state", and the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 7 rounds Until the execution is executed 50 times, the normal symbol hit probability is in a high probability state, but the special symbol jackpot probability is in a low probability state (so-called 50 time reduction), and shifts to a “time reduction state”. There are "Time-short A" and "Time-short B" which are "7R time short hits".

  In the jackpot type table 202b1 for special figure 1 and the jackpot type table 202b2 for special figure 2, each jackpot type is associated with a possible value of the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type.

  In the example of the jackpot type table 202b1 for special figure 1 in FIG. 10A, the value “0-19” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with “time short A” which is “7R short and big jackpot”. The value “20-39” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with “time B,” which is “7R short-time jackpot”, and the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with “latency probability variation A”, which is “7R latent probability variation jackpot”. Is associated with the value “60-79” of the jackpot type counter C2 and “latency probability variation B”, which is also “7R latency probability variation jackpot”, and “15R probability variation jackpot” The value “80 to 99” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with “probability variation A”.

  In the winning lottery of the first special symbol in the first embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any first holding area of the first holding ball storage area 203d becomes a jackpot. If it is a value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reserved area is determined from the jackpot type table 202b1 for special figure 1.

  For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “15”, “time saving A” corresponding to “7R hour / short jackpot” is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “35”, the jackpot If “time B” corresponding to “7R short time big hit” is determined as the type and the value of the big hit type counter C2 is “48”, “latency probability variation A” corresponding to “7R latent probability variation big hit” as the big hit type. If the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “77”, the “latency probability fluctuation B” corresponding to “7R latent probability variation jackpot” is determined as the jackpot type, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “95”. If so, “probability variation A” corresponding to “15R probability variation jackpot” is determined as the jackpot type.

  That is, in the case of winning the jackpot in the first lottery game of the first special symbol (that is, the lottery based on the entrance to the special figure 1 winning port 64b), “time-short A”, “time-short B”, “latency probability Each jackpot type of “variation A”, “latent probability variation B”, and “probability variation A” is configured to be selected equally at a rate of 20%.

  In the example of the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 of FIG. 10B, the value "0 to 39" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "time short C" which is "15R hour short jackpot", The value “40-59” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with “latency probability variation C” which is “15R latent probability variation jackpot”, and the jackpot type is associated with “probability variation A” which is “15R probability variation jackpot”. The value “60 to 99” of the counter C2 is associated.

  In the lottery determination of the second special symbol in the first embodiment, the jackpot random number stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of one of the reserved areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e in the same way as the lottery determination of the first special symbol When the value of the counter C1 is a jackpot value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same holding area is the jackpot type table for special figure 2 202b2.

  For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “10”, “time saving C” corresponding to “15R hour / short jackpot” is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “55”, the jackpot If the “latency probability variation C” corresponding to “15R latent probability variation jackpot” is determined as the type and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “80”, the “probability variation A” corresponding to “15R probability variation jackpot” as the jackpot type is determined. Is determined.

  That is, when the big win is won in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (that is, the lottery based on the entrance to the special figure 2 winning opening 64c), the jackpot type of “Time C” is 40%. The jackpot type of “latency probability variation C” is selected at a rate of 20%, and the jackpot type of “probability variation A” is selected at a rate of 40%.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the lottery game with the second special symbol has a higher game value for the player than the lottery game with the first special symbol. A lottery with a special symbol, that is, whether to enter the special figure 2 winning port 64c rather than entering the special figure 1 winning port 64b is born, a variation in the game, and the interest of the game is enhanced Yes.

  Here, the opening pattern and the effective pattern of the right probability variation area 73 and the left probability variation area 74 in each jackpot type will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when a special symbol jackpot is won, each round (1 to 7 rounds, or 1 to 15 rounds, depending on the jackpot type) Similarly, the opening pattern of the right probability variation area 73 or the left probability variation area 74 (drive pattern of the right probability variation area opening / closing plate 73a and the left probability variation area opening / closing plate 74a) is set for each round, and the right probability variation area 73 or The effective pattern of the left side probability variation region 74 is set.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the right probability variation region 73 or the left probability variation region 74 (hereinafter, the right probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region 74 that are effectively set in the jackpot are collectively referred to as a “probability variation region 73”. , 74 ”(which may be referred to as“, 74 ”), the probability variation state is configured to be provided (generated) after the end of the jackpot. Even if the sphere passes, the “probability variation state” is not provided (generated).

  Conventionally, a probability variation area through which a ball can pass is provided in the large prize opening 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 that is opened at the time of a big hit, and the probability variation area is controlled to open and close by an opening / closing lever or the like, and the ball that has flowed into the big prize opening 65a. There is a pachinko machine that generates (provides) a “probability variation state” after the jackpot is over when the player passes the probability variation region.

  In such a pachinko machine, when a big hit occurs, for example, a big hit symbol corresponding to a “time reduction state” or “normal game state” without notifying the player whether or not a “probability variation state” will occur. Is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, etc., and the “latency probability changing effect mode (that is,“ time-notification notification effect mode ”or“ normal notification effect mode ”. ”Is performed instead of“ time shortening state ”or“ normal game state ”. Then, during the jackpot, the opening lever is controlled to open and close at a predetermined timing based on the jackpot type.

  Specifically, for example, in the case of a jackpot type that generates a “probability variation state”, the opening / closing lever is controlled to open and close so that the ball that has flowed into the winning prize opening 65a passes through the probability variation area, A “probability variation state” is generated after the jackpot is over. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot type that does not cause a “probability variation state”, the opening / closing lever is controlled to open and close so that the ball that has flowed into the winning prize opening 65a does not pass through the probability variation area. The “variable state” is not generated, and the “time reduction state” or the “normal game state” is generated.

  By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the game state after the jackpot is “probability variation state”, “time reduction state” or “normal game state” (impossible). It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game that makes the player guess whether or not the game is being played in any game state. Further, even in the “time reduction state” or “normal game state”, the player is inferred that it may be a “probability variation state” contrary to the production mode, and the game is continuously executed. Thus, the operation rate of the pachinko machine can be improved.

  However, the pachinko machine is configured to generate a “probability variation state” when the ball passes through the probability variation area even when the “latent probability variation effect mode” is executed, and therefore, the big winning opening 65a. The player continues to pay attention to whether or not the ball passes through the probability variation area, and when the player visually recognizes that the ball has passed through the probability variation area, a game in which a “probability variation state” occurs. It will be recognized by the person, and the expected gameplay will collapse. In addition, if the “latency probability changing effect mode” is continuously executed after the occurrence of the “probability fluctuation state” is recognized by the player, the interest of the game cannot be given to the player. On the other hand, there is a risk of being awakened.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, two probability variation areas (the right probability variation area 73 and the left certain probability variation area 74) are provided in the large winning opening 65a, and each probability variation is determined for each round according to the jackpot type. The drive control is performed so that one of the opening / closing plates 73a and 74a provided for each of the regions 73 and 74 is opened, and the player can not recognize whether the probability changing regions 73 and 74 are valid or invalid (internal Control) to switch. When the ball passes through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set effectively during the jackpot, a “probability variation state” is generated after the jackpot is over. On the other hand, even if the sphere passes through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 set to be invalid, the “probability variation state” is not generated after the big hit.

  That is, for example, in a state where the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a is opened and the sphere can flow into the right probability variation region 73, when the right probability variation region 73 is set to be effective, the sphere has passed through the right probability variation region 73. In some cases, a “probability fluctuation state” is generated after the jackpot. On the other hand, when the right probability variation region 73 is set to invalid in a state where the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a is opened and the sphere can flow into the right probability variation region 73, even if the sphere passes through the right probability variation region 73. The “probability variation state” is not generated after the jackpot is over.

  Further, for example, when the left probability variation region 74 is set to be effective when the left probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a is opened and the sphere can flow into the left probability variation region 74, the sphere has passed through the left probability variation region 74. In some cases, a “probability fluctuation state” is generated after the jackpot. On the other hand, when the left probability variation region 74 is set to be invalid in a state where the left probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a is opened and the sphere can flow into the left probability variation region 74, even if the sphere passes through the left probability variation region 74, The “probability variation state” is not generated after the jackpot is over.

  With this configuration, even if a sphere passes through each probability variation region 73, 74, if the probability variation region 73, 74 is not set to be effective internally, a “probability variation state” occurs after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, even when the player visually recognizes the passage of the ball to each of the probability variation areas 73 and 74, the occurrence of the “probability variation state” can be prevented from being determined after the jackpot. By configuring in this way, even when the “latency probability changing effect mode” is being executed, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess which game state the player is playing, The fun of gaming can be improved.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, as the opening / closing pattern of each probability variation area 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the opening / closing pattern is set to be “X1” in “time reduction A”. In “Time B”, the open / close pattern is set to be “X2”, and “latency probability variation A” is set to be “X1” in the same way as “Time Short A”, and “latency probability variation B”. ”Is set so that the open / close pattern is“ X2 ”, and“ open probability pattern A ”is“ Y1 ”(see FIG. 10A). ). In addition, as the opening / closing pattern of each probability variation area 73, 74 corresponding to each jackpot type of the second special symbol, the opening / closing pattern is set to be “Y2” in “time short C”, and in “latency probability variation C”, Similar to “Time C”, the opening / closing pattern is set to be “Y2”, and “probability variation A” is configured to be the opening / closing pattern “Y1” (see FIG. 10B).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 11, the opening / closing pattern of each probability variation area 73 and 74 for every jackpot type is demonstrated. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the probability variation area opening / closing table 202f. The probability variation area opening / closing table 202f shown in FIG. 11 shows probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are released for each round for each jackpot type in each special symbol, and the right probability variation area 73 is opened for each round. Is expressed as “Right”, and when the left side probability variation area 74 is opened, it is expressed as “Left”. In the first embodiment, when one probability variation region 73, 74 (for example, the right probability variation region 73) is open, the other probability variation region 74, 73 (for example, the left probability variation region 74) is closed. It is configured to be.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the open / close pattern “X1” of each probability variation area 73 and 74 corresponding to the jackpot type “temporal time A” and “latency probability variation A” which is a jackpot of up to seven rounds of the first special symbol is an odd number. In the rounds (ie, 1 round, 3 rounds, 5 rounds and 7 rounds), the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a is opened so that the ball can pass through the right probability variation region 73, and the left probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a is closed. The sphere cannot pass through the left side probability variation region 74.

  The open / close pattern “X1” has an even number of rounds (that is, 2 rounds, 4 rounds, and 6 rounds), and the left probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a is opened so that the sphere can pass through the left probability variation region 74 and the right probability variation region. The opening / closing plate 73 a is closed, and the sphere cannot pass through the right-side probability variation region 73.

  That is, in the opening / closing pattern “X1”, a sphere can pass through the right probability variation area 73 in the first round of the big hit, and a sphere can pass through the left probability variation area 74 in the next round (that is, two rounds). Until the end (that is, the end of the seventh round), the sphere can pass alternately to the right side probability variation region 73 or the left side probability variation region 74 every round. Therefore, the number of rounds that can be passed to the right-side probability variation area 73 is “4”, and the number of rounds that can be passed to the left-side probability variation area 74 is “3”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11, the opening / closing pattern “X2” of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 corresponding to the jackpot type “temporal time B” and “latency probability variation B” which is a jackpot of a maximum of seven rounds of the first special symbol is In the odd-numbered rounds (ie, 1 round, 3 rounds, 5 rounds and 7 rounds), the left probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a is opened so that the ball can pass through the left probability variation region 74 and the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a is closed. Thus, the sphere cannot pass through the right-side probability changing region 73.

  In addition, the open / close pattern “X2” has an even number of rounds (ie, 2 rounds, 4 rounds, and 6 rounds), and the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a is opened so that the sphere can pass through the right probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region. The opening / closing plate 74 a is closed, and the sphere cannot pass through the left-side probability variation region 74.

  That is, in the opening / closing pattern “X2”, a sphere can pass through the left probability variation area 74 in the first round of the big hit, and a sphere can pass through the right probability variation area 73 in the next round (that is, two rounds). Until the end (that is, the end of the seventh round), the sphere can pass alternately to the left probability variation region 74 or the right probability variation region 73 every round. Accordingly, the number of rounds that can be passed to the left side probability variation area 74 is “4”, and the number of rounds that can be passed to the right side probability variation area 73 is “3”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11, the opening / closing pattern “Y1” of each probability variation region 73 and 74 corresponding to the jackpot type “probability variation A” that is a jackpot of a maximum of 15 rounds of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is In odd-numbered rounds (ie, 1 round, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds, 9 rounds, 11 rounds, 13 rounds and 15 rounds), the left probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a is opened so that the sphere can pass through the left probability variation region 74. At the same time, the right probability change region opening / closing plate 73a is closed, and the sphere cannot pass through the right probability change region 73.

  In the open / close pattern “Y1”, the right probability change region opening / closing plate 73a is opened in the even number rounds (that is, 2 rounds, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds, 12 rounds and 14 rounds) and the right probability change regions 73 are opened. Is allowed to pass through, and the left probability changing region opening / closing plate 74a is closed, so that the sphere cannot pass through the left probability changing region 74.

  That is, in the opening / closing pattern “Y1”, the sphere can pass through the left probability variation area 74 in the first round of the big hit, and the sphere can pass through the right probability variation area 73 in the next round (that is, two rounds). Until the end (that is, the end of the 15th round), the sphere can pass alternately to the left side probability variation region 74 or the right side probability variation region 73 every round. Accordingly, the number of rounds that can be passed to the left side probability variation area 74 is “8”, and the number of rounds that can be passed to the right side probability variation area 73 is “7”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11, the open / close pattern “Y2” of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 corresponding to the jackpot types “time-short C” and “latency probability variation C” that are jackpots of up to 15 rounds of the second special symbol is In the odd rounds (ie, 1 round, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds, 9 rounds, 11 rounds, 13 rounds and 15 rounds), the right probability variation area opening / closing plate 73a is opened and the sphere can pass through the right probability variation area 73. At the same time, the left probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a is closed, and the sphere cannot pass through the left probability variation region 74.

  In the open / close pattern “Y2”, the left probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a is opened in the even number rounds (that is, 2 rounds, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds, 12 rounds and 14 rounds) and the left probability variation region 74 is opened. The right probability variation area opening / closing plate 73a is closed, and the right probability variation area 73 cannot pass through the sphere.

  That is, in the opening / closing pattern “Y2”, a sphere can pass through the right probability variation area 73 in the first round of jackpot, and a sphere can pass through the left probability variation area 74 in the next round (that is, two rounds). Until the end (that is, the end of the 15th round), the sphere can pass alternately to the right probability variation region 73 or the left probability variation region 74 every round. Accordingly, the number of rounds that can be passed to the right-side probability variation area 73 is “8”, and the number of rounds that can be passed to the left-side probability variation area 74 is “7”.

  In this way, the jackpot type with the same opening / closing pattern (that is, jackpot type “time-short A” and “latency probability variation A”, jackpot type “time-short B” and “latency probability variation B”, and jackpot type “time-short C” And “latency probability variation C”), and the jackpot type cannot be determined only by the opening / closing pattern of each probability variation area 73, 74, thereby recognizing which jackpot type is won by the player. It is difficult (impossible) to configure, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played.

  Returning to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, as the effective patterns of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 corresponding to the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the effective pattern is “A” in the “short time A” and “latency probability variation B”. The effective pattern is set to be “B” in “time reduction B” and “latency probability variation A”, and the effective pattern is set to be “C” in “probability variation A”. (See FIG. 10A).

  In addition, as the effective pattern of each probability variation area 73 and 74 corresponding to the jackpot type of the second special symbol, the effective pattern is set to “A” in “time reduction C”, and the effective pattern in “latency probability variation C”. Is set to be “B”, and for “probability variation A”, the effective pattern is set to be “C” (see FIG. 10B).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 12, the effective pattern of each probability variation area 73 and 74 for every jackpot type is demonstrated. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the probability variation area validity table 202g. The probability variation area valid table 202g shown in FIG. 12 shows the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set to be valid for each round for each jackpot type in each special symbol, and the right probability variation area 73 is set to be valid. Is expressed as “right”, and when the left-side probability variation region 74 is set to be valid, “left” is expressed as “air”.

  In each round, when none of the probability change areas 73 and 74 are set to be valid, that is, when both the probability change areas 73 and 74 are set to be invalid, the corresponding column is expressed by diagonal ruled lines. In the first embodiment, when one probability variation region 73, 74 (for example, the right probability variation region 73) is set to be valid, the other probability variation region 74, 73 (for example, the left probability variation region 74) is invalid. Configured to be set to.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the effective patterns “1” for the jackpot types “Time A” and “latency probability variation B” of the first special symbol, and the probability variation areas 73 and 74 for the jackpot type “Time C” of the second special symbol. In “A”, in the second round, the right probability variation region 73 is set valid, while the left probability variation region 74 is invalidated. Further, in the effective pattern “A”, in the fifth round, the right probability variation region 73 is invalidated while the left probability variation region 74 is valid. In the valid pattern “A”, both probability variation areas 73 and 74 are set invalid in the other rounds (that is, the first round, the third round, the fourth round, the sixth round, and the seventh round and the subsequent rounds).

  That is, in the case of the effective pattern “A” of each probability variation region 73, 74, the big hit is caused by the sphere passing through the right probability variation region 73 in the second round or the sphere passing through the left probability variation region 74 in the fifth round. A “probability variation state” is given after completion.

  Here, in the opening pattern of the jackpot type “time-short A” and “time-short C”, the left side probability variation area 74 is opened in the second round, while the right side probability variation area 73 is closed. Further, in the fifth round, the right side probability variation region 73 is opened, while the left side probability variation region 74 is closed. Therefore, the sphere does not pass through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set effectively in any round. Accordingly, in the jackpot types “time-short A” and “time-short C”, since the sphere does not pass through the probability variation regions 73 and 74 that are set effectively during the jackpot, a “probability variation state” does not occur after the jackpot ends. It is configured.

  On the other hand, in the opening pattern of the jackpot type “latency probability variation B”, the right probability variation region 73 is opened in the second round, while the left probability variation region 74 is closed. Further, in the fifth round, the left side probability variation region 74 is opened, while the right side probability variation region 73 is closed. Therefore, the sphere passes through the probability variation regions 73 and 74 in a plurality of rounds in which the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are set effectively. Accordingly, in the jackpot type “latency probability variation B”, the sphere passes through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set effectively during the jackpot, so that a “probability variation state” occurs after the jackpot ends. Yes.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 12, each of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 in the jackpot types “latency B” and “latency probability variation A” of the first special symbol and the jackpot type “latency probability variation C” of the second special symbol. In the third round, the right probability variation region 73 is set valid and the left probability variation region 74 is invalid in the third round. Also, in the effective pattern “B”, in the sixth round, the right probability variation region 73 is set invalid while the left probability variation region 74 is valid. In the valid pattern “B”, both probability variation areas 73 and 74 are set to be invalid in other rounds (that is, 1 round, 2 rounds, 4 rounds, 5 rounds, and 7 rounds and after).

  That is, in the case of the effective pattern “B” of each probability variation region 73, 74, the big hit is made by passing the sphere through the right probability variation region 73 in the third round or passing the left probability variation region 74 in the sixth round. A “probability variation state” is given after completion.

  Here, in the opening pattern of the jackpot type “time-short B”, the left side probability variation region 74 is opened in the third round, while the right side probability variation region 73 is closed. Further, in the sixth round, the right side probability variation region 73 is opened, while the left side probability variation region 74 is closed. Therefore, the sphere does not pass through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set effectively in any round. Therefore, in the jackpot type “short time B”, since the sphere does not pass through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are effectively set during the jackpot, the “probability variation state” is configured not to occur after the jackpot ends.

  On the other hand, in the opening patterns of the jackpot types “latency probability variation A” and “latency probability variation C”, the right probability variation region 73 is opened in the third round, while the left probability variation region 74 is closed. Further, in the sixth round, the left side probability variation region 74 is opened, while the right side probability variation region 73 is closed. Therefore, the sphere passes through the probability variation regions 73 and 74 in a plurality of rounds in which the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are set effectively. Therefore, in the jackpot types “latency probability variation A” and “latency probability variation C”, since the sphere passes through the probability variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set during the jackpot, the “probability variation state” is displayed after the jackpot ends. Is configured to occur.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 12, the effective pattern “C” of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 in the jackpot type “probability variation A” of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the right probability variation region 73 in the fourth round. While being set to be valid, the left-side probability variation region 74 is set to be invalid. Further, in the effective pattern “C”, the right probability variation region 73 is set invalid while the left probability variation region 74 is valid in the ninth round. In the valid pattern “C”, both probability variation areas 73 and 74 are set to be invalid in other rounds (that is, 1 round to 3 rounds, 5 rounds to 8 rounds, and 10 rounds to 15 rounds).

  That is, in the case of the effective pattern “C” of each probability variation region 73, 74, the big hit is caused by the sphere passing through the right probability variation region 73 in the fourth round or the sphere passing through the left probability variation region 74 in the ninth round. A “probability variation state” is given after completion.

  Here, in the open pattern of the jackpot type “probability variation A”, the right probability variation region 73 is opened in the fourth round, while the left probability variation region 74 is closed. Further, in the ninth round, the left side probability variation region 74 is opened, while the right side probability variation region 73 is closed. Therefore, the sphere passes through the probability variation regions 73 and 74 in a plurality of rounds in which the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are set effectively. Accordingly, in the jackpot type “probability variation A”, since the sphere passes through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are effectively set during the jackpot, the “probability variation state” is generated after the jackpot ends. .

  In this way, in each jackpot type, probability variation areas 73 and 74 that can be passed in each round are set, and validity or invalidity of probability variation areas 73 and 74 is set corresponding to the round. Then, by making it impossible to determine the jackpot type only by passing the ball to each of the probability variation areas 73 and 74, it is difficult (not) to recognize which jackpot type is won by the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played.

  In the first embodiment, when a jackpot type that generates a “probability variation state” is won after the jackpot ends, the sphere passes through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are effectively set in a plurality of rounds of the jackpot. It is configured to be possible. Therefore, even if one of the rounds in which the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are set to be effective is not allowed to pass the ball to the probability change areas 73 and 74 that are set to be effective, the other It is possible to pass the sphere through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are effectively set in the round. Therefore, it is difficult to pass the ball to the probability variation areas 73 and 74 in one of the effective rounds due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a launch abnormality or a poor physical condition of the player). Even in the event that a player has a problem, the possibility of passing the ball to the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set to be effective in the other round that is set to be effective can be reduced due to unforeseen circumstances. A comfortable game can be realized without incurring profits, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when a jackpot type that generates a “probability variation state” after winning the jackpot is won, the balls pass while enabling different probability variation areas 73 and 74 in a plurality of rounds in the jackpot. It is configured to be possible. With this configuration, even if an abnormality has occurred in either one of the probability variation regions 73 and 74, if a sphere passes in the other probability variation region 74 or 73, the “probability variation state” Can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to realize a comfortable game without incurring a disadvantage to the player due to an unexpected situation, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Note that the probability that each jackpot type is selected in the case of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b.

  The probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, a jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each game state is prepared, and the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type in each jackpot type table 202b may be changed.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured such that “1” is sequentially added within a range of “0 to 99”, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, “99”), returns to “0”.

  In the first embodiment, a rough effect mode of a variable effect at the time of big hit and a loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined by the number of reserved variable effects held and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Selected. Specifically, “non-reach (shortened)” production mode or “non-reach (normal)” production mode in which “reach display” does not occur, and only “normal reach” variable elements are executed as “reach display”. The “normal reach” production mode, the “super reach” production mode in which the “super reach” variation factor is executed after the “normal reach” variation factor, and the “special reach” in the same way. The five production modes are selected, including the “special reach” production mode in which the variable element “is executed.

  Here, each effect aspect is demonstrated in detail. Among the production modes, the “non-reach (shortening)” production mode and the “non-reach (normal)” production mode are “in the display areas Dm1 to Dm3 (see FIG. 6A)” of the main display area Dm. This is a production mode in which the same third symbol does not stop in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3 and the “reach display” is not generated after the “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is performed.

  The variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” is displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6A) in the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6) of the third symbol display device 81. The third pattern is a variable element that is scrolled at a high speed in the vertical direction of the display screen. In this “high-speed fluctuation” effect, the 3rd symbol is changed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the display content of the 3rd symbol, and the stop result of the variable effect displayed last time is irregularly mixed (shuffled). Run as.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, after the “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is performed, the “low-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is performed except for a specific production mode (“non-reach (shortening)” production mode). It is configured to be The variable element of “low speed fluctuation” is visually recognized by the player after the variable element of “high speed fluctuation” in the fluctuation effect performed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6A) of the third symbol display device 81. This refers to a variable element that is scrolling the third symbol at a low speed at a possible speed. In the variable element of the “low speed fluctuation”, the third symbol sequence Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6 (a)) in the third order while allowing the player to recognize the display contents of the third symbol. Stop displaying symbols. When the same third symbol is stopped in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3, it is assumed that “reach display” has occurred and develops into a variable element of “normal reach”, while in the left symbol row Z1 and right symbol row Z3 When a different third symbol is stopped, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, and the variation effect is terminated (except in the case of developing to a “pseudo-continuous” described later).

  Therefore, in the “non-reach (normal)” effect mode, the variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” is performed after the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation”, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6A). ) Stop in turn, and one variation effect is finished. On the other hand, in the “non-reach (shortening)” production mode, the “low speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is not performed after the “high speed fluctuation” is performed. Z3 stops simultaneously, and one variation effect ends.

  Among the production modes, the “normal reach” production mode is the same as the left design row Z1 and the right design row Z3 in the variation production of each of the design rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6A) of the main display area Dm. Immediately after the third symbol stops, the “normal reach” variable element is executed, and other “reach display”, that is, the “reach display” variable element that does not develop into the “super reach” variable element or the “special reach” variable element. This is one of the production modes. In the variable element of “normal reach”, as described above, the third symbol stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 (left display region Dm1) and the right symbol row Z3 (right display region Dm3) of the main display region Dm is displayed. It is displayed enlarged than usual. In addition, the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 (middle display region Dm2) scrolls downward at a low speed on the display screen at a low speed, and is displayed in a state where the player can visually recognize the third symbol of the middle display region Dm2. . Further, in this “normal reach” variable element, the sub display area Ds is erased (not shown) as the main display area Dm is enlarged.

  Among the production modes, the “super reach” production mode is one of the “reach display” production modes in which the fluctuation element of “super reach” is executed by developing from the fluctuation element of “normal reach”. In the “super reach” effect mode, the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6A) is erased from the display state of the “normal reach” variable element during the execution of the “super reach” variable element. The reach formation symbol of the third symbol that was the cause of the “reach display” is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm changes from the fluctuation element of “normal reach”, and a plurality of character symbols are displayed to perform “battle presentation (for example, kickboxing)” (not shown).

  In 1st Embodiment, it is comprised so that the success or failure of a change effect may be suggested based on the result (win / lose) of the "battle effect". Specifically, for example, in the above “battle production”, if the player's character design wins the enemy's character design, it suggests that the variation production will be “hit display”, and the player When the character design on the side is defeated by the character design on the enemy side, it is configured to suggest that the variation effect is “lost display”.

  Among the production modes, the “special reach” production mode is one of the “reach display” production modes in which the fluctuation element of “special reach” is executed by developing from the fluctuation element of “normal reach”. In the “special reach” effect mode, during the execution of the “special reach” variable element, the cockpit display area Db (FIG. 6) is displayed from the display state of the “normal reach” variable element as in the “super reach” variable element. (See (a)) is deleted, and the reach formation symbol of the third symbol that was the cause of this “reach display” is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6A) changes from the “normal reach” variable element, and a plurality of characters different from the “super reach” variable element appear to display the “competitive effect”. (For example, car race) "(not shown).

  In 1st Embodiment, it is comprised so that the success or failure of a change production may be suggested based on the result (win / loss) of the "competitive production". Specifically, for example, in the above “competitive effect”, if the player's character design wins the enemy's character design, it suggests that the variation effect will be “hit display”, and the player When the character design on the side is defeated by the character design on the enemy side, it is configured to suggest that the variation effect is “lost display”.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22)). The ball is provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special figure 1 winning port 64b (first special symbol) at the timing when the ball wins the special figure 1 winning port 64b (starting prize). Of the first reserved first to fourth areas, the big hit random number counter C1 is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reserved area. In addition, the ball is provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special figure 2 winning port 64c (second special symbol) at the timing when the ball has won (start winning prize) in the special figure 2 winning port 64c. Of the second reserved first to fourth areas, the big hit random number counter C1 is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reserved area.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is referred to in accordance with the success / failure of the variation effect, the current gaming state, and the number of variation effects currently on hold (the number of reserved balls). The stop pattern table 202d is configured to be different. That is, the stop pattern table 202d is provided in a plurality of types, and is configured so as to be selected according to the number of waiting variation effects (the number of reserved balls).

  In the first embodiment, when determining the detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, first, based on the number-of-holds table 202c provided in the ROM 202, whether the variation effect is appropriate, the current gaming state, One of the stop pattern tables 202d corresponding to the number of fluctuating effects (the number of reserved balls) is selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough effect mode of the change effect is selected. Thereafter, a detailed variation pattern (variation time) of the variation effect is determined based on the selected effect mode and a value of a variation type counter CS1 described later.

  The plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of random number values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 from which the effect mode is selected differs for each stop pattern table 202d. The plurality of stop pattern tables 202d are prepared in order to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the change effect according to whether or not the change effect is appropriate, the game state, and the number of reserved balls. That is, (1) a big hit is generated in the acquired variation effect of the third symbol, or (2) the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “probability variation state”, “time reduction state” or “normal gaming state” This is because the selection ratio of the effect mode is changed depending on whether there is (3) the number of reserved balls of the variable effect that are reserved.

  This is because, as a first reason, the expectation level that is a big hit for each production mode is changed. In other words, the ratio of the “non-reach” effect mode, the “normal reach” effect mode, the “super reach” effect mode, and the “special reach” effect mode depending on whether or not the jackpot lottery is won. Are configured to be different from each other, thereby changing the degree of expectation that is a big hit for each production mode. Specifically, for example, when winning the jackpot lottery, the “super reach” production mode and the “special reach” production mode can be easily selected, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the “non-reach” production is performed. A mode and a “normal reach” effect mode are easily selected. By configuring in this way, the “super reach” production mode and the “special reach” production mode can be made easy to win, and the “normal reach” production mode and the “non-reach” production mode are difficult to win. It can be an effect or an effect that does not hit a jackpot, and the jackpot expectation degree for each effect mode can be differentiated. Therefore, when an effect that is likely to be a big hit appears in a variable effect, it is suggested that the player is likely to generate a big hit while the easy hit effect is being performed, and the game's interest is enhanced. Yes.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the acquired lottery result is a big hit, it is easy to select an effect that is likely to be a big hit and based on the stop pattern table 202d that is difficult to select an effect that is difficult to win. It is configured to select the effect mode of the change effect. On the other hand, when the acquired lottery result is a loss, the stop pattern table 202d is configured so that it is difficult to select an effect that is likely to be a big hit and it is easy to select an effect that is not likely to be a big hit. Thereby, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third symbol in the variation effect, if an effect that is likely to be a big hit is being executed, the effect that is likely to cause a big hit in the variable effect and that is difficult to hit is executed. If it is, it is difficult for a jackpot to occur in the variation effect, and by providing a difference in the jackpot expectation value for each effect mode, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the execution of the variation effect.

  Also, as a second reason, the number of times of waiting for the special drawing 1 prize opening 64b in the state where the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit or the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the second special symbol. This is in order to reduce as much as possible the useless balls (so-called no lottery by overflow winning) based on entering the special figure 2 winning opening 64c in a state where the upper limit is reached. More specifically, the maximum number of standby times of the first and second special symbols for the variation effect is 4 times, and the variation effect is executed at least for a certain period of time. In the game state in which a ball is likely to enter the special figure 2 winning opening 64c in the “fluctuating state”, it is easy to reach the maximum reserved ball number of the second special symbol. In these gaming states, when a variation effect with a long variation time is selected, the ball entering the special figure 2 winning port 64c in the state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has been reached frequently occurs. The lottery opportunity for the second special symbol cannot be acquired even though the winning entrance 64c is entered. Also, even in the “normal game state”, if a variation effect with a long variation time is selected in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has been reached, the first special symbol is suspended during the execution of the variation effect. Since the number of balls is not digested, even if a ball enters the special figure 1 winning port 64b during that time, the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol cannot be acquired. In such a state, the player determines that the game value cannot be obtained even if the ball is inserted into the special figure 1 winning opening 64b, and the player can acquire the reserved ball number again after the variation effect is digested. Until it is, the ball is stopped and the game is interrupted. When the game is interrupted, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered, which affects the management of the game hall.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a gaming state in which the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is easily reached, or close to (or coincides with) the maximum number of reserved balls. With respect to the number of reserved balls, it is configured to select the effect mode of the change effect based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a relatively short change time is easily selected. This prevents entry into the special figure 1 winning port 64b or special figure 2 winning port 64c in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) has been reached. be able to.

  Furthermore, as a third reason, the execution time is set to be long and the end of the variation effect is delayed to maintain the state in which the variation effect is being executed for a long time. More specifically, when the number of reserved balls for the variation effect is small (there is no), a ball is newly added to either the special figure 1 prize opening 64b or the special figure 2 prize opening 64c within the fluctuation time of the variation effect being executed. If the ball is not entered, the next variation effect cannot be started, and a demo screen or the like must be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the player does not perform a fluctuating effect on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in spite of playing a game by launching a ball, the player can obtain the interest related to the jackpot lottery that the player is seeking. Instead, it will awaken to the game. In addition, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 is difficult to enter the special figure 1 winning port 64b or the special figure 2 winning port 64c because the variation design is not performed in the 3rd symbol display device 81. However, there is a risk that the game in the pachinko machine 10 is stopped because it is determined that the game value is difficult to obtain.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is configured to select the effect mode of the change effect based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a relatively long change time is easily selected when the number of reserved balls of the change effect is small. Has been. Thereby, the situation where the variation effect is not performed in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is made difficult to occur, and the execution state of the variation effect in the 3rd symbol display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

  For example, the variation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by “1” within a range of “0 to 199”, and reaches a maximum value (that is, “199”) and then returns to “0”. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), which will be described later, is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 33). The ball is provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special figure 1 winning port 64b (first special symbol) at the timing when the ball wins the special figure 1 winning port 64b (starting prize). Of the first reserved first to fourth areas, the big hit random number counter C1 is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reserved area. In addition, the ball is provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special figure 2 winning port 64c (second special symbol) at the timing when the ball has won (start winning prize) in the special figure 2 winning port 64c. Of the second reserved first to fourth areas, the big hit random number counter C1 is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reserved area.

  The variation type counter CS1 is used to determine a detailed variation pattern of variation effects. In other words, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 uses the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202 in detail in the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Determine the variation pattern. Specifically, the determination of the variation pattern is determination of the variation time of the variation effect. The sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, and the third symbol reach type and detailed symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The change mode is determined, and the presence / absence of execution of the notice effect and the execution mode of the notice effect are determined.

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a rough variation pattern of the variation effect and determines only the variation time. With this configuration, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 does not need to perform control such as the detailed notice lottery necessary for executing the variation effect, so the processing of the MPU 201 regarding the variation effect can be reduced. it can. Further, it is not necessary to prepare commands for all variation patterns of variation effects in main controller 110, and the ROM capacity of main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Further, in the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the detailed variation pattern in the variation effect is determined based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main control device 110, so that the variation effect can be obtained. The degree of freedom to choose can be increased. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the gaming state changes every moment, it becomes possible to select or change the contents of the effect of the variation effect at any time corresponding to the change, and it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the gaming state. it can.

  Here, each variable element constituting the fluctuation pattern will be described. The variation element constitutes a part of one variation effect, and one variation effect is configured by combining each variation element. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element, the “low-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element, the “pseudo-ream” fluctuation element, the “normal reach” fluctuation element, and the “super-reach” fluctuation element are used as the fluctuation elements. There are variable elements, "special reach" variable elements, and "re-variable" variable elements.

  The “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is a fluctuation element that fluctuates at a high speed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the contents of the third symbol. When the “non-reach (shortening)” production mode is selected, the “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is performed for “3 seconds” at the beginning of the fluctuation production, and the fluctuation elements other than “non-reach (shortening)” ( For example, when the “non-reach (normal)” effect mode is selected, “7 seconds” is performed at the beginning of the variable effect. When the “high-speed fluctuation” variable element ends, the “low-speed fluctuation” variable element described later is started (executed), or the variable effect is ended as it is.

  The “low speed fluctuation” fluctuation element starts after the execution of the “high speed fluctuation” fluctuation element of “7 seconds”, and determines whether or not “reaching display” is generated by scrolling the third symbol so as to be visible. It is a variable factor to show. The variable element of the “low speed fluctuation” is not executed when the “non-reach (shortening)” production mode is selected, and the production mode other than the “non-reach (shortening)” production mode (for example, “non-reach (usually normal) ) When “production mode” is selected, “3 seconds” is performed after the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation”. That is, in the “non-reach (shortened)” effect mode, after the “high-speed fluctuation” variable element is performed, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the main display area Dm do not pass through the “low-speed fluctuation” variable element. It is configured to stop rapidly (so-called bitter stop). When this “low-speed fluctuation” variable element is completed, whether the “pseudo-continuous” variable element described later is started (executed) or the “normal reach” variable element described below is started (executed). Alternatively, it is configured so that the fluctuating effect ends as it is.

  Accordingly, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the “non-reach (normal)” effect mode includes a “high-speed fluctuation” variable element of “7 seconds” and a “low-speed fluctuation” variable element of “3 seconds”. The variation effect is composed of the variation pattern including it. In addition, in the “non-reach (shortened)” effect mode, a change effect is configured with a change pattern of only “3 seconds” “high-speed change” variable elements.

  A “pseudo-continuous” variable element is a variable element in which the start of a variable effect occurs a plurality of times (one pseudo stop) in one variable effect. Specifically, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 of the third symbol display device 81, the “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is started and switched to the “low-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element, and then in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. This is a variable element in which the effect of the unit that the change effect is finished and a predetermined stop result (for example, the pseudo-continuous chance item “677”) is displayed. The variable element of this “pseudo train” is that the predetermined stop result stops after the variable element of “low speed fluctuation”, and then the variable element of “high speed fluctuation” starts again from the stop result. An effect as if the change effect was started is executed.

  As for the fluctuation element of this “pseudo-continuous”, after the execution of the variable element of “low-speed fluctuation”, a predetermined stop result (so-called pseudo-continuous chance) appears, and the second “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is executed again. Then, it is a variable element that develops into a variable element of “normal reach”. That is, the variable element of the “pseudo train” is a pseudo change stop (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo stop”) in which a pseudo train chance is displayed, and then a predetermined stop result is obtained in the pseudo stop. It is a variable element that appears and starts the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” again. The pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is configured to always develop into at least a “normal reach” variable element after the end of the “pseudo-continuous” variable element. The fluctuation element of the “pseudo-continuous” is performed “10 seconds” after the fluctuation element of the “low speed fluctuation”.

  In the first embodiment, in the “pseudo-continuous” variable element, the number of pseudo-stops is set to one. However, the “pseudo-continuous” variable element that is executed twice or more is executed. It may be configured. Further, before the occurrence of the “pseudo-continuous” variable element, a variable element (so-called “pseudo-gase” variable element) that produces an effect as to whether or not the pseudo-continuous chance is stopped may be performed. . In this “pseudo gas” variable element, an effect indicating whether or not a predetermined stop result appears after execution of the “low-speed fluctuation” variable element (for example, the symbol forming the predetermined stop result is the effective line L1 ( (See FIG. 6 (a)) The effect of whether or not to stop by reciprocating fluctuations on the top (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo fluctuation"), and the predetermined stop result does not appear in the "pseudo fluctuation" You may comprise so that the fluctuation element of a "pseudo ream" may not be developed. By providing this “pseudo gas” variable element, after the “pseudo gas” variable element is completed, it is developed into a “normal reach” variable element, or “lost display” appears (for example, “687”). ") And the gameability of whether or not the variation production is finished can be given as it is.

  “Normal reach” fluctuation elements are “low speed fluctuation” fluctuation elements or “pseudo-continuous” fluctuation elements (hereinafter “low-speed fluctuation” fluctuation elements or “pseudo-continuous” fluctuation elements ” The variation that shows whether or not a big hit is generated depending on the variation result of the middle symbol row Z2 when the reach formation symbol is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3. Is an element. The variation factor of “normal reach” is performed “10 seconds” after the variation factor of “low-speed fluctuation etc.”.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, after executing the fluctuation element of “normal reach”, a pattern that directly displays “losing display”, a pattern that directly displays “hit display”, and “super reach” A pattern that develops into a variable element, a pattern that develops into a variable element of “special reach”, and a pattern that executes the “variable” variable element once a temporary “lose display” appears. Has been.

  The variation element of “super reach” is developed and executed when the variation of “normal reach” does not stop the “losing display” and the variation of the middle symbol row Z2 is continued. In the main display area Dm, It is a variable element that shows whether or not a jackpot is generated by performing “direction”. The variable element of “super reach” is performed “10 seconds” after the variable element of “normal reach” is executed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, after executing the variable element of “super reach”, a pattern that directly displays “lost display”, a pattern that directly displays “hit display”, and a temporary And a pattern for executing the “revariation” variable element after the “lost display” appears.

  The variable element of “Special Reach” is developed and executed when the fluctuation pattern of “Normal reach” does not stop “Loss display” and the change of the middle symbol row Z2 is continued. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a jackpot is generated by performing “direction”. The variable element of “special reach” is performed “20 seconds” after the variable element of “normal reach” is executed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after executing the variable element of “special reach”, a pattern that directly displays “losing display”, a pattern that directly displays “hit display”, and a temporary A pattern that “changes again” after the “lost display” appears is prepared.

  In addition, it is configured to develop into a “super reach” variable element or a “special reach” variable element after execution of the “normal reach” variable element, but instead of this structure, reach formation after “low speed fluctuation” When the symbol is stopped, it may be configured not to go through the “normal reach” fluctuation element but to develop into the “super reach” fluctuation element and the “special reach” fluctuation element. Alternatively, the “special reach” variable factor may be performed after the “super reach” variable factor is executed.

  The variable element of “re-change” is a variable element that is developed and executed after the “lose display” once appears in any “reach display”, and displays the “hit display”. The variable element of the “re-change” is performed for “10 seconds” after any “reach display”.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, after the execution of the “revariation” variable element, a pattern in which “big hit display” appears is prepared.

  In addition, the variable element of the “re-change” is configured to occur only when the jackpot is won. That is, in the case of “losing display”, the variable element of “revariation” is not executed. This is because the variability factor of “Revariation” is a variability factor that changes the “Loss display” that was temporarily stopped to any “Large display”. If you go to, there will be a habit of production. Therefore, the “revariation” variation element is selected only in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e, and is not selected in the loss variation pattern table 202e.

  For example, the random number counter C4 per unit is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of “0 to 99” and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value (that is, “99”). Further, when the random number counter C4 per common figure makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the random number counter C4 per common figure.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the random number counter C4 per common figure (value = “0 to 99”), and is set for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). It is updated once and updated repeatedly within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 33).

  The value of the random number counter C4 per common figure is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once every timer interruption process (see FIG. 22)), and it is detected that the sphere has passed the normal symbol gate 67. At the same time, it is stored in one of the usual figure holding areas 1 to 4 provided in the usual figure holding ball storage area 203j of the RAM 203. Then, the data is sequentially shifted to the general-purpose reserved ball execution area 203k in the order stored in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203j, and the value of the random number counter C4 per general map stored in the general-purpose reserved ball execution area 203k is obtained. A hit judgment is made against the result.

  The value of the random number that the normal symbol is won is set by a random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 for each gaming state (for example, “1/10” in the low probability state, In the high probability state, “9/10”), and the value of the per-count counter C4 stored in the general-purpose reserved ball execution area 203k is the value of the random number that is the hit set by the per-standard random number table Is determined to be a win. Then, by referring to a common figure variation time table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 according to the gaming state, a normal symbol variable display time (for example, “3 seconds” or “0.5” Second ") is set, and after the variable display time has elapsed in the normal symbol display device 83, the symbol" O "is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (normal symbol). Thereafter, an ordinary electric combination control table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is referred to according to the gaming state, and the opening time (for example, “0. "5 seconds" or "5 seconds") is set, and the rotating plate is rotated during the opening time, and the ball is configured to roll on the upper surface of the rotating plate.

  On the other hand, if the value of the per-standard counter C4 stored in the general-purpose reserved ball execution area 203k does not match the value of the random number set by the random number per table (not shown), It is determined to be lost. Then, a variable display time (for example, “3 seconds” or “0.5 seconds”) is set by referring to a usual figure variation time table (not shown) according to the game state, and the normal symbol display device 83 displays the variable display time. After the variable display time elapses, a symbol “x” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (normal symbol).

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is configured such that variations in the probability of normal symbol winning, normal symbol variable display time, and normal electric accessory 67a opening time vary depending on the gaming state. The Specifically, for example, in the “normal game state” that does not have the “time saving function”, the probability of success / failure of the normal symbol is low, the variable display time of the normal symbol is long, and The opening time is set to be short. In the “probability fluctuation state” or “time shortening state” having the “time function”, the probability of success or failure of the normal symbol is high, the variable display time of the normal symbol is short, and the rotating plate is opened. The time is set to be long.

  As described above, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is provided with various counters and the like, and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is provided with various tables. And the above-described tables 202a to 202g, such as a jackpot lottery, dynamic symbol display setting on the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a variation effect setting, a lottery of the display result on the normal symbol display device 83 Ten main processes can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, It has a work area (work area) in which values such as outputs (Input / Output; hereinafter abbreviated as “I / O”) are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 33), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 32). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the non-maskable interrupt (NMI) terminal of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Thus, when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 further includes a first reserved ball number counter 203a, a second reserved ball number counter 203b, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, a reserved ball execution area 203f, a right probability change effective flag 203g, a left It has at least a probability variation valid flag 203h and a probability variation transition flag 203i.

  The first reserved ball number counter 203a receives a ball (see FIG. 1) for the first winning hole 64b detected in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 22) periodically executed every “4 milliseconds”. Hereinafter, the dynamic of the first special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 37 on the basis of the ball entering the special figure 1 winning port 64b or the special figure 2 winning port 64c may be referred to as “start winning”. It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of display (the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81).

  The first reserved ball number counter 203a is set to “0” as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (S913 in FIG. 32). Each time a start winning at the special figure 1 winning opening 64b is detected and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (variation effect) relating to the first special symbol increases, 1 is added to the maximum value “4” (see FIG. 23, see S203). On the other hand, the first reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 every time the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed (see S308 in FIG. 24).

  Similarly to the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) periodically executed every “4 milliseconds”. Dynamic display of the second special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 37 based on the start winning at the winning opening 64c (the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81) ) Is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) up to four times.

  Similar to the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is set to “0” as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (S913 in FIG. 32). Then, every time the start winning at the special figure 2 winning port 64c is detected and the number of reserved balls of the dynamic display (variable effect) relating to the second special symbol increases, 1 is added to the maximum value “4” (see FIG. 23, see S207). On the other hand, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 every time the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed (see S305 in FIG. 24).

  The value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (that is, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) or the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (that is, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) is the reserved ball number command. Is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 (see S210 in FIG. 23). The held ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first held ball number counter 203a or the second held ball number counter 203b is incremented by one. Command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of reserved balls itself of the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command. it can. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of suspensions of the dynamic display (variation effect) of each special symbol without accessing the main control device 110. In addition, each time a start winning is detected, a reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, thereby dynamically displaying (fluctuating) each special symbol managed in the sound lamp control device 113. Even if the number of reserved balls in the effect) deviates from the number of reserved balls in the actual dynamic display (variable effect) held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the next received hold The deviation can be corrected by the ball number command.

  Note that the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display reserved ball number command for notifying the number of held balls to the display control device 114 every time the number of held balls managed therein changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  In the first embodiment, when the main controller 110 transmits a reserved ball number command to the sound lamp controller 113, the first held ball counter 203a or 1 The counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 8) is associated with the start winning that triggered the addition of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b as well as the value of the two held ball number counter 203b. Also included are the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired.

  That is, when there is a start winning, each value of the big hit random number counter C1, big hit type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 is a holding ball. The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a number command.

  In the sound lamp control device 113, the variation effect based on each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 transmitted by the held ball number command is executed. Before the execution of the variation effect, it is determined what happens to the variation effect (whether it will be a big hit, what the variation time will be, etc.). And based on the judgment result by the prefetching, execution of various effects can be determined, and the content and execution time (timing) of the “holding change notice” can be determined.

  In addition, you may comprise so that the reserve ball number command which shows the number of reserve balls of a change effect, and the command which shows values, such as jackpot random number counter C1, may be transmitted separately. As a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like different from the reserved ball number command, the reserved ball number command is generated at the time when the ball enters the special figure 1 winning port 64b or the special figure 2 winning port 64c. A command similar to the variation pattern command and stop type command (preliminary variation pattern command and advance stop type command) based on the incoming ball may be generated and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In this case, regarding the program for generating the advance variation pattern command and the advance stop type command, the program can be easily created by diverting the program of the change pattern command and the stop type command.

  As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d has a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 acquired from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of a start winning at any one of the special figure 1 winning slots 64b, and a stop. This is a memory for storing each value of the pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won a prize (start prize) in the special figure 1 prize opening 64b in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 22), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203c. Is stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. The first holding ball storage area 203d has four holdings so that data corresponding to one start winning of the first special symbol (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) can be stored (holding) up to four times. It has areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 8).

  As described above, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter acquired from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of the start winning at the special figure 2 winning slot 64c. C3 is a memory for storing each value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won a prize (start prize) in the special figure 2 winning opening 64c in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 22), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203c. Is stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. The second holding ball storage area 203e has four holdings so that data corresponding to one start winning of the second special symbol (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) can be stored (held) up to four times. It has an area (second reserved first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 8).

  As described above, the reserved ball execution area 203f starts execution, or the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being executed or the movement of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. This is a memory for storing data (values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in the processing such as the setting of the automatic display and the variation effect.

  When the MPU 201 detects the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display In order to execute processing such as dynamic display and variation effect setting of the device 81, data corresponding to each start prize stored in the above-described first reserved ball storage area 203d or second reserved ball storage area 203e ( When data corresponding to the start winning for the second special symbol is stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e among the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, it corresponds to one start winning of the data. The data is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, data corresponding to the start winning for the second special symbol is not stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and data corresponding to the start winning for the first special symbol is stored in the first reserved ball storing area 203d. If so, the data corresponding to one start winning of the data is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the second special symbol is preferentially executed, and the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the first special symbol is related to the second special symbol. It is configured to be executed on condition that the dynamic display (variation effect) is not put on hold. In addition, the shift in 1st Embodiment shows moving the data memorize | stored in one area | region to another area | region.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 8 again, details of the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f will be described. The first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f are used for the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the movement of the special symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in order to set a target display and a variation effect.

  As described above, the jackpot lottery counter used in the jackpot lottery is used for the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 and the setting of the variable effect. C1, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the effect mode of the variation effect, and a variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation pattern are used. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the special figure 1 winning port 64b (start winning). The second reserved ball storage area 203e stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the special figure 2 winning slot 64c (start winning prize). .

  The first reserved ball storage area 203d includes four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas). In each of the four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas), a jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter storage area that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2 203d2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203d4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

  The second reserved ball storage area 203e is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved first to fourth areas), like the first reserved ball storage area 203d. In the four reserved areas (second reserved first to fourth areas), similarly to the first reserved ball storage area 203d, a big hit random number counter storage area 203e1 for storing the value of the big hit random number counter C1 and a big hit type counter C2 A jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 for storing the value of the stop pattern, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203e4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. It has been.

  In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1 and 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage areas 203d2 and 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 203d3 and 203e3, and the variation type counter storage areas 203d4 and 203e4 are set to 1. Each of the holding ball storage areas 203d and 203e is provided together, but a plurality of holding ball storage areas may be provided for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

  As described above, in the first reserved ball storage area 203d, data acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) one of the special figure 1 winning openings 64b (values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1). Is stored for a maximum of four times. In that case, from the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas), from the area with the smaller area number (first to fourth) Data is stored in order. In other words, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the start winning to the special figure 1 prize opening 64b that is older in time is stored, and the oldest special figure 1 prize opening in time is stored in the first reserved first area. Data corresponding to the start winning to 64b is stored.

  Further, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball has won (start winning) at the special figure 2 winning port 64c is up to four times. In this case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (second reserved first to fourth areas). Is done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the start winning to the special figure 2 winning port 64c that is older in time is stored, and the oldest special figure 2 winning port is stored in the second reserved first area. Data corresponding to the start winning to 64c is stored.

  On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203f is composed of only one area. In the reserved ball execution area 203f, as in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e, a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter C2 A jackpot type counter storage area 203f2 for storing the value, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203f4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. Yes.

  When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect is reached, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1) is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. In this case, the data stored in the second reserved first area is shifted to the respective areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, the MPU 201 does not store data in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e when the execution timing of the fluctuating effect is reached, and does not store the data in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. When data is stored in the holding first area, the data stored in the first holding first area is shifted to the respective areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the holding ball execution area 203f.

  Then, the data shifted to the holding ball execution area 203f is referred to in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 25), and the big hit lottery is performed based on the reference data and the gaming state, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the lottery result. And the stop type is determined. In the special symbol display device 37, dynamic display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

  The change pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  Details of the data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution timing of the variation effect has come, it determines whether data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that data is stored in the second reserved first area, the random number value in the big hit random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reserved first area is used as the big hit random number in the reserved ball execution area 203f. Shift to the counter storage area 203f1. Similarly, the random number value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the second reserved first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reserved first area is The shift is made to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and the random number value in the variation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reserved first area is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

  Then, when the data shift to the holding ball execution area 203f is completed, the second holding first area becomes empty, and is stored in each area (second to fourth) of the second holding ball storage area 203e (holding). ) Is shifted to an area (first to third) having a smaller area number. In the first embodiment, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, data is shifted only for the second reserved area (first to fourth) in which data is stored (held).

  Here, the data shift performed for each reserved area in the second reserved ball storage area 203e will be described. For example, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when the start of the variation effect is determined is “4”, and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. Suppose that In this state, when the data of the second reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f and the second reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 stores the data of other areas (second to fourth). Are respectively shifted to areas (first to third) having a smaller area number. That is, the data in the second reserved second area is shifted to the second reserved first area, the data in the second reserved third area is shifted to the second reserved second area, and the data in the second reserved fourth area. Is shifted to the second reserved third area.

  Also, for example, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when the start determination of the variation effect is made is “2”, the MPU 201 only stores the data in the second reserved second area. Shift to one area and end the data shift. As described above, in the first embodiment, since the data shift process is not performed for the second reserved area (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts is reduced. And control burden can be reduced.

  In addition, you may comprise so that each data of a 2nd reservation area (2nd-4th) may each be shifted to an area with a smaller area number irrespective of the presence or absence of data. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the second reserved area (second to fourth), the creation of the program can be facilitated.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 201 determines that no data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e when the execution timing of the variation effect is reached, then the first reserved It is determined whether data is stored in the first reserved first area of the ball storage area 203d. As a result of the determination, if data is stored in the first reserved first area, the random number value in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved first area is used as the jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 in the reserved ball execution area 203f. Shift to. Similarly, the random number value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the first reserved first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reserved first area is The shift is made to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and the random number value in the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first hold first area is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

  Then, when the data shift to the holding ball execution area 203f is completed, the first holding first area becomes empty, and is stored (holding) in each area (second to fourth) of the first holding ball storage area 203d. ) Is shifted to an area (first to third) having a smaller area number. In the first embodiment, data is shifted only in the first reserved area (first to fourth) in which data is stored (held) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d.

  Here, a data shift performed for each reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d will be described. For example, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a when the start of the variation effect is determined is “4”, and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Suppose that In this state, when the data in the first reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f and the first reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 stores data in other areas (second to fourth). Are respectively shifted to areas (first to third) having a smaller area number. That is, the data in the first reserved second area is shifted to the first reserved first area, the data in the first reserved third area is shifted to the first reserved second area, and the data in the first reserved fourth area. Is shifted to the first reserved third area.

  Further, for example, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the variation effect is made is “2”, the MPU 201 stores only the data in the first reserved second area. Shift to one area and end the data shift. As described above, in the first embodiment, since the data shift process is not performed for the first reserved areas (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts is reduced. And control burden can be reduced.

  In addition, you may comprise so that each data of a 1st reservation area (2nd-4th) may be shifted to the area where an area number is one smaller irrespective of the presence or absence of data, respectively. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the first holding area (second to fourth), the creation of the program can be facilitated.

  Here, the details of the universal reserved ball storage area 203j and the universal reserved ball execution area 203k will be described. The general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203j and the general-purpose reserved ball execution area 203k are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform normal symbol winning lottery, variable display setting of the normal symbol display device 83, and the like.

  The usual figure reserved ball storage area 203j is a memory for storing the usual figure counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer 203c in accordance with the detection of the passage of the sphere to the normal symbol gate 67. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has passed the normal symbol gate 67 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), the MPU 201 acquires the value of the counter C4 per universal symbol from the counter buffer 203c, Store in the storage area 203j. The ordinary reserved ball storage area 203j includes four reserved areas (ordinary figures) so that the data corresponding to one reserved ball of ordinary symbols (the value of the counter C4 per ordinary figure) can be stored (held) up to four times. (Holding first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 8).

  The general-purpose reserved ball execution area 203k is a memory for storing data (the value of the random number counter C4 per universal figure) to be referred to in the lottery or variable display process of the normal symbol being started or executed. It is.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the normal symbol variable display, the MPU 201 executes the above-described general symbol holding ball in order to execute processing such as the normal symbol winning lottery and the variable symbol display setting of the normal symbol display device 83. Of the data stored in the storage area 203j (value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure), one data is shifted to the ordinary reserved ball execution area 203k. In addition, the shift in 1st Embodiment shows moving the data memorize | stored in one area | region to another area | region.

  As described above, the random symbol counter C4 used for the normal symbol winning lottery is used for the normal symbol winning lottery and the variable display setting of the normal symbol display device 83. The general-purpose reserved sphere storage area 203j stores the value of the random number counter C4 per universal figure acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the sphere passes the normal symbol gate 67.

  Further, as described above, in the general-purpose reserved sphere storage area 203j, data (the value of the random number counter C4 per general figure) acquired at the timing when the sphere passes the normal symbol gate 67 is stored up to four times. In that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (ordinary reserved first to fourth areas). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the passage of the sphere to the normal symbol gate 67 that is older in time is stored, and the oldest symbol in the normal symbol gate 67 is stored in the first reserved area in the usual diagram. Data corresponding to the passage of the sphere will be stored.

  On the other hand, the ordinary reserved ball execution area 203k is composed of only one area. In the ordinary reserved ball execution area 203k, similarly to the ordinary reserved ball storage area 203j, there is provided a random number counter storage area (not shown) per random number for storing the value of the random number counter C4 per common figure. .

  When the MPU 201 determines that the execution timing of the normal symbol variable display has been reached, the data stored in the universal figure holding first area of the general figure holding ball storage area 203j is stored in the general figure holding ball execution area 203k. shift.

  Then, the data shifted to the ordinary reserved ball execution area 203k is referred to in the ordinary variation processing (see S111 in FIG. 22), and a winning lottery is performed based on the reference data and the gaming state, and variable display is performed. Determine the contents. In the normal symbol display device 83, variable display is performed based on the determined contents under the control of the main control device 110.

  Details of the data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the normal symbol variable display is reached, the random number value in the random number counter storage area (not shown) in the common figure holding first area of the common figure holding ball storage area 203j Is shifted to a random number counter storage area (not shown) per universal figure in the universal figure holding ball execution area 203k.

  When the data shift to the general-purpose reserved ball execution area 203k ends, the general-purpose reserved ball first area becomes empty, and is stored in each area (second to fourth) of the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203j. A shift process is performed in which the (held) data is packed into areas (first to third) having an area number smaller by one. In the first embodiment, the data is shifted only in the general-purpose reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (held) in the general-purpose reserved sphere storage area 203j.

  Here, the data shift performed for each reserved area in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203j will be described. For example, the number of normal symbols held when the start of variable symbol variable display is determined is four, and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203j. Suppose that In this state, when the data in the general-purpose reserved first area is shifted to the general-purpose reserved ball execution area 203k and the general-purpose reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 moves to another area (second to fourth). Are respectively shifted to areas (first to third) having a smaller area number. That is, the data in the second reserved area is shifted to the first reserved area, the third reserved area data is shifted to the second reserved area, and the fourth reserved area data. Is shifted to the 3rd area of the usual map hold.

  Also, for example, if the number of normal symbols held when the start of variable symbol variable display determination is two, the MPU 201 transfers only the data in the second reserved area to the first reserved area. Shift to end the data shift. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the usual map reserved areas (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), so the number of data shifts is reduced. And control burden can be reduced.

  In addition, you may comprise so that each data of a usual reservation holding | maintenance area (2nd-4th) may be shifted to the area where an area number is 1 small irrespective of the presence or absence of data, respectively. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the usual map holding area (second to fourth), so that the creation of the program can be facilitated.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The right probability variation valid flag 203g provided in the RAM 203 is a flag for indicating that the right probability variation region 73 is set to be valid in the on state. In the first embodiment, in a situation where the right probability variation valid flag 203g is set to ON, when a sphere is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d, a probability variation transition flag 203i described later is set to ON, and after the jackpot ends “Probability fluctuation state” is generated.

  The right probability variation valid flag 203g is set to OFF as an initial value when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, when the special symbol jackpot is won, the probability variation area valid table 202g (see FIG. 12) is set based on the jackpot jackpot type (see S410 in FIG. 26), and at the start of each round during the jackpot, Based on the probability variation area valid table 202g set in the jackpot, the right probability variation valid flag 203g is set to ON or OFF (see S435 in FIG. 28).

  Specifically, the right probability variation valid flag 203g is set to ON in two rounds of the jackpot type “time-short A”, “latency probability variation B”, and “time-short time C”, and the jackpot type “time-short B”, “latency probability variation”. “A” and “latency probability fluctuation C” are set to ON in three rounds, jackpot type “probability fluctuation A” is set to ON in four rounds, and all rounds other than the above-described rounds are set to OFF.

  The left certain variation effective flag 203h is a flag for indicating that the left certain variation region 74 is set to be valid in the on state. In the first embodiment, in a situation where the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to ON, when a sphere is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d, a probability variation transition flag 203i described later is set to ON, and after the jackpot ends “Probability fluctuation state” is generated.

  The left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to OFF as an initial value when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, when the special symbol jackpot is won, the probability variation area valid table 202g (see FIG. 12) is set based on the jackpot jackpot type (see S410 in FIG. 26), and at the start of each round during the jackpot, Based on the probability variation area valid table 202g set in the jackpot, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to ON or OFF (see S435 in FIG. 28).

  Specifically, the left likelihood change effective flag 203h is set to ON in five rounds of the jackpot type “short time A”, “latency probability fluctuation B”, and “short time C”, and the big hit type “time short B”, “latency probability fluctuation” “A” and “latent probability fluctuation C” are set to ON in the sixth round, jackpot type “probability fluctuation A” is set to ON in nine rounds, and all rounds other than the rounds described above are set to OFF.

  The probability variation transition flag 203i is a flag for indicating that a “probability variation state” occurs in the on state. The probability variation transition flag 203i is set to OFF as an initial value when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. When the right probability variation valid flag 203g is set to ON in the big hit, is the right probability variation region switch 73d detecting a sphere (see S441: Yes → S442: Yes in FIG. 28) or left probability variation When the valid flag 203h is set to ON, a sphere is detected by the left probability change area switch 74d (see S444: Yes → S445: Yes in FIG. 28), and the probability change transition flag 203i in the off state is set to ON. (See S443 in FIG. 29). Thereafter, in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 30), when the “probability variation state” is set by the probability variation transition flag 203i being turned on, that is, when the value of the ST counter described later is set to “100”. Then (see S472 in FIG. 30), the probability variation transition flag 203i is set to off (see S473 in FIG. 30).

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is provided in the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol display device 83, the normal symbol hold lamp 84, and the variable winning device 65. A large winning opening solenoid 65c for opening / closing driving forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate 65b of the winning opening 65a as an axis, and a right probability changing area solenoid 73b for opening / closing the right probability changing area opening / closing plate 73a of the right probability changing area 73, The left probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a of the left probability variation region 74 is connected to the left probability variation region solenoid 74b for opening / closing and the other solenoid 209 for driving other drive device (not shown), and the MPU 201 Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the input / output port 205.

  Further, the input / output port 205 is provided in the big prize opening 65a, and is provided in the right prize variation area 73 and the big prize opening switch 71 for detecting a ball won in the big prize opening 65a. A right probability variation region switch 73d for detecting a sphere passing through the probability variation region 73, a left probability variation region switch 74d provided in the left probability variation region 74 and detecting a sphere passing through the left probability variation region 74, and a switch group (not shown) Are connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 outputs signals from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase switch circuit 253. Various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2.

  Here, referring to FIG. 13 to FIG. 21, the detection mode of the sphere in each round of each jackpot type and the open / closed state of each probability variation region 73, 74 (that is, the right probability variation region open / close plate 73a and the left probability variation). The opening / closing of the area opening / closing plate 74a, and the right probability changing area solenoid 73b and the left probability changing area solenoid 74b being turned on / off), and the setting state of the validity / invalidity of each probability changing area 73, 74 (that is, the right probability changing effective flag 203g). The left probability variation valid flag 203h is turned on or off) and the transition state to the “probability variation state” (that is, the probability variation transition flag 203i is turned on or off) will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, a detection mode of a sphere in each round of the jackpot type “time reduction A” will be described. FIG. 13 shows the operation timings of the big winning opening solenoid 65c, the right probability changing area solenoid 73b, and the left probability changing area solenoid 74b in each round of the jackpot type “time A” of the first special symbol, the big winning opening switch 71, the right probability changing area. It is the timing chart which showed typically the detection timing of the sphere in switch 73d and left probability variation area switch 74d, and the setting timing of right probability variation effective flag 203g, left probability variation effective flag 203h and probability variation transition flag 203i. FIG. 14 shows the operation timings of the big winning opening solenoid 65c, the right probability changing area solenoid 73b, and the left probability changing area solenoid 74b in the first and second rounds of the jackpot type “time reduction A”, the big winning opening switch 71, the right FIG. 10 is a timing chart schematically showing the time of the detection timing of a sphere in the probability variation region switch 73d and the left probability variation region switch 74d and the setting timing of the right probability variation effective flag 203g, the left probability variation effective flag 203h, and the probability variation transition flag 203i. . In the following, detailed timing will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the jackpot type “time saving A”, a total of seven rounds of jackpot game is executed, and at the start of each round, the big prize opening solenoid 65c is turned on and the open / close plate 65b is opened. Then, a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, “30 seconds” at maximum has elapsed since the release (see Max t1 in FIG. 14). Max t1 <“30000 milliseconds (hereinafter, milliseconds may be abbreviated as“ ms ”) ”), Or when one of the events of detecting ten balls by the big prize opening switch 71 is established, the big prize opening solenoid 65c is turned off and the opening / closing plate 65b is closed, and one round Ends.

  In addition, in the jackpot type “time reduction A”, the open / close pattern of the right side probability variation area 73 and the left side probability variation area 74 is “X1”. Therefore, in the first round, when the first winning ball switch 71 detects the first count ball, both the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t2 in FIG. 14). T2 = “60 ms”), the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are configured to be able to recognize whether they can be normally driven.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, even if the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms", the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a and the left probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a The opening time is extremely short, and the sphere is configured to be difficult to flow into the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation region 74 (hereinafter, the same applies to the first count sphere of each round).

  Further, when it is determined that the right probability changing area opening / closing plate 73a or the left probability changing area opening / closing plate 74a is not driven normally when the first winning ball switch 71 detects the first count ball, the right probability changing area 73 or the left Since the probability variation area 74 is not normally opened and an appropriate game value may not be given to the player, a predetermined error notification (for example, display of an error message such as “variable winning device 65 drive abnormality occurrence”) is made. It is configured as follows. In addition, in accordance with a predetermined error notification, the progress of the game is stopped while backing up the current game state. Thus, by stopping the progress of the game due to an error, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged such that the “probability variation state” is not given.

  Then, when the ball of the third count is detected by the special winning opening switch 71, only the right probability changing area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms" (see t3 in FIG. 14; t3 = "2000ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the time required to reach the right probability variation area 73 after the ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (in the first embodiment, “1. 5 seconds ". See t4 in FIG. 14. t4 <" 2000ms "). Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the right probability variation region 73 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “short time A” is “A”, and the right probability variation area 73 of the second round and the left probability variation area 74 of the fifth round are set to be valid. The Therefore, in the first round, the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are both invalid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left probability variation valid flag 203h are set off. Accordingly, even when the sphere passes to the right probability variation region 73 and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d in the first round, since the right probability variation region 73 is not set to be effective, the probability variation transition flag is set. 203i remains off without being turned on.

  It should be noted that in the odd-numbered rounds (ie, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, and 7 rounds) of the jackpot type “time-short A”, the drive modes of the right probability change region solenoid 73b and the left probability change region solenoid 74b are the same as those in the first round.

  Next, when the first count ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71 in the second round of the jackpot type “short time A”, as in the first round, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are Both are turned on for “60 ms” (see t5 in FIG. 14, t5 = “60 ms”), so that it is possible to recognize whether the right probability changing region solenoid 73b and the left probability changing region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

  Then, when the ball of the third count is detected by the special winning opening switch 71, only the left probability changing region solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000ms" (see t6 in FIG. 14, t6 = "2000ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the time required to reach the left probability variation region 74 after the ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (that is, “1.6 seconds”). See t7 in Fig. 14. t7 <"2000ms"). Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the left probability variation region 74 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “time reduction A” is “A”. In the second round, only the right probability variation area 73 is valid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g is set to ON. In addition, the left likelihood variation valid flag 203h is set to OFF. Therefore, even in the second round, even if the sphere passes to the left probability variation region 74 and the sphere is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d, the probability variation transition flag is not set because the left probability variation region 74 is not set to be valid. 203i remains off without being turned on.

  Note that the drive mode of the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b is the same as that of the second round in the even number round (ie, 4 rounds and 6 rounds) of the jackpot type “time reduction A”.

  In the third and subsequent rounds of the jackpot type “short time A”, the open probability change areas 73 and 74 are invalid, and the probability change valid flags 203g and 203h corresponding to the probability change area switches 73d and 74d in which a sphere is detected are set. Set to off. In particular, in the fifth round of the jackpot type “short time A”, only the left probability variation area 74 is valid, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set on, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g is set off. However, the sphere is configured to flow into the right-side probability variation region 73. Therefore, even when the sphere passes to the right probability variation region 73 and the sphere is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d in the fifth round, the probability variation transition flag is not set because the right probability variation region 73 is not set to be valid. 203i remains off without being turned on.

  Therefore, in the big hit type “short time A”, even if the sphere passes through the probability change areas 73 and 74 and is detected by the probability change area switches 73d and 74d, the probability change area switches 73d and 74d that detect the sphere are used. Since the corresponding probability variation areas 73 and 74 are not set to be valid, the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on but remains off.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, the detection mode of the sphere for each round of the jackpot type “latency probability variation A” will be described. FIG. 15 shows operation timings of the big winning opening solenoid 65c, the right probability changing area solenoid 73b and the left probability changing area solenoid 74b in each round of the first special symbol jackpot type “latency probability variation A”, the big winning opening switch 71, the right It is the timing chart which showed typically the detection timing of the sphere in the probability variation area switch 73d and the left probability variation area switch 74d and the setting timing of the right probability variation effective flag 203g, the left probability variation effective flag 203h and the probability variation transition flag 203i. FIG. 16 shows the operation timings of the big winning opening solenoid 65c, the right probability changing area solenoid 73b and the left probability changing area solenoid 74b in the first to third rounds of the big hit type “latency probability variation A”, and the big winning opening switch 71. , A timing chart schematically showing each time of the detection timing of the sphere in the right probability change region switch 73d and the left probability change region switch 74d and the setting timing of the right probability change effective flag 203g, the left probability change effective flag 203h, and the probability change transition flag 203i. It is. Hereinafter, the timing will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in the jackpot type “latency probability variation A”, a total of seven rounds of jackpot game is executed, and at the start of each round, the big prize opening solenoid 65c is turned on and the open / close plate 65b is opened. Then, a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, “30 seconds” at the maximum from the opening (see Max t1 in FIG. 16; Max t1 <“30000 ms”)) or 10 balls are detected by the big prize opening switch 71 ), The special prize opening solenoid 65c is turned off, the open / close plate 65b is closed, and one round is completed.

  Also, in the jackpot type “latency probability variation A”, the open / close pattern of the right side probability variation area 73 and the left side probability variation area 74 is “X1” similarly to the jackpot type “time reduction A”. Therefore, in the first round, when the first winning ball switch 71 detects the first count ball, both the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t2 in FIG. 16). T2 = “60 ms”), the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are configured to be able to recognize whether they can be normally driven.

  Then, when the ball of the third count is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the right probability variation region solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms" (see t3 in FIG. 16, t3 = "2000ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the time required to reach the right probability variation area 73 after the ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (in the first embodiment, “1. 5 seconds ". See t4 in FIG. 16. t4 <" 2000ms "). Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the right probability variation region 73 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latency probability variation A” is “B”, and the right probability variation region 73 in the third round and the left probability variation region 74 in the sixth round are valid. Is set. Therefore, in the first round, the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are both invalid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left probability variation valid flag 203h are set off. Accordingly, even when the sphere passes to the right probability variation region 73 and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d in the first round, since the right probability variation region 73 is not set to be effective, the probability variation transition flag is set. 203i remains off without being turned on.

  In the odd rounds (ie, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, and 7 rounds) of the jackpot type “latency probability variation A”, the drive modes of the right probability variation region solenoid 73 b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74 b are the same as those in the first round. .

  Next, in the second round of the big hit type “latency probability variation A”, when the first count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid are the same as in the first round. 74 b are both turned on for “60 ms” (see t5 in FIG. 16. T5 = “60 ms”), and is configured to be able to recognize whether the right probability changing region solenoid 73b and the left probability changing region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. Yes.

  Then, when the ball of the third count is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the left probability changing region solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000ms" (see t6 in FIG. 16, t6 = "2000ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the time required to reach the left probability variation region 74 after the ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (that is, “1.6 seconds”). See t7 in FIG. 16. t7 <“2000 ms”). Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the left probability variation region 74 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latency probability variation A” is “B”, and the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are invalid in the second round, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and The left likelihood variation valid flag 203h is set to off. Therefore, even in the second round, even if the sphere passes to the left probability variation region 74 and the sphere is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d, the probability variation transition flag is not set because the left probability variation region 74 is not set to be valid. 203i remains off without being turned on.

  Note that, in the even rounds (ie, the 4th round and the 6th round) of the big hit type “latency probability variation A”, the drive modes of the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are the same as those in the second round.

  Next, in the third round of the jackpot type “latency probability variation A”, when the first-count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, the right probability change region solenoid 73b and Both the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t8 in FIG. 16; t8 = “60 ms”), and it is possible to recognize whether the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. It is configured.

  Then, in the third round, when the ball of the third count is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the right probability variation region solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000ms" (see t9 in FIG. 16, t9 = "2000ms"). .) In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the time required to reach the right probability variation area 73 after the ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (that is, “1.5 seconds”). See t10 in FIG. 16. t10 <“2000 ms”). Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the right probability variation region 73 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latency probability variation A” is “B”. In the third round, only the right probability variation area 73 is valid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g is turned on. In addition to being set, the left likelihood change valid flag 203h is set to OFF. Therefore, in the third round, when the sphere passes to the right probability variation region 73 and the sphere is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d, the right probability variation region 73 is set to be valid, and the probability variation transition flag 203i is turned on. Set to

  In the sixth round of the jackpot type “latency probability variation A”, only the left probability variation area 74 is valid, the left probability variation effective flag 203h is set on, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set off. ing. Accordingly, even if the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on in the third round, the sphere passes through the left probability variation region 74 located downstream of the right probability variation region 73 in the sixth round, and the left probability variation region switch 74d. When the sphere is detected by, the probability variation transition flag 203i is set on.

  Therefore, in the jackpot type “latency probability variation A”, the probability variation regions 73 and 74 corresponding to the probability variation region switches 73 d and 74 d that detect the sphere in the third round and the sixth round are set to be effective, and therefore the probability variation transition is performed. The flag 203i is set on. At the end of the jackpot, the “probability variation state” is set with reference to the probability variation transition flag 203i.

  With this configuration, even if a sphere passes through each probability variation region 73, 74, if the probability variation region 73, 74 is not set to be effective internally, a “probability variation state” occurs after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, even when the player visually recognizes the passage of the ball to each of the probability variation areas 73 and 74, the occurrence of the “probability variation state” can be prevented from being determined after the jackpot. Further, the “latency probability changing effect mode” and the “short time notification effect mode” or the “normal notification mode” are configured to be equivalent effects. With this configuration, even when the “latency probability variation effect mode” is being executed, it is determined whether the game is in the “probability variation state”, the “time reduction state”, or the “normal game state”. It is possible to make the player difficult to recognize and to create game characteristics that allow the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, when a jackpot type that generates a “probability variation state” after winning the jackpot is won, the ball can pass through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set effectively in a plurality of rounds of the jackpot. Has been. Therefore, even if one of the rounds in which the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are set to be effective is not allowed to pass the ball to the probability change areas 73 and 74 that are set to be effective, the other It is possible to pass the sphere through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are effectively set in the round. Therefore, it is difficult to pass the ball to the probability variation areas 73 and 74 in one of the effective rounds due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a launch abnormality or a poor physical condition of the player). Even in the event that a player has a problem, the possibility of passing the ball to the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set to be effective in the other round that is set to be effective can be reduced due to unforeseen circumstances. A comfortable game can be realized without incurring profits.

  Further, whether or not the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a and the left probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a can be opened by driving the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b to such an extent that the ball does not flow in the first count of each round. Therefore, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the respective probability variation areas 73 and 74 are not opened due to an abnormality or the like.

  In addition, when a jackpot type that generates a “probability variation state” after winning the jackpot is won, the round in which the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are set to be effective is related to a plurality of rounds in which the probability change areas 73 and 74 are set to be effective. The right probability variation area 73 located upstream in the special winning opening 65a is set to be valid. With this configuration, if an abnormality such as ball clogging occurs in the special winning opening 65a, in particular, the ball clogging or the like is downstream of the right probability variation region 73 and upstream of the left probability variation region 74. Even if an abnormality occurs, the right probability variation area 73 located upstream of the big winning opening 65a is set to be effective first, and the sphere can be allowed to flow into the right probability variation area 73. It is possible to make it easy to grant the right to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the detection mode of the sphere in each round of the jackpot type “Time B” will be described. FIG. 17 shows operation timings of the big winning opening solenoid 65c, the right probability changing area solenoid 73b and the left probability changing area solenoid 74b in each round of the first special symbol jackpot type “time B”, the big winning opening switch 71, the right probability changing area. It is the timing chart which showed typically the detection timing of the sphere in switch 73d and left probability variation area switch 74d, and the setting timing of right probability variation effective flag 203g, left probability variation effective flag 203h and probability variation transition flag 203i.

  As shown in FIG. 17, in the jackpot type “time-short B”, a total of seven rounds of jackpot game is executed, and at the start of each round, the big prize opening solenoid 65c is turned on and the open / close plate 65b is opened. When a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, “30 seconds” from opening or one of the ten balls detected by the big prize opening switch 71) is established, the big prize opening solenoid 65c is turned off to close the opening / closing plate 65b, and one round is completed.

  In addition, in the jackpot type “time / short B”, the open / close pattern of the right side probability variation area 73 and the left side probability variation area 74 is “X2”, and therefore, the first count ball was detected by the big prize opening switch 71 in the first round. In this case, both the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms" so that it can be recognized whether the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. .

  Then, when the ball of the third count is detected by the special winning opening switch 71, only the left probability changing region solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the time required to reach the left probability variation region 74 after the ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (in the first embodiment, “1. 6 seconds "). Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the left probability variation region 74 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “Time B” is “B”, and the right probability variation area 73 in the third round and the left probability variation area 74 in the sixth round are set to be valid. The Therefore, in the first round, the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are both invalid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left probability variation valid flag 203h are set off. Accordingly, even when the sphere passes to the left probability variation region 74 and the sphere is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d in the first round, the probability variation transition flag is not set because the left probability variation region 74 is not set to be valid. 203i remains off without being turned on.

  It should be noted that in the odd-numbered rounds (ie, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, and 7 rounds) of the jackpot type “time-short B”, the drive modes of the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are the same as those in the first round.

  Next, when the first count ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71 in the second round of the jackpot type “short time B”, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are Both “60 ms” are turned on, and the right probability changing region solenoid 73b and the left probability changing region solenoid 74b are configured to recognize whether or not they can be normally driven.

  When the third winning ball is detected by the special winning opening switch 71, only the right probability changing area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the time required to reach the right probability variation area 73 after the ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (in the first embodiment, “1. 5 seconds "). Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the right probability variation region 73 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “time-short B” is “B”, and the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are invalid in the second round, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left probability variation The valid flag 203h is set to off. Accordingly, even when the sphere passes to the right probability variation region 73 and the right probability variation region switch 73d detects the sphere in the second round, the probability variation transition flag is not set because the right probability variation region 73 is not set to be valid. 203i remains off without being turned on.

  Note that the drive mode of the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b is the same as that in the second round in the even number round (ie, 4 rounds and 6 rounds) of the jackpot type “time-short B”.

  Next, when the first count ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71 in the third round of the jackpot type “Time B”, the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change are the same as in the first and second rounds. Both the region solenoids 74b are turned on for "60 ms", so that it is possible to recognize whether the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

  Then, when the ball of the third count is detected by the special winning opening switch 71, only the left probability changing region solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the time required to reach the left probability variation area 74 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (that is, “1.6 seconds”). It is. Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the left probability variation region 74 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “time-short B” is “B”. In the third round, only the right probability variation area 73 is valid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g is set to ON. In addition, the left likelihood variation valid flag 203h is set to OFF. Therefore, even in the third round, even if a sphere passes to the left probability variation region 74 and the sphere is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d, the probability variation transition flag is not set because the left probability variation region 74 is not set to be valid. 203i remains off without being turned on.

  In the fourth and subsequent rounds of the jackpot type “short time B”, the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are open are invalid, and the probability variation valid flags 203g and 203h corresponding to the probability variation area switches 73d and 74d in which a sphere is detected are displayed. Set to off. In particular, in the sixth round of the jackpot type “short time B”, only the left probability variation area 74 is valid, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set on, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g is set off. However, the sphere is configured to flow into the right-side probability variation region 73. Therefore, in the sixth round, even if a sphere passes to the right probability variation region 73 and a sphere is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d, the right probability variation region 73 is not set to be effective, so the probability variation transition flag 203i remains off without being turned on.

  Therefore, in the big hit type “short time B”, even if the sphere passes through the probability change areas 73 and 74 and is detected by the probability change area switches 73d and 74d, the probability change area switches 73d and 74d that detect the sphere are detected. Since the corresponding probability variation areas 73 and 74 are not set to be valid, the probability variation transition flag 203i remains off instead of being turned on, as in the big hit type “time reduction A”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the detection mode of the sphere in each round of the jackpot type “latency probability variation B” will be described. 18 shows the operation timings of the big winning opening solenoid 65c, the right probability changing area solenoid 73b, and the left probability changing area solenoid 74b in each round of the jackpot type “latency probability fluctuation B” of the first special symbol, the big winning opening switch 71, the right It is the timing chart which showed typically the detection timing of the sphere in the probability variation area switch 73d and the left probability variation area switch 74d and the setting timing of the right probability variation effective flag 203g, the left probability variation effective flag 203h and the probability variation transition flag 203i.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in the jackpot type “latency probability variation B”, a total of seven rounds of jackpot game is executed, and at the start of each round, the big prize opening solenoid 65c is turned on and the open / close plate 65b is opened. When a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, “30 seconds” from opening or one of the ten balls detected by the big prize opening switch 71) is established, the big prize opening solenoid 65c is turned off to close the opening / closing plate 65b, and one round is completed.

  In addition, in the big hit type “latency probability variation B”, the open / close pattern of the right probability variation area 73 and the left probability variation area 74 is “X2”, so that the first prize ball 71 is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 in the first round. In this case, both the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms", so that it is possible to recognize whether the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. ing.

  Then, when the ball of the third count is detected by the special winning opening switch 71, only the left probability changing region solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the time required to reach the left probability variation region 74 after the ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (in the first embodiment, “1. 6 seconds "). Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the left probability variation region 74 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latency probability variation B” is “A”, and the right probability variation area 73 in the second round and the left probability variation area 74 in the fifth round are valid. Is set. Therefore, in the first round, the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are both invalid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left probability variation valid flag 203h are set off. Accordingly, even when the sphere passes to the left probability variation region 74 and the sphere is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d in the first round, the probability variation transition flag is not set because the left probability variation region 74 is not set to be valid. 203i remains off without being turned on.

  In the odd rounds (ie, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, and 7 rounds) of the jackpot type “latency probability fluctuation B”, the drive modes of the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are the same as those in the first round. .

  Next, in the second round of the jackpot type “latency probability variation B”, when the first count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid are the same as in the first round. 74b are both turned on for "60 ms", so that it is possible to recognize whether the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

  When the third winning ball is detected by the special winning opening switch 71, only the right probability changing area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the time required to reach the right probability variation area 73 after the ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (in the first embodiment, “1. 5 seconds "). Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the right probability variation region 73 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latency probability variation B” is “A”. In the second round, only the right probability variation area 73 is valid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g is turned on. In addition to being set, the left likelihood change valid flag 203h is set to OFF. Therefore, in the second round, when the sphere passes to the right probability variation region 73 and the sphere is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d, the right probability variation region 73 is set to be valid, so the probability variation transition flag 203i is turned on. Set to

  In the fifth round of the jackpot type “latency probability variation B”, only the left probability variation area 74 is valid, the left probability variation effective flag 203h is set on, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set off. ing. Therefore, even if the probability change transition flag 203i is not turned on in the second round, the probability change is detected when the sphere passes to the left probability change region 74 in the fifth round and is detected by the left probability change region switch 74d. The migration flag 203i is set on.

  Therefore, in the big hit type “latency probability variation B”, when the sphere passes to the probability change areas 73 and 74 and is detected by the probability change area switches 73d and 74d, the sphere is detected in the second round and the fifth round. Since the probability variation regions 73 and 74 corresponding to the probability variation region switches 73d and 74d are set to be effective, the probability variation transition flag 203i is set to ON as in the big hit type “latency probability variation A”. At the end of the jackpot, the “probability variation state” is set with reference to the probability variation transition flag 203i.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, a detection mode of a sphere in each round of the jackpot type “probability variation A” will be described. FIG. 19 shows the operation timings of the big prize opening solenoid 65c, the right probability variation area solenoid 73b, and the left probability variation area solenoid 74b in each round of the jackpot type “probability variation A” of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the big prize opening. The timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of the sphere in the switch 71, the right probability variation region switch 73d and the left probability variation region switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right probability variation effective flag 203g, the left probability variation effective flag 203h, and the probability variation transition flag 203i. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 19, in the jackpot type “probability variation A”, a total of 15 rounds of jackpot game are executed, and at the start of each round, the big prize opening solenoid 65c is turned on and the open / close plate 65b is opened. When a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, “30 seconds” from opening or one of the ten balls detected by the big prize opening switch 71) is established, the big prize opening solenoid 65c is turned off to close the opening / closing plate 65b, and one round is completed.

  Also, in the jackpot type “probability variation A”, the open / close pattern of the right probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region 74 is “Y1”, and therefore, the first count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 in the first round. In this case, both the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms", so that it can be recognized whether or not the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b can be normally driven. Yes.

  Then, when the ball of the third count is detected by the special winning opening switch 71, only the left probability changing region solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the time required to reach the left probability variation region 74 after the ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (in the first embodiment, “1. 6 seconds "). Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the left probability variation region 74 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “probability variation A” is “C”, and the right probability variation area 73 of the fourth round and the left probability variation area 74 of the ninth round are set to be valid. Is done. Therefore, in the first round, the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are both invalid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left probability variation valid flag 203h are set off. Accordingly, even when the sphere passes to the left probability variation region 74 and the sphere is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d in the first round, the probability variation transition flag is not set because the left probability variation region 74 is not set to be valid. 203i remains off without being turned on.

  In the odd-numbered rounds (ie, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds, 9 rounds, 11 rounds, 13 rounds, and 15 rounds) of the jackpot type “probability variation A”, the right probability variation region solenoid 73 b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74 b The driving mode is equivalent to the first round.

  Next, in the second round of the jackpot type “probability change A”, when the first count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are the same as in the first round. Are both turned on for "60 ms", and it is possible to recognize whether or not the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b can be normally driven.

  When the third winning ball is detected by the special winning opening switch 71, only the right probability changing area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the time required to reach the right probability variation area 73 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (that is, “1.5 seconds”). It is. Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the right probability variation region 73 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “probability variation A” is “C”, and the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are invalid in the second round, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left The probability variation valid flag 203h is set to off. Accordingly, even when the sphere passes to the right probability variation region 73 and the right probability variation region switch 73d detects the sphere in the second round, the probability variation transition flag is not set because the right probability variation region 73 is not set to be valid. 203i remains off without being turned on.

  Note that in the even rounds of the jackpot type “probability variation A” (that is, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds, 12 rounds and 14 rounds), the drive modes of the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are as follows. It is equivalent to the second round.

  Next, in the third round of the jackpot type “probability variation A”, when the first winning ball switch 71 detects the ball of the first count, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left are the same as in the first and second rounds. The probability variation region solenoid 74b is both turned on for "60 ms" so that it can be recognized whether the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

  Then, when the ball of the third count is detected by the special winning opening switch 71, only the left probability changing region solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the time required to reach the left probability variation region 74 after the ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (that is, “1.6 seconds”). ). Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the left probability variation region 74 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “probability variation A” is “C”, and the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are invalid in the third round, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left The probability variation valid flag 203h is set to off. Therefore, even in the third round, even if a sphere passes to the left probability variation region 74 and the sphere is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d, the probability variation transition flag is not set because the left probability variation region 74 is not set to be valid. 203i remains off without being turned on.

  Next, in the fourth round of the jackpot type “probability fluctuation A”, when the first count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, the right probability changing area solenoid 73b and the left are detected as in the first to third rounds. The probability variation region solenoid 74b is both turned on for "60 ms" so that it can be recognized whether the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

  In the fourth round, when the ball of the third count is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the right probability changing area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the time required to reach the right probability variation area 73 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (that is, “1.6 seconds”). It is. Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the right probability variation region 73 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “probability variation A” is “C”. In the fourth round, only the right probability variation area 73 is valid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g is set to ON. In addition, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to OFF. Accordingly, in the fourth round, when the sphere passes to the right probability variation region 73 and the sphere is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d, the right probability variation region 73 is set to be valid, and the probability variation transition flag 203i is turned on. Set to

  In the ninth round of the jackpot type “probability variation A”, only the left probability variation area 74 is valid, the left probability variation effective flag 203h is set on, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set off. Yes. Accordingly, even if the probability change transition flag 203i is not turned on in the fourth round, the sphere passes to the left probability change region 74 in the ninth round and the sphere is detected by the left probability change region switch 74d. The migration flag 203i is set on.

  Therefore, in the jackpot type “probability variation A”, when the sphere passes to the probability change areas 73 and 74 and the sphere is detected by the probability change area switches 73d and 74d, the sphere is detected in the fourth round and the ninth round. Since the probability change areas 73 and 74 corresponding to the probability change area switches 73d and 74d are set to be valid, the probability change transition flag 203i is set to ON. At the end of the jackpot, the “probability variation state” is set with reference to the probability variation transition flag 203i.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the detection mode of the sphere in each round of the jackpot type “Time C” will be described. FIG. 20 shows operation timings of the big winning opening solenoid 65c, the right probability changing area solenoid 73b, and the left probability changing area solenoid 74b, the big winning opening switch 71, and the right probability changing area in each round of the jackpot type “Time C” of the second special symbol. It is the timing chart which showed typically the detection timing of the sphere in switch 73d and left probability variation area switch 74d, and the setting timing of right probability variation effective flag 203g, left probability variation effective flag 203h and probability variation transition flag 203i.

  As shown in FIG. 20, in the jackpot type “time saving C”, a total of 15 rounds of jackpot game are executed, and at the start of each round, the big prize opening solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening / closing plate 65b is opened. When a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, “30 seconds” from opening or one of the ten balls detected by the big prize opening switch 71) is established, the big prize opening solenoid 65c is turned off to close the opening / closing plate 65b, and one round is completed.

  In addition, in the jackpot type “time / short C”, the open / close pattern of the right probability variation area 73 and the left probability variation area 74 is “Y2”, and therefore, the first winning ball switch 71 detected the first count ball in the first round. In this case, both the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms" so that it can be recognized whether the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. .

  When the third winning ball is detected by the special winning opening switch 71, only the right probability changing area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the time required to reach the right probability variation area 73 after the ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (in the first embodiment, “1. 5 seconds "). Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the right probability variation region 73 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “time short C” is “A”, and the right probability variation area 73 of the second round and the left probability variation area 74 of the fifth round are set to be valid. The Therefore, in the first round, the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are both invalid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left probability variation valid flag 203h are set off. Accordingly, even when the sphere passes to the right probability variation region 73 and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d in the first round, since the right probability variation region 73 is not set to be effective, the probability variation transition flag is set. 203i remains off without being turned on.

  In the odd-numbered rounds (ie, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds, 9 rounds, 11 rounds, 13 rounds and 15 rounds) of the jackpot type “time-short C”, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are driven. The aspect is equivalent to the first round.

  Next, in the second round of the jackpot type “Time C”, when the first count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are changed as in the first round. Both “60 ms” are turned on, and the right probability changing region solenoid 73b and the left probability changing region solenoid 74b are configured to recognize whether or not they can be normally driven.

  Then, when the ball of the third count is detected by the special winning opening switch 71, only the left probability changing region solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the time required to reach the left probability variation area 74 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (that is, “1.6 seconds”). It is. Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the left probability variation region 74 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “time-short C” is “A”. In the second round, only the right probability variation area 73 is valid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g is set to ON. In addition, the left likelihood variation valid flag 203h is set to OFF. Therefore, even in the second round, even if the sphere passes to the left probability variation region 74 and the sphere is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d, the probability variation transition flag is not set because the left probability variation region 74 is not set to be valid. 203i remains off without being turned on.

  In addition, in the even number round (ie, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds, 12 rounds, and 14 rounds) of the jackpot type “time short C”, the drive modes of the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are as follows: It is equivalent to the second round.

  In the third and subsequent rounds of the jackpot type “Time C”, the open probability change areas 73 and 74 are invalid, and the probability change valid flags 203g and 203h corresponding to the probability change area switches 73d and 74d in which a sphere is detected are set. Set to off. In particular, in the fifth round of the jackpot type “Time C”, only the left probability variation area 74 is valid, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set on, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g is set off. However, the sphere is configured to flow into the right-side probability variation region 73. Therefore, even when the sphere passes to the right probability variation region 73 and the sphere is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d in the fifth round, the probability variation transition flag is not set because the right probability variation region 73 is not set to be valid. 203i remains off without being turned on.

  Therefore, in the jackpot type “short time C”, even if the sphere passes through the probability change areas 73 and 74 and is detected by the probability change area switches 73d and 74d, the probability change area switches 73d and 74d that detect the sphere are displayed. Since the corresponding probability variation areas 73 and 74 are not set to be valid, the probability variation transition flag 203i remains off instead of being turned on, as in the big hit types “time reduction A” and “time reduction B”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the detection mode of the sphere in each round of the jackpot type “latency probability variation C” will be described. FIG. 21 shows the operation timing of the big winning opening solenoid 65c, the right probability changing area solenoid 73b, and the left probability changing area solenoid 74b in each round of the big special hit type “latency probability variation C” of the second special symbol, the big winning opening switch 71, the right It is the timing chart which showed typically the detection timing of the sphere in the probability variation area switch 73d and the left probability variation area switch 74d and the setting timing of the right probability variation effective flag 203g, the left probability variation effective flag 203h and the probability variation transition flag 203i.

  As shown in FIG. 21, in the jackpot type “latency probability variation C”, a total of 15 rounds of jackpot game are executed, and at the start of each round, the big prize opening solenoid 65c is turned on and the open / close plate 65b is opened. When a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, “30 seconds” from opening or one of the ten balls detected by the big prize opening switch 71) is established, the big prize opening solenoid 65c is turned off to close the opening / closing plate 65b, and one round is completed.

  Also, in the jackpot type “latency probability variation C”, the open / close pattern of the right probability variation area 73 and the left probability variation area 74 is “Y2”, as in the jackpot type “Time C”, so in the first round, When the first count ball is detected by the switch 71, both the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms", and the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are normally driven. It is configured to be able to recognize whether or not it is possible.

  When the third winning ball is detected by the special winning opening switch 71, only the right probability changing area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the time required to reach the right probability variation area 73 after the ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (in the first embodiment, “1. 5 seconds "). Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the right probability variation region 73 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latency probability variation C” is “B”, and the right probability variation area 73 in the third round and the left probability variation area 74 in the sixth round are valid. Is set. Therefore, in the first round, the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are both invalid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left probability variation valid flag 203h are set off. Accordingly, even when the sphere passes to the right probability variation region 73 and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d in the first round, since the right probability variation region 73 is not set to be effective, the probability variation transition flag is set. 203i remains off without being turned on.

  It should be noted that in the odd-numbered rounds (ie, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds, 9 rounds, 11 rounds, 13 rounds and 15 rounds) of the jackpot type “latency probability variation C”, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b The driving mode is equivalent to that in the first round.

  Next, in the second round of the jackpot type “latency probability variation C”, when the first count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid are the same as in the first round. 74b are both turned on for "60 ms", so that it is possible to recognize whether the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

  Then, when the ball of the third count is detected by the special winning opening switch 71, only the left probability changing region solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the time required to reach the left probability variation area 74 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (that is, “1.6 seconds”). It is. Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the left probability variation region 74 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latency probability variation C” is “B”, and the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are invalid in the second round, and the right probability variation validity flag 203g and The left likelihood variation valid flag 203h is set to off. Therefore, even in the second round, even if the sphere passes to the left probability variation region 74 and the sphere is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d, the probability variation transition flag is not set because the left probability variation region 74 is not set to be valid. 203i remains off without being turned on.

  It should be noted that in the even rounds (ie, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds, 12 rounds, and 14 rounds) of the jackpot type “latency probability variation C”, the drive mode of the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b Is equivalent to the second round.

  Next, in the third round of the jackpot type “latency probability variation C”, when the first-count ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71, the right probability change region solenoid 73b and Both the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms", and the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are configured to recognize whether they can be driven normally.

  In the third round, when the ball of the third count is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the right probability changing area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the time required to reach the right probability variation area 73 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (that is, “1.5 seconds”). It is. Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the right probability variation region 73 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latency probability variation C” is “B”. In the third round, only the right probability variation area 73 is valid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g is turned on. In addition to being set, the left likelihood change valid flag 203h is set to OFF. Therefore, in the third round, when the sphere passes to the right probability variation region 73 and the sphere is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d, the right probability variation region 73 is set to be valid, and the probability variation transition flag 203i is turned on. Set to

  In the sixth round of the jackpot type “latency probability variation C”, only the left probability variation area 74 is valid, the left probability variation effective flag 203h is set on, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set off. ing. Therefore, even if the probability change transition flag 203i is not turned on in the third round, the sphere passes to the left probability change region 74 in the sixth round and the sphere is detected by the left probability change region switch 74d. The migration flag 203i is set on.

  Therefore, in the big hit type “latency probability variation C”, when the sphere passes through the probability change areas 73 and 74 and is detected by the probability change area switches 73d and 74d, the sphere is detected in the third round and the sixth round. Since the probability variation areas 73 and 74 corresponding to the certain probability variation area switches 73d and 74d are set to be valid, the probability variation transition flag 203i is set to ON. At the end of the jackpot, the “probability variation state” is set with reference to the probability variation transition flag 203i.

  In this way, the jackpot type with the same opening / closing pattern (that is, jackpot type “time-short A” and “latency probability variation A”, jackpot type “time-short B” and “latency probability variation B”, and jackpot type “time-short C” And “latency probability variation C”), and the jackpot type cannot be determined only by the opening / closing pattern of each probability variation area 73, 74, thereby recognizing which jackpot type is won by the player. It is difficult (impossible) to configure, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played.

  On the other hand, the jackpot type “probability change A” for informing that the “probability fluctuation state” is a unique opening / closing pattern (that is, “Y1”) different from other jackpot types is the right probability variation area 73 and left probability variation area. 74 is controlled to open and close. Therefore, the player can recognize that the “probability variation state” is given by recognizing the open / close pattern of the right probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region 74.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. is there. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, fluctuation effects, and continuous The setting of the display mode of the effect performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, such as a notice effect, is controlled.

  The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. In the first embodiment, a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 only in one direction, and a command cannot be transmitted from the sound lamp controller 113 to the main controller 110. ing. On the other hand, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be able to transmit / receive commands to / from each other.

  Further, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the back image of the “super reach” effect mode or the like, and a display based on the pressing of the frame button 22 on the display control device 114 is shown in FIG. The display device 81 is instructed to display.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as a solenoid 209, motors, and the like, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31). Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process (see FIG. 32) activated upon power-on, a main process (see FIG. 33) executed after the startup process, and a regular process (first embodiment). Then, there are a timer interruption process (see FIG. 22) activated in a “4 millisecond” period) and an NMI interruption process (see FIG. 31) activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) and the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31) will be described first, and then the start-up process (see FIG. 32) and the main process (see FIG. 33) Will be explained.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every “4 milliseconds”. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process and the main process, a command to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, and the like is generated based on various processes, and is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. . In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device).

  For example, the reserved ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 23) described later is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the special figure fluctuation process (see FIG. 24) or the fluctuation start process (FIG. 25) which is one of the special figure fluctuation processes are sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Send. In addition, a ball launch signal set in the case of launching a ball in the launch control process in S112 described later is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then a jackpot process is executed to execute a process at the big win based on the first special symbol or the second special symbol ( S103). Details of the jackpot processing (S103) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the ordinary electric combination control process for executing the drive control process of the rotating plate of the ordinary electric combination 67a is executed (S104). Briefly, the normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display of the normal symbol on the condition that the sphere has passed the normal symbol gate 67. As a result of the variable symbol normal display, the normal symbol hit symbol (for example, When the “○” symbol) appears and hits, the rotating plate of the ordinary electric accessory 67a is opened for a predetermined time.

  Next, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S105). That is, the state of the big winning opening switch 71, the right probability changing area switch 73d, the left probability changing area switch 74d, and the various switches 208 connected to the main control device 110 is read, and the state of the switch 208 is determined and detected. Save information (winning detection information). Further, based on the winning detection information, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S106). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to “0” when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“899” in the first embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203 c area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“99” in the first embodiment), it is cleared to “0” and the second initial value The updated value of the random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the regular number random number counter C4 are updated (S107). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the random number counter C4 are incremented by 1, and the counter values are the maximum values (first embodiment). In the embodiment, when “899”, “99”, “99”, “199”, “99”) are reached, each is cleared to “0”. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 or the regular figure random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is used as the jackpot random number counter C1 or the random number per figure. The initial value of the counter C4 is read, and the initial value is set in the jackpot random number counter C1 or the regular number random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a start winning process is executed in accordance with winning in the special figure 1 winning port 64b or the special figure 2 winning port 64c (S108). Gate passage processing for determining the contents of variable display and the like is executed (S109). Details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the gate passing process (S109) is executed, a process for dynamically displaying a special symbol by the special symbol display device 37 based on the processing content of the start winning process (S108) or the third symbol display device 81. A special figure variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol is executed (S110). The details of the special figure variation process (S110) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, based on the processing contents of the gate passing process (S109), the normal symbol changing process is executed (S111) for executing the process for performing variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 83. In the normal symbol variation process (S111), the normal symbol lottery probability is performed with either a high probability (for example, 9/10) or a low probability (1/10) according to the value of a time-counter, which will be described later.

  After executing the normal map changing process (S111), the firing control process is executed (S112), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S113), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process (S112) is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing of a sphere. When the ball launch is on, information on the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in order to send the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. Thereby, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

  Next, the start winning process (S108) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S108). In the start winning process, it is determined whether or not a ball is awarded to the special figure 1 second prize port 64b or the special figure 2 prize port 64c, and if there is a prize, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are awarded. A process of storing (holding) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the winning holes 64b and 64c is executed. Further, a process for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of balls to be held to the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

  In this start winning process (S108), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won a special figure 1 winning opening 64b (start winning) (S201). Here, the output signal of the special figure 1 entrance switch (not shown) for detecting the entrance (winning) to the special prize 1 first prize opening 64b read in the switch reading process (see S105 in FIG. 22). Based on the above, a ball entering the special figure 1 winning opening 64b is detected over three timer interruption processes (see FIG. 22).

  If it is determined that the ball has won the special figure 1 winning port 64b (there is a start winning) (S201: Yes), then the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (held in the main controller 110) It is determined whether or not the number N1 of suspended action balls for dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is less than the upper limit (“4” in the first embodiment) (S202). Then, even if there is a winning in the special figure 1 winning opening 64b, if the number of operation suspension balls N1 <4 is not satisfied (S202: No), this start winning process (S108) is terminated and a timer interruption process (see FIG. 22). Return to).

  On the other hand, if the number N1 <4 of the operation reservation balls (S202: Yes), 1 is added to the value (the number N1 of operation reservation balls) of the first reservation ball number counter 203a (S203). And since it is a prize to the special figure 1 winning opening 64b corresponding to a 1st special symbol this time, the 1st reservation ball storage area 203d is set as a storage place of each random value C1-C3, CS1 (S204), The process proceeds to S209.

  In the process of S201, when it is determined that the ball has not won the special figure 1 winning slot 64b (S201: No), it is then determined whether or not the ball has won the special figure 2 winning slot 64c (starting prize). A determination is made (S205). Here, as in the special figure 1 winning opening 64b, the special figure 2 entrance opening switch (detected) for detecting the winning (winning) in the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c read in the switch reading process (see S105 in FIG. 22). Based on the output signal (not shown), the ball entering the special figure 2 winning opening 64c is detected over three timer interruption processes (see FIG. 22).

  If it is determined that the ball has won the special figure 2 winning port 64c (there is a start winning) (S205: Yes), then the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (held by the main controller 110) It is determined whether or not the number N2 of suspended action balls for dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit (“4” in the first embodiment) (S206). Then, there is no winning at the special figure 2 winning slot 64c (S205: No), or even if there is a winning at the special figure 2 winning slot 64c, the number of reserved balls N2 <4 is not satisfied (S206: No). The start winning process (S108) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  On the other hand, if the number N2 of operating balls is less than 4 (S206: Yes), the value of the second holding ball number counter 203b (number of operating balls N2) is incremented by 1 (S207). And since it is a prize to the special figure 2 winning opening 64c corresponding to a 2nd special symbol this time, the 2nd reservation ball storage area 203e is set as a storage place of each random value C1-C3, CS1 (S208), The process proceeds to S209.

  In the processing of S209, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 8) and set as the storage destination in S204 or S208. Of the first reserved first to fourth areas or the second reserved first to fourth areas provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is When specified as the storage destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 and the variation type counter of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved ball number counter 203a Each hold (stored in storage area 203d4 To (S209). When the second reserved ball storage area 203e is designated as the storage destination, the big hit random number counter storage area 203e1, the big hit type counter storage area 203e2 of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the second held ball number counter 203b, stop The data is held (stored) in the pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 and the variation type counter storage area 203e4 (S209).

  Specifically, for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination in the process of S204 based on the winning in the special figure 1 winning opening 64b, and the first reserved ball after addition by the process of S203 If the value of the number counter 203a is “1”, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the storage areas of the first holding first area, respectively. If the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is “2”, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is “3” in each storage area of the first reserved second area. If there is a counter, the counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the first reserved third area, and if the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a after addition is “4”, each of the storage areas of the first reserved fourth area , CS1 is suspended.

  Further, for example, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination in the process of S208 based on the winning in the special figure 2 winning opening 64c, and the second reserved ball number counter 203b after the addition in the process of S207 is set. If the value of “1” is “1”, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in the respective storage areas of the second reserved first area. If the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after the addition is “2”, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after the addition is “3” in each storage area of the second reserved second area. If there is, the counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the second reserved third area, and if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after the addition is “4”, each stored area of the second reserved fourth area , CS1 is suspended.

  Next, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b after the addition in the process of S203 or S207 (the operation held ball number N1 or the operation held ball number N2) and the first in the process of S209. Voice of the number-of-holding balls command including the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 stored (held) in the holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e In order to transmit to the lamp control device 113, the reserved ball number command is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S210). Thus, the reserved ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) to be executed next. When the process of S210 is completed, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  Note that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be included in the held ball number command in the process of S210 may be the values read from the counter buffer 203c by the process of S209, or the first hold in the process of S209. You may use what read the value stored (suspended) in the ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the special figure variation process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation process (S110). This special figure variation process (S110) is to perform control relating to dynamic display in the special symbol display device 37 and variation effects performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special figure variation process (S110), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S301). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), the special figure variation process (S110) is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is being dynamically displayed (S302), and the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is being dynamically displayed. If not (S302: No), it is then determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 is stopped (S303). As a result, after the dynamic display is stopped, if the predetermined time has not elapsed (S303: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). Thereby, the stop symbol in the dynamic display (variation effect) is displayed on the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol. .

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S303, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the dynamic display (S303: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the second special reserved in the main controller 110). It is determined whether or not the number of active suspension balls N2) of the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the symbol is larger than “0” (S304). As a result, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of held balls N2) is not “0” (S304: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the second special symbol. First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operation held ball number N2) (S305). This is because the execution of one dynamic display (variation effect) of the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the second special symbol that has been put on hold is started by the change start process (S310) described later. This is because the number of reserved balls related to the special symbol is reduced by one.

  Next, the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e is shifted (S306). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e toward the reserved ball execution area 203f. 1 area → holding ball execution area 203f, second holding second area → second holding first area, second holding third area → second holding second area, second holding fourth area → second holding third area For example, the data in each area is shifted.

  On the other hand, in the process of S304, if it is determined that the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (actuated held ball number N2) is “0” (S304: No), then, the first held ball number counter 203a. It is determined whether or not the value (the number N1 of suspended action balls for dynamic display (variation effect) relating to the first special symbol held in the main controller 110) is greater than “0” (S307). As a result, when the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of held balls N1) is not “0” (S307: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the first special symbol. First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operation held ball number N1) (S308). This is because the execution of one dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) related to the first special symbol that has been put on hold is started by the change start process (S310) described later. This is because the number decreases by one.

  Next, the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S309). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d toward the reserved ball execution area 203f. 1 area → holding ball execution area 203f, first holding second area → first holding first area, first holding third area → first holding second area, first holding fourth area → first holding third area For example, the data in each area is shifted.

  After the data shift process of S306 or S309, the variation start process for the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f by the data shift process. (S310), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). The variation start process (S310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S307, if it is determined that the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the number N1 of activated balls) is “0” (S307: No), a demonstration effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. It is determined whether or not it is a state, that is, whether or not a demonstration is being performed (S311). In this determination processing, after a demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of activated reserved balls N1 or the operation The period until any value of the number of reserved balls N2) is determined to be greater than “0” is determined as being demo.

  If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S311: No), a demo command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S312), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is in progress (S311: Yes), the process directly returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). The demo command set in the process of S312 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (see S101 of FIG. 22) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next, It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the demonstration command, it transmits the display demonstration command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 performs the demonstration to the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demonstration command. Control is performed to display the effect.

  Here, as described above, the demo command is set when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, if the variation effect is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the variation stop, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, when it is determined that the demonstration is not in progress in the process of S311 (S311: No), a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has elapsed after the change is stopped. When the second predetermined time has elapsed after the execution of the change and stopping, the process of S312 may be executed to set the demo command. As a result, when there is no reserved ball after the change stop, the stop effect of the stop change effect can be shown to the player for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demonstration effect.

  In the process of S302, if it is determined that the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is in dynamic display (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the dynamic display time (variation time) has elapsed (S313). ). The display time during dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this dynamic display time. If (variation time) has not elapsed (S313: No), the display of the special symbol display device 37 is updated (S314), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  In the first embodiment, in the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, for example, the display mode of the second LED group 37b is set until the variation time elapses after the dynamic display is started.

  On the other hand, if the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display in the special symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S313: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set for the special symbol display device 37. (S315). The stop symbol is set in advance by a variation start process (S310) described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start process, whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203f by the process of S306 or S309, and if it is a big hit, the value of the big hit type counter C2 Thus, the number of rounds at the time of jackpot and the gaming state after the jackpot are determined.

  When the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S315, the stop symbol of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed as the display of the second LED group 37b in the special symbol display device 37. In order to display in synchronization with confirmation, a confirmation command is set (S316), and the process proceeds to S317. The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it transmits a display confirmation command to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 is configured to stop the variation effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 and receive the stop symbol by receiving the display confirmation command.

  In the process of S317, it is determined whether or not the value of an ST counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is greater than “0” in order to determine whether or not the “probability variation state” is set (S317). This ST counter is “100” when the “probability variation state” is started in the jackpot end process (see S415 in FIG. 26) described later (see S415 in FIG. 26) because the probability variation transition flag 203i is set to ON. Is set (see S472 in FIG. 30).

  In the process of S317, if the value of the ST counter is not “0” (S317: Yes), it is a “probability variation state”, and the dynamic display (variation effect) of any special symbol has been completed once. The ST counter value is decremented by 1 (S318), and the process proceeds to S319. On the other hand, if the value of the ST counter is “0” in the process of S317 (S317: No), it is “normal game state” or “time reduction state”, so the process of S318 is skipped and the process is performed in S319. Migrate to

  In the process of S319, it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is greater than “0” in order to determine whether or not the gaming state has the “time reduction function” added. It discriminate | determines (S319). This hour / short counter is “100” when it is determined that the jackpot type “probability variation A”, “time / short time C” or “latency probability variation C” in the jackpot end process (see S415 in FIG. 26) described later. ”Is set (see S475 in FIG. 30), and“ 50 ”is set when it is determined that the jackpot type is“ time-short A ”,“ time-short B ”,“ latency probability variation A ”, or“ latency probability variation B ”. (See S476 in FIG. 30).

  In the process of S319, if the value of the time reduction counter is not “0” (S319: Yes), it is a gaming state to which “time reduction function” is added, and any special symbol dynamic display (variation effect) is displayed. Since the process has been completed once, the value of the hour / hour counter is decremented by 1 (S320), the special figure variation process (S110) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17). On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction counter is “0” in the process of S319 (S319: No), since the “time reduction function” is not added, the process of S320 is skipped and this special figure changing process (S110). ) To return to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the fluctuation start process (S310) which is one process of the special figure fluctuation process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S310). This variation start process (S310) performs a lottery or a lottery (a jackpot lottery) on the basis of the values of various counters stored in the holding ball execution area 203f according to the gaming state, as well as the special symbol display device 37 and the first symbol The dynamic pattern (variation pattern and stop type) of the dynamic display and variation effect performed by the three-symbol display device 81 are determined.

  In the change start process (S310), first, in order to determine the gaming state, it is determined whether or not the value of an ST counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is greater than "0" (S321). As a result of the determination, if the value of the ST counter is “0” (S321: No), the gaming state is “normal gaming state” or “time reduction state” and the special symbol jackpot probability is in a low probability state. Then, the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state is set (S322), and the process proceeds to S324. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the ST counter is larger than “0” (S323: Yes), the gaming state is “probability variation state” and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a high probability state. Therefore, the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state is set (S323), and the process proceeds to S324.

  In the process of S324, whether or not the jackpot is based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203f and the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 9A) set in S322 or S323. A jackpot lottery (win / no-go decision) process is performed (S324).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the big hit random number counter C1 and the gaming state (mode) at that time. As described above, when the gaming state (mode) that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal low probability state (“normal gaming state” or “time reduction state”) in the jackpot random number table 202a, “7,307” , 582 ”is defined as the jackpot random number value. Further, when the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in a high probability state (“probability variation state”), “28, 122, 298, 390, 486, 567, 656, 750, 866” is a big hit It is specified as a random value.

  In the processing of S324, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and if they match, the jackpot It is determined that As a result of the processing of S324, when it is determined that the game is a big hit (S324: Yes), the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the special figure 1 big hit corresponding to the first special symbol Based on the type table 202b1 (see FIG. 10 (a)) or the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 (see FIG. 10 (b)) corresponding to the second special symbol, the display mode for jackpot is set (S325). ).

  In this process, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the holding ball execution area 203f by the jackpot type table 202b, that is, the “probability variation state” after the jackpot of the maximum round number of 15 rounds. “Probability variation A” corresponding to “15R probability variation jackpot” that shifts to “Rate probability variation C” corresponding to “15R latent probability variation jackpot” that transitions to “probability variation state” after a maximum of 15 rounds Or “Time C” corresponding to “15R short-time jackpot” which shifts to “time reduction state” after jackpot of 15 rounds, or “Probability fluctuation state” after jackpot of 7 rounds The “latency probability variation A” or “latency probability variation B” corresponding to “7R latent probability variation jackpot” or the maximum Number de shifts to the "time reduction state" after jackpot 7 rounds corresponds to the "7R time reduction big hit", "time reduction A" or "time-shortening B" or, is determined. Based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (display mode of the second LED group 37b) at the time of jackpot in the special symbol display device 37 is set.

  Specifically, when the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is data shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type table 202b1 for special figure 1 (see FIG. 10A). Further, when the data stored in the holding ball execution area 203f is data shifted from the second holding ball execution area 203e, the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the holding ball execution area 203f, and the special The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type table 202b2 for FIG. 2 (see FIG. 10B).

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S326), and the process proceeds to S329. Specifically, based on the jackpot type (display mode) determined in S325 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, a rough effect mode is selected and selected. The dynamic time (variation time) of specific dynamic display (variation effect) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the rough effect modes. In determining the variation pattern at the time of jackpot, first, the stop pattern table 202d to be used is selected according to the jackpot type (display mode).

  Specifically, when “probability variation A” corresponding to “15R probability variation big hit” is set as the jackpot type in the processing of S325, the stop pattern table 202d provided for “probability variation A” (for example, probability In the variation A stop pattern table), an effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. When “latency probability variation C” corresponding to “15R latent probability variation jackpot” is set as the jackpot type, stop pattern table 202d provided for “latency probability variation C” (for example, for latent probability variation C) In the stop pattern table), an effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. In addition, when “hour / short C” corresponding to “15R hour / short big hit” is set as the jackpot type, the suspension pattern table 202d provided for “hour / short C” (for example, stop pattern table for hour / short C) holds An effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the ball execution area 203f is selected. When “latency probability variation A” or “latency probability variation B” corresponding to “7R latent probability variation jackpot” is set as the jackpot type, a stop pattern table provided for “latency probability variation A · B”. In 202d (for example, the latent probability variation A / B stop pattern table), the effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. In addition, when “time reduction A” or “time reduction B” corresponding to “7R time reduction big hit” is set as the jackpot type, stop pattern table 202d (for example, time reduction A · B) provided for “time reduction A · B” is set. In the stop pattern table for B), an effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected.

  Then, in the group of the variation pattern table 202e provided for each effect mode set in the process of S326, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. . Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern defined in advance and the variation time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S324 that it is not a big hit (S324: No), the display mode at the time of the loss is set (S327). In the process of S327, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the first reserved ball number counter Based on the value of 203a or (and) the second reserved ball number counter 203b and the current gaming state, as the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the “non-reach (shortened)” effect mode, “non-reach” (Normal) ”production mode,“ normal reach ”production mode,“ super reach ”production mode, and“ special reach ”production mode are set. In the first embodiment, the stop corresponding to each effect mode depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “probability variation state”, “time reduction state”, or “normal gaming state”. The stop pattern table 202d is set so that the value range of the pattern selection counter C3 is different.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of losing is determined (S328), and the process proceeds to S329. In the process of S328, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 determine a variation time until stop display with the lost symbol. Specifically, in the group of the variation pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (effect mode) at the time of the loss determined in the process of S327, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f The variation pattern associated with is selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern defined in advance and the variation time.

  In this way, the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the big hit and the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the loss are determined by the same determination program using the same random number values C3 and CS1. Thus, the program can be shared and the development man-hours during development can be reduced.

  In the process of S329, based on the change time corresponding to the change pattern determined by the processes of S326 and S328, the change for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the change time corresponding to the change pattern via the audio lamp control device 113. A pattern command is set (S329). Specifically, for example, a jackpot lottery is won, and the jackpot is “probability variation A” corresponding to “15R probability variation jackpot”, and further, a variation pattern of “25 seconds” “super reach” is selected. If it is, a variation pattern command indicating a jackpot, “probability variation A”, and “super reach” of “25 seconds” is set. In addition, if the variation pattern of “Super Reach” of “25 seconds” is selected after losing to the jackpot lottery, the variation pattern command indicating “Super Reach” of “25 seconds” is set. . As described above, even if the variation effect is the same variation time, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the effect of the variation effect and the contents of the rough variation pattern in the variation pattern command, so that the sound lamp control device 113 includes the effect state including the success / failure. It is possible to grasp the contents and the variation time, and to determine the variation pattern of the variation effect based on the information.

  Further, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S325 or S327 to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S330), and the special figure changing process (see FIG. 24). Return to). Specifically, for example, if the jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is “probability variation A” with “15R probability variable jackpot”, a specific third symbol stop mode (for example, “7” symbol, etc.) ) Is not specified, and a stop type command indicating “probability variation A” is set. If the jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is “latency probability variation A” which is “7R latent probability variation jackpot”, the specific stop pattern of the third symbol (for example, “3” symbol, etc.) is specified. Instead, a stop type command indicating “latency probability variation A” is set.

  On the other hand, if the win is not won and the “super reach” effect mode is selected, the specific stop mode (for example, “787” etc.) of the third design is not specified, and “ A stop type command indicating the “super reach” effect mode is set. Also, if the winning feature is not won and the “normal reach” effect mode is selected, the specific 3rd symbol stop mode (eg, “737”) is not specified and the “normal reach” at the time of losing is specified. “A stop type command indicating the production mode is set. In addition, if the jackpot is not won and the “non-reach” performance mode is selected, a specific stop mode (eg, “258”) of the third design is not specified, and “ A stop type command indicating the non-reach effect mode is set.

  In this way, by setting a rough stop type based on whether or not the change effect is correct in the stop type command, the sound lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) grasps the stop type based on the correctness and determines them. Based on the information, it is possible to determine the stop result of the fluctuating effect for details.

  These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are stored in the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) to be executed next. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command and the stop type command, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a display variation pattern command and a display type command based on the command and transmits them to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the jackpot process (S103) which is one process of the timer interruption process performed by MPU201 in the main controller 110 is demonstrated. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the jackpot processing (S103).

  As described above, this jackpot process (S103) sets the number of times the grand prize winning opening 65a is opened (the number of rounds) according to the type of jackpot when a special symbol jackpot occurs. Set the opening time. Further, based on the jackpot type, the probability variation area opening / closing table 202f (see FIG. 11) is set to set the right probability variation area 73 and the left probability variation area 74 that are opened or closed for each round, and valid for each round. Alternatively, the probability variation region validity table 202g (see FIG. 12) is set in order to set the right probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region 74 to be invalidated.

  In the jackpot process (S103), in the case of the jackpot state, a big prize opening / closing control process (see FIG. 27) for opening or closing the big prize opening 65a is executed. That is, the big prize opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 65a (in the first embodiment, “30 seconds”) has elapsed, or a ball is placed in the big prize opening 65a. Whether or not a prescribed number (10 in the first embodiment) has been won is determined. When any of these closing conditions is satisfied, the special winning opening 65a is closed. The control relating to the opening of the special winning opening 65a and the control relating to the closing are repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds.

  Further, in this special winning opening opening / closing process, a process for opening or closing the right probability variation area 73 and the left probability variation area 74 based on the set probability variation area opening / closing table 202f (see FIG. 11) is executed and set. Based on the probability variation area validity table 202g (see FIG. 12), the right probability variation area 73 or the left certain probability variation area 74 is set to be valid or invalid. That is, for each round in the big hit state, according to the set probability variation region opening / closing table 202f (see FIG. 11), the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a of the right probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region opening / closing of the left probability variation region 74 are opened. The plate 74a is driven and controlled. Further, for each round of the big hit state, the right probability variation valid flag 203g corresponding to the right probability variation region 73 and the left corresponding to the left probability variation region 74 according to the set probability variation region valid table 202g (see FIG. 12). The probability variation valid flag 203h is set to on or off.

  In the jackpot process (S103), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (S401). As a result of the determination, if it is not a big hit (S401: No), it is then determined whether or not the special symbol dynamic display (variation effect) has ended (S402).

  As a result of the determination in S402, if the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbol is not completed (S402: No), the jackpot process (S103) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). On the other hand, if the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the special symbol has been completed (S402: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot is won in the dynamic display (variation effect) (S403).

  As a result of the determination in S403, when it is determined that the jackpot is not won in the dynamic display (variation effect) (S403: No), the jackpot processing (S103) is terminated and the timer interruption processing (FIG. 22). Return to Reference). On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is won in the dynamic display (variation effect) (S403: Yes), in order to execute the control related to the won jackpot, first, the number of rounds of the won jackpot is 15R. No, that is, “probability variation A” corresponding to “15R probability variation jackpot”, “latency probability variation C” corresponding to “15R latency probability variation jackpot”, or “time shortening C” corresponding to “15R time variation jackpot” It is determined whether or not the winning is made (S404).

  As a result of the determination in S404, if the winning jackpot round number is 15R (S404: Yes), “15” is set in the round counter in order to perform the opening control of the big prize opening 65a 15 times in the main jackpot ( S405), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if the number of winning jackpot rounds is not 15R, that is, “latency probability variation A” or “latency probability variation B” corresponding to “7R latent probability variation jackpot”, or “time shortening corresponding to“ 7R short time jackpot ” If “A” or “Time B” is won (S404: No), “7” is set in the round counter to perform the opening control of the big prize opening 65a seven times in the main hit (S406), The process proceeds to S407. The MPU 201 confirms the value of the round counter. If the value is set in the round counter (that is, “1” or more), the MPU 201 sets the value of the round counter to 1 while controlling the opening of the big prize opening 65a. Subtract. And when the value of a round counter becomes "0", it is comprised so that the jackpot under execution may be complete | finished.

  In the process of S407, in order to transmit the opening command to the sound lamp control device 113, the opening command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S407). Next, the jackpot opening time (for example, “10 seconds”) is set (S408), and the process proceeds to S409. The opening command set in the process of S407 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S101 of FIG. 22) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  When receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 performs output of a sound indicating that the jackpot is started, lamp control, and the like, and transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. Then, based on the reception of the display opening command, the display control device 114 performs control to display an opening effect (for example, notification of the total number of rounds) on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S409, the probability variation area opening / closing table 202f (see FIG. 11) is set according to the type of jackpot (type of jackpot) (S409), and the process proceeds to S410. Specifically, if the jackpot type is “time-short A” and “latency probability variation A”, the open / close pattern of the right probability variation area 73 and the left probability variation area 74 is set to “X1”, and the jackpot type “time-short B” and “latency” If “probability variation B”, the opening / closing pattern of the right probability variation region 73 and left probability variation region 74 is set to “X2”, and if the jackpot type “probability variation A”, the opening / closing pattern of the right probability variation region 73 and left probability variation region 74 is set. If it is set to “Y1” and the jackpot type is “time / short C” and “latency probability variation C”, the open / close pattern of the right probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region 74 is set to “Y2”.

  In the process of S410, the probability variation area valid table 202g (see FIG. 12) is set according to the type of jackpot (type of jackpot) (S410), and the process proceeds to S411. Specifically, if the jackpot type is “time-short A”, “time-short C”, and “latency probability fluctuation B”, the effective pattern of the right probability variation area 73 and the left probability variation area 74 is set to “A”, If “B”, “latency probability variation A” and “latency probability variation C”, the effective pattern of the right probability variation region 73 and left probability variation region 74 is set to “B”, and if the jackpot type “probability variation A”, the right side The effective pattern of the probability variation area 73 and the left probability variation area 74 is set to “C”.

  In the process of S411, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type in the current jackpot is “probability variation A” (S411). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that it is “probability variation A” (S411: Yes), in order to notify the player that it is “probability variation state”, a probability variation notification command is set (S412). Then, the jackpot process (S103) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The probability change notification command set in the process of S412 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (see S101 of FIG. 22) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute a “probability change notification effect mode” in order to notify the player that it is in the “probability change state” when a probability change notification command is received.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S411 that the probability is not “probability variation A” (S411: No), the game state is not clearly notified, so the step S412 is skipped so as not to set the probability change notification command. Then, the jackpot process (S103) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  In the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 has not received the probability change notification command, when the jackpot being executed is completed, the “short-time notification effect mode” is executed without missing the effect after the jackpot. It is configured so that it is difficult (cannot) for the player to recognize whether the player is in the “probability variation state” or the “time reduction state”.

  In the process of S401, when it is determined that a big hit has already been made (S401: Yes), a special winning opening / closing control process (S413) for performing the opening / closing control of the special winning opening 65a is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 27, the winning prize opening / closing control process (S413) which is one process of the jackpot process (S103) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special prize opening / closing control process (S413). As described above, in the big prize opening / closing control process (S413), based on the number of times the big prize opening 65a is opened set in the big hit process (S103), the opening / closing control of the big prize opening 65a and the right probability changing area 73 are performed. In addition, the opening / closing control of the left side probability variation area 74 and the valid setting process or invalid setting process of the right side probability variation area 73 and the left side probability variation area 74 are executed.

  In this special winning opening / closing control process (S413), first, it is determined whether or not the opening time at the current big hit or the interval time between rounds (for example, “1 second”) has passed (S421). . As a result of the determination, if the opening time or interval time has not elapsed (S421: No), the condition for opening the special winning opening 65a has not yet been established, so the process of S422 is skipped and the process proceeds to S423. . On the other hand, if the opening time or interval time has elapsed (S421: Yes), the condition for opening the special winning opening 65a has been established, so the special winning opening 65a is opened (S422), and the process proceeds to S4223. To do.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 28, the opening setting process (S422) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the opening setting process (S422). As described above, in the opening setting process (S422), various setting processes for opening the special winning opening 65a are executed.

  In the opening setting process (S422), first, since it is the timing for opening the big winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65, the big winning port opening setting for opening the big winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is performed ( S431), the process proceeds to S432. By performing the special winning opening opening setting, the special winning opening solenoid 65c is driven to open the opening / closing plate 65b, and a ball can flow into the special winning opening 65a.

  Next, in the process of S432, in order to count the balls won to the opened big winning opening 65a, “10” is set to the prize counter (S432), and the process proceeds to S433. In the first embodiment, the value of the winning counter is configured to be decremented by 1 every time one ball enters the big winning opening 65a, and the MPU 201 opens a predetermined amount after the big winning opening 65a is opened. When time elapses or when the value of the winning counter becomes “0”, the special winning opening 65a is closed.

  Next, in the processing of S433, the maximum opening time (for example, “30 seconds”) of the special winning opening 65a is set (S433), and it is determined that the special winning opening 65a is open to the audio lamp control device 113. The release command shown is set (S434), and the process proceeds to S435. The release command set in the process of S434 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (see S101 of FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next, It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the release command, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound indicating that the round has started, performs lamp control, and the like, and transmits a display release command to the display control device 114. Based on the reception of the display release command, the third symbol display device 81 is controlled to display a round effect (for example, notification of the number of rounds).

  Next, in the process of S435, the right probability variation valid flag 203g or the left probability variation valid flag 203h in the round is set based on the probability variation area valid table 202g set according to the jackpot type in the jackpot processing (see FIG. 26). (S435), the opening setting process (S422) is terminated. After the completion of the opening setting process (S422), the process proceeds to S423 of the special prize opening / closing control process (see FIG. 27).

  In the processing of S435, specifically, regarding the right probability variation valid flag 203g, if the jackpot type is “time A,” “latency probability fluctuation B”, and “time C”, and if the jackpot two rounds start Since the probability variation area valid pattern is “A”, the right probability variation valid flag 203g is set to ON.

  In the processing of S435, if the jackpot type is “time-short B”, “latency probability variation A”, and “latency probability variation C”, and the jackpot three rounds start, the probability variation area effective pattern is “B Therefore, the right probability variation valid flag 203g is set to ON.

  Further, in the process of S435, if the jackpot type is “probability variation A” and the four-round hit of the jackpot is started, the probability variation area valid pattern is “C”, so the right probability variation valid flag 203g is turned on. Is set. Note that the right probability variation valid flag 203g is set to OFF in all rounds other than the above-described rounds for each jackpot type.

  Further, regarding the left probability variation valid flag 203h, if the jackpot type is “time-short A”, “latency probability variation B”, and “time-short C” and the five-round start of the jackpot, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is turned on. Set to Also, if the jackpot type is “short time B”, “latency probability variation A”, and “latency probability variation C”, and the six-round start of the jackpot, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to ON. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is “probability variation A” and the 9th round of jackpot is started, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to ON. Further, in all rounds other than the above-mentioned rounds for each jackpot type, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to OFF.

  Returning to FIG. 27, the description will be continued. In the process of S423, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 65a is open (S423). As a result of the determination, if the big prize opening 65a is not open (S423: No), the big prize opening 65a is not open, it is during the opening time, the interval time, or the ending time. , S424 is skipped, the winning prize opening / closing control process (S413) is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot process (see FIG. 26). On the other hand, if the special prize opening 65a is being opened (S423: Yes), a process during opening that executes various processes associated with the opening of the special prize opening 65a is performed (S424), and this special prize opening / closing control process (S413). Is ended, and the process returns to the jackpot processing (see FIG. 26).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 29, the process during opening (S424) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the releasing process (S424). As described above, in the opening process (S424), the ball winning detection process associated with the opening of the large winning opening 65a, the opening / closing control of the right probability changing area 73 and the left probability changing area 74, or the opened right probability changing area. 73 or control such as detection of the passage of a sphere to the left-side probability variation region 74 is executed.

  In the releasing process (S424), first, it is determined whether or not the right probability change area switch 73d is turned on (S441). If the right probability change area switch 73d is turned on as a result of the determination (S441: Yes), the ball has flowed into the right probability change area 73, and then it is determined whether or not the right probability change effective flag 203g is set to ON. (S442). If the right probability variation valid flag 203g is set to ON as a result of the determination (S442: Yes), it means that the sphere inflows into the right probability variation region 73 in a situation where the right probability variation region 73 is valid, In order to generate a “probability variation state” after the jackpot is over, the probability variation transition flag 203i is set to ON (S443), and the processing proceeds to S446. On the other hand, in the process of S442, if the right probability variation valid flag 203g is not set to ON (S442: No), the ball flows into the right probability variation region 73 in a situation where the right probability variation region 73 is not set valid. Therefore, the process of S443 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S446.

  If the right probability change area switch 73d is not turned on in S441 (S441: No), it is then determined whether or not the left probability change area switch 74d is turned on (S444). If the left probability variation area switch 74d is turned on as a result of the determination (S444: Yes), the ball has flowed into the left probability variation area 74, and then it is determined whether or not the left probability variation effective flag 203h is set to ON. (S445). As a result of the determination, if the left probability variation effective flag 203h is set to ON (S445: Yes), it means that the sphere inflows into the left probability variation region 74 in a situation where the left probability variation region 74 is effectively set. The process proceeds to S443, the probability variation transition flag 203i is set to ON (S443), and the process proceeds to S446.

  On the other hand, in the process of S445, if the left probability variation effective flag 203h is not set to ON (S442: No), the inflow of the sphere to the left probability variation region 74 in a situation where the left probability variation region 74 is not effectively set. Therefore, the process of S443 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S446. In the process of S444, when the left probability change area switch 74d is not turned on (S444: No), since none of the probability change area switches 73d and 74d has detected a sphere, the process proceeds to S446.

  In the process of S446, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when one open time of the special winning opening 65a set in the above-described opening time setting process (see S433 in FIG. 28) has passed (S446). In the process of S446, if it is the timing when the opening time of the big prize opening 65a has elapsed (S446: Yes), the closing condition of the big prize opening 65a is established, and it is the closing timing of the big prize opening 65a in the round, The value of the winning counter is cleared to “0” (S447), and the process proceeds to S455 in order to close the special winning opening 65a. The closing process of the special winning opening 65a from S445 will be described later. On the other hand, in the processing of S446, if it is not the timing when the opening time of the big prize opening 65a has elapsed (S446: No), then, whether or not the ball has won the big prize opening 65a and the big prize opening switch 71 is turned on. Is determined (S448).

  In the process of S448, if the big prize opening switch 71 is turned on (S448: Yes), since the ball has won the big prize opening 65a, the value of the prize counter is subtracted by 1 (S449), and then It is determined whether or not the ON detection of the current big winning opening switch 71 is the first count, that is, whether or not the value of the winning counter is “9” (S450).

  In the process of S450, if it is determined that the current on-detection of the big prize opening switch 71 is not the first count (S450: No), the process proceeds to S452, while the first count is determined to be the first count. (S450: Yes), the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are set to ON for “60 ms” (S451), and the sphere flows into the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a and the left probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a. Open for a moment to the extent that you do not.

  In this way, at the first count of each round, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are driven to such an extent that the sphere does not flow, and the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a and the left probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a can be opened. Since it becomes possible to confirm whether or not, it is possible to quickly grasp the situation in which the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are not opened due to an abnormality or the like.

  Next, in the processing of S452, it is determined whether or not the current ON detection of the big winning opening switch 71 is the third count, that is, whether or not the value of the winning counter is “7” (S452). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the current on-detection of the big winning opening switch 71 is the third count (S452: Yes), the probability change set according to the jackpot type in the jackpot processing (see FIG. 26). Based on the region opening / closing table 202f (see FIG. 11), the right probability changing region solenoid 73b or the left probability changing region solenoid 74b is set to ON for “2000 ms” (S453), and the right probability changing region opening / closing plate 73a or the left probability changing region opening / closing is opened. One of the plates 74a is opened so that the sphere can flow into the open probability changing regions 73 and 74. By configuring in this way, it is possible to pass the sphere to one of the predetermined probability variation regions 73 and 74 in each round. Note that after executing S451 and S453, this open process (S424) is terminated, and the process returns to the special winning opening / closing control process (see FIG. 27).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S452 that the current on-off detection of the big winning opening switch 71 is not the third count (S452: No), then the value of the winning counter after subtracting 1 is a value greater than “0”. Whether or not (S454). When the value of the winning counter is not greater than “0” (S454: No), that is, when the value of the winning counter is “0” or less, ten balls are won in the big winning opening 65a and the big winning mouth is reached. Since the closing condition 65a is established, the process proceeds to S455 in order to close the special winning opening 65a.

  In the process of S448, when the big prize opening switch 71 is not turned on (S448: No), or in the process of S454, it is determined that the value of the prize counter is greater than “0”. (S454: Yes), the closing condition of the special winning opening 65a is not satisfied, and in order to continue the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the processing of S449 to S453 is skipped, and this open process (S424) is performed. finish. After the completion of the opening process (S424), the process returns to the special prize opening / closing control process (see FIG. 27).

  In the closing process of the big prize opening 65a from S455, first, the closing of the big prize opening 65a is set (S455), and the big prize opening solenoid 65c is turned off to close the open / close plate 65b. Next, a closing command indicating that the special winning opening 65a is closed is set for the sound lamp control device 113 (S456), and the process proceeds to S457. Note that the close command set in the process of S456 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output process (see S101 in FIG. 22) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. Then, it is transmitted toward the audio lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the close command, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound indicating that one round is completed, performs lamp control, and transmits a close command for display to the display control device 114. And the display control apparatus 114 complete | finishes the round production (for example, alerting | reporting of a round number) currently performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 based on reception of the display close command, and when the big hit continues, interval time Control is performed so as to switch to and display the interval effect indicating that, and when the jackpot ends, control for ending the jackpot is performed.

  Next, in the process of S457, the right probability variation effective flag 203g and the left probability variation effective flag 203h, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b, and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are closed with the closing of the special winning opening 65a, that is, the end of one round. In order to initialize the setting situation, the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left probability variation valid flag 203h are set to OFF (S457), and the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are set to OFF (S458). The process proceeds to S459.

  Next, in the process of S459, since 1 round of the special winning opening 65a has been digested, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round counter (S459), and whether the value of the round counter after 1 subtraction is greater than “0” or not. Is determined (S460). If the value of the round counter is greater than “0” (S460: Yes), the number of rounds in the jackpot (the number of remaining open times of the big prize opening 65a) remains, so the next big prize opening An interval time (for example, “2 seconds”) until 65a is released is set (S461), this releasing process (S424) is terminated, and the big hit process (see FIG. 26) is returned.

  On the other hand, in the process of S460, when the value of the round counter is not greater than “0” (S460: No), that is, when the value of the round counter is “0” or less, Since all the releasing operations are completed, in order to end the jackpot state, the releasing process (S424) is ended, and the process of S414 of the jackpot process (see FIG. 26) is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 26, the description will be continued. After the processing of the big prize opening control process (S413), it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is larger than “0” (S414). In the above-described open process (see FIG. 29) of the special prize opening / closing control process, the value of the round counter is subtracted when the special prize opening 65a is closed (see S459 in FIG. 29). When the value of the round counter is larger than “0” (S510: Yes), in order to continuously execute the jackpot, the process of S415 is skipped, and the jackpot process (S103) is terminated. Return to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  On the other hand, if the value of the round counter is not greater than “0”, that is, if the value of the round counter is equal to or less than “0” (S414: No), the jackpot end condition is satisfied, so In order to finish, the jackpot end process is executed (S415), the jackpot process (S103) ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 30, the jackpot end process (S415) which is one process of the jackpot process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (S415). As described above, in this jackpot end process (S415), the ending time setting control such as setting of the ending time (for example, “5 seconds”) and the ball to the right probability variation area 73 or the left probability variation area 74 during the jackpot. The game state setting control after the jackpot based on the inflow of the game is executed.

  In the jackpot end process (S415), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation transition flag 203i is turned on (S471). If the probability change transition flag 203i is turned on as a result of the determination (S471: Yes), the ball passes to the right probability variation region 73 or the left probability variation region 74 that is set to be effective during this jackpot, and the “probability variation state”. Since the game condition at the end of the jackpot is set to “probability fluctuation state” until the dynamic display of special symbols (fluctuation effect) is executed 100 times, the ST counter value is set. “100” is set (S472), the probability variation transition flag 203i is set to OFF (S473), and the process proceeds to S474.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on in the process of S471 (s471: No), the ball has not passed through the right probability variation region 73 or the left probability variation region 74 that is set effectively during the jackpot. Since the transition condition to the “probability variation state” is not satisfied, the processing of S472 and S473 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S474.

  In the process of S474, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot type is “probability variation A”, “latent probability variation C”, or “short time C” (S474). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is “probability variation A”, “latent probability variation C”, or “time-short C” (S474: Yes), the gaming state after the jackpot is ended is determined. In order to add the “time reduction function” until the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbol is executed 100 times, “100” is set to the value of the time reduction counter (S475), and the process proceeds to S477.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S474, when it is determined that the current jackpot type is not “probability variation A”, “latent probability variation C”, or “short time C” (S474: Yes), that is, this big jackpot type is “short time” If it is determined that it is “A”, “short time B”, “latency probability variation A” or “latency probability variation B”, the game state after the jackpot ends is displayed with a special symbol dynamic display (variation effect) of 50. In order to add the “time reduction function” until the time is executed, “50” is set to the value of the time reduction counter (S476), and the process proceeds to S477.

  Next, in the process of S477, an ending command indicating the start of the jackpot ending effect is set for the audio lamp control device 113 (S477). Then, a jackpot end setting process for setting an ending time or the like is performed (S478), the jackpot end process (S415) is ended, and the process returns to the jackpot process (see FIG. 26). Note that the ending command set in the process of S477 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output process (see S101 in FIG. 22) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. Then, it is transmitted toward the audio lamp control device 113.

  When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound indicating that the jackpot ends or performs lamp control, and transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 Based on the reception of the display ending command, control is performed so as to display an ending effect (for example, an indication of a gaming state after the end of the jackpot) on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the jackpot process (see FIG. 26), the opening / closing control of the big prize opening 65a is performed, the opening / closing control of the right probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region 74, and the right probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region 74 are also performed. The valid setting process or the invalid setting process is executed, and when the sphere passes through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set to be valid, a “probability variation state” is generated after the jackpot is completed. With this configuration, even if a sphere passes through each probability variation region 73, 74, if the probability variation region 73, 74 is not set to be effective internally, a “probability variation state” occurs after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, even when the player visually recognizes the passage of the ball to each of the probability variation areas 73 and 74, the occurrence of the “probability variation state” can be prevented from being determined after the jackpot. Therefore, even when the “latency probability changing effect mode” is being executed, it is possible to create a game that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and improve the interest of the game be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, an NMI interrupt process executed in main controller 110 when a power failure or the like occurs will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.

  By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal, the MPU 201 interrupts the current control and starts the NMI interrupt process, and stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the power-off occurrence information setting (S801). ), The NMI interrupt process is terminated.

  The NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on.

  In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable, a wait process (in the first embodiment, “1 second”). ) Is executed (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S911. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S911 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S911.

  As will be described in S926 in FIG. 33, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S911, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S911). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state where ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S912, S913) in RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S912, S913) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S912, S913) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S912, S913), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to “0” (S912), and then an initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S913). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Then, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, an interrupt is permitted (S910). And it transfers to the main process (refer FIG. 33) mentioned later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main process. In the main process, a counter update process and a power-off process are executed roughly.

  In the main process, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S921). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S921: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 does not output the power failure signal SG1, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S922, S923).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S922). Specifically, when the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“899”, “99” in the first embodiment) , Clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the process of S107 (see FIG. 22) (S923), and the process proceeds to S921.

  Here, while the main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 22 is started and executed at predetermined time intervals (“4 milliseconds” in the first embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the game state. For example, during the jackpot, the execution of controlling the opening / closing of the special winning opening 65a is performed, and if there is a passage of a sphere to the normal symbol gate 67, the normal symbol display device 83 performs display control related to variable display of the normal symbol. Is called. Further, in the jackpot lottery executed when dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 is started, the number of jackpot random number values to be compared with the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state. Come. Therefore, the time taken to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the game state. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, and changes according to the game state at that time.

  The processing of S922 and S923, which is one processing of the main processing, is executed within the remaining time of this timer interrupt processing. That is, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated using the remaining time, so the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the initial value of the random number counter C4 per common figure) can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random. In particular, by updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at random, the big hit random number counter C1 and the random number counter C4 used as an initial value for updating are updated. Randomness can be given.

  In the process of S921, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S921: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 31 is executed, the process at the time of power-off after S924 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S924), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S925). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S926), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S927), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the process of S921 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S922 and S923 performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) ends. As a result, in the main process of the main controller 110, various settings by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) are completed, and the information on the occurrence of power interruption at the timing when the updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is completed. Have confirmed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S921 after the start-up process (see FIG. 32) is completed. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S921 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process.

  Therefore, in the process at power-off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area, or the stack pointer value is not saved in the initial setting process (S901) without saving the stack pointer value. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S921. As a result, the control burden on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  In the first embodiment, a process that is periodically executed is executed by a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and each counter is counted in the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) in the main process (see FIG. 33). Although the case of executing the update of CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 has been described, a part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) is predetermined in the main processing (see FIG. 33). You may comprise so that it may perform every time (for example, "4 milliseconds"). For example, the winning ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal reading process (S102), the jackpot process (S103), and the ordinary electric power control process (S104) executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment. And part or all of the switch reading process (S105), the start winning process (S108), the gate passing process (S109), the special figure changing process (S110), the ordinary figure changing process (S111), and the firing control process (S112). Instead of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), the main process (see FIG. 33) may be executed every “4 milliseconds”.

  In this case, a step for determining whether or not a predetermined time (“4 milliseconds”) has elapsed in the main process (see FIG. 33) is provided, and is executed every predetermined time only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed. The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, the updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is executed during the remaining time of the process executed every predetermined time, but the process executed every predetermined time is executed according to the state of the game. Since the time required for the above changes, each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 can be updated at random even in such a configuration.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 is broadly classified into a startup process (see FIG. 34) that is activated when the power is turned on and a main process (see FIG. 35) that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the current power-off process in S1115 is performed in this startup process due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”) (see FIG. 35). ) Is determined during execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110, it executes a power-off process in S1115. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1115 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S1115 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1115, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1002: Yes), the startup process of this time is after an instantaneous power failure, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1115, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S1004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to “0”.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1116 is executed (see S1115 in FIG. 35). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1116 is executed, the startup process this time is the moment when the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1116 has been completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1008 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1008 is performed via the processes of S1004 to S1006. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009 which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and the interrupt permission is set. Then (S1011), the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process of S1009 is that when the process from S1004 to S1006 is reached via the process of S1006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1004. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main process.

  When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not “1 millisecond” or more has elapsed since the previous process of S1101 was executed (S1101). If “1 millisecond” or more has not passed ( S1101: No), the process proceeds to S1110 without performing the processes in S1102 to S1109. Whether or not “1 millisecond” has elapsed in the processing of S1101 is determined because S1102 to S1109 do not need to be processed in a short cycle (within “1 millisecond”), whereas S1110 This is because the fluctuation effect process and the command determination process of S1111 are preferably performed in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1110 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  In the processing of S1101, when it is determined that “1 millisecond” or more has elapsed since the previous processing of S1101 was executed (S1101: Yes), the processing proceeds to S1102. If the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 34, the process proceeds to S1102 as it is.

  In the process of S1102, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1103 to S1112 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1107 described later (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). . In the power-on notification process, when power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, “30 seconds”), and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device. 227. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  Next, in the process of S1105, a jackpot effect process for executing an effect related to the jackpot set by the command determination process of S1111 described later is performed (S1105), and the process proceeds to S1106.

  Next, in the processing of S1106, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1106). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, in the effective period of the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect, the input as to whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed is monitored, This is a process for setting to perform an effect corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1106) is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S1107), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1108). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1108, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1110. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the change effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the change pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process in S1107 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing / output process in S1108 is also synchronized with the time required for the changing effect performed in the third symbol display device 81. Executed in time.

  In the process of S1110, the variable effect process is a process for starting the variable effect based on the variable pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81. Execute. Then, after the change effect process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1111), and the process proceeds to S1112. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In S1112, counter update processing for updating various counters provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (S1112). For example, updating of a counter that determines a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect is performed in the counter update process. The counter is updated by incrementing one by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, “0 to 99”) and returning to “0” after reaching the maximum value (“99”).

  When the processing of S1112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1113 (S1113: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1115), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1116). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1117), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1114: No), the process returns to S1101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing.

  Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1111). This command determination processing (S1111) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and received from the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 as described above. Determine the command that was executed

  In the command determination process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not a command from the main control device 110 is received in the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 (S1201). As a result of the determination, if no command is received from the main controller 110 (S1201: No), this command determination process (S1111) is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35).

  On the other hand, if a command is received from the main control device 110 in the processing of S1201 (S1201: Yes), the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and the main control device is read out. It is determined whether a probability change notification command is received from 110 (S1202). If it is determined that the probability change notification command has been received (S1202: Yes), the “probability change notification effect mode” is set in order to notify the player of the “probability change state” (S1203).

  Here, the “probability change notification effect mode” refers to a notification mode in which a “probability variation state” occurs after the jackpot (for example, a character display of “SUPER LUCKY!”, Etc.) in the third symbol display device. 81, if the variation effect is in progress, the fact that the “probability variation state” has occurred is displayed in character display on the third symbol display device 81, or the background color of the third symbol display device 81 is set to normal. Is changed to a different background color (for example, from blue to red) to make the player recognize that it is in a “probability variation state”. Thereafter, the command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35).

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 does not receive the probability change notification command at the end of the jackpot, a “time reduction notification effect” indicating a “time reduction state” as an effect after the jackpot ends. The embodiment is configured to execute all aspects. That is, even if the jackpot is the jackpot type “latency probability variation A”, “latency probability variation B” or “latency probability variation C”, the player is not notified that the “probability variation state”, and the jackpot An effect equivalent to the type “Time-short A”, “Time-short B” or “Time-short C” is executed.

  On the other hand, if the probability change notification command has not been received from the main controller 110 in the process of S1202 (S1202: No), the process according to the other command is executed (S1204), and the command determination process (S1111) is terminated. Then, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35).

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, two probability variation regions (the right probability variation region 73 and the left certain probability variation region 74) are provided in the large winning opening 65a, and the jackpot is determined according to the jackpot type. The player controls to open either one of the opening / closing plates 73a, 74a provided for each probability variation region 73, 74 for each round of the player, and sets whether each probability variation region 73, 74 is valid or invalid. Control to switch (internally) when it cannot be recognized. When the ball passes through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set effectively during the jackpot, a “probability variation state” is generated after the jackpot is over. On the other hand, even if the sphere passes through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 set to be invalid, the “probability variation state” is not generated after the big hit.

  With this configuration, even if a sphere passes through each probability variation region 73, 74, if the probability variation region 73, 74 is not set to be effective internally, a “probability variation state” occurs after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, even when the player visually recognizes the passage of the ball to each of the probability variation areas 73 and 74, the occurrence of the “probability variation state” can be prevented from being determined after the jackpot. Further, the “latency probability changing effect mode” and the “short time notification effect mode” or the “normal notification mode” are configured to be equivalent effects. With this configuration, even when the “latency probability variation effect mode” is being executed, it is determined whether the game is in the “probability variation state”, the “time reduction state”, or the “normal game state”. It is possible to make the player difficult to recognize and to create game characteristics that allow the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, when a jackpot type that generates a “probability variation state” after winning the jackpot is won, the ball can pass through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set effectively in a plurality of rounds of the jackpot. Has been. Therefore, even if one of the rounds in which the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are set to be effective is not allowed to pass the ball to the probability change areas 73 and 74 that are set to be effective, the other It is possible to pass the sphere through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are effectively set in the round. Therefore, it is difficult to pass the ball to the probability variation areas 73 and 74 in one of the effective rounds due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a launch abnormality or a poor physical condition of the player). Even in the event that a player has a problem, the possibility of passing the ball to the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set to be effective in the other round that is set to be effective can be reduced due to unforeseen circumstances. A comfortable game can be realized without incurring profits.

  Further, the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are different in a plurality of rounds of jackpots are set to be effective. By configuring in this way, even if one of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are effectively set in one round is in a state where the passage of the sphere cannot be normally detected due to an abnormality such as a failure, A “probability variation state” can be generated by a sphere that has passed through the other probability variation regions 74 and 73 that are effectively set in the round. Therefore, even if a sudden trouble (for example, a failure or the like) causes a problem in passing the ball to the probability variation areas 73 and 74 in any one of the effective rounds, the effective setting is made. By providing the possibility of passing the ball to the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are effectively set in the other round, the player can enjoy a comfortable game without suffering a disadvantage due to an unexpected situation. be able to.

  Further, whether or not the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a and the left probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a can be opened by driving the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b to such an extent that the sphere does not flow in the first count of each round. Therefore, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the respective probability variation areas 73 and 74 are not opened due to an abnormality or the like.

  Further, when a jackpot type that generates a “probability variation state” is won after the jackpot is ended, the rounds to which the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are effectively set are related to a plurality of rounds in which the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are effectively set. The right probability variation area 73 located upstream in the special winning opening 65a is set to be valid. With this configuration, if an abnormality such as ball clogging occurs in the special winning opening 65a, in particular, the ball clogging or the like is downstream of the right probability variation region 73 and upstream of the left probability variation region 74. Even if an abnormality occurs, the right probability variation area 73 located upstream of the big winning opening 65a is set to be effective first, and the sphere can be allowed to flow into the right probability variation area 73. It is possible to make it easy to grant the right to the player.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the right probability variation area 73 and the left certain probability variation area 74 are provided in the large winning opening 65a of one variable prize winning device 65, and the balls to the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set effectively are provided. Based on the passage, a “probability variation state” is given after the jackpot is over.

  However, since the jackpot game is digested by opening or closing the big prize opening 65a of one variable prize winning device 65, it is necessary to provide an interval time for closing the big prize opening 65a, and it takes time to digest the big prize game. The game is delayed, and there is a risk that the game will be awakened. In particular, in a situation where a jackpot is continuously won within a predetermined period (so-called “rensou”), the player desires a quick game, and in such a situation, the interval time of the jackpot game If time is required, it becomes easier for the player to awaken to the game.

  Further, the provision of the “probability variation state” is determined by a combination of two elements, that is, opening or closing the probability changing areas 73 and 74 in one variable winning device 65 and valid or invalid of the probability changing areas 73 and 74. Therefore, even when the “latent probability variation effect mode” is executed, the player recognizes (guesses) the opening / closing pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 and the effective pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74. , There is a possibility that a “probability variation state” may be foreseen.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, in addition to the variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 76 is provided, and predetermined jackpot games ("probability fluctuation A", "short time C", and "latency probability") are provided. The variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are alternately opened in each round of “variation C”), and one of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 is opened without interruption during a predetermined jackpot game. To do. By configuring in this way, the interval time during a predetermined jackpot game can be eliminated, the jackpot game can be quickly digested, and the game will not be delayed, and the player will be awakened Can be prevented.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the inside of the variable winning device 65 and the inside of the second variable winning device 76 are communicated by the communication passage 77, and the right probability variation region 73 and the left certain probability variation are connected to the communication destination channel. Region 74 is disposed. With this configuration, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 (hereinafter, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are collectively referred to as “variable winning devices 65 and 76”). Since there is no need to provide a plurality of probability variation regions 73 and 74 for each, there can be reduced the number of parts in the pachinko machine 10 and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, in addition to the two elements of opening or closing the probability changing areas 73 and 74 and enabling or disabling the probability changing areas 73 and 74, the variable winning devices 65 and 76 are opened or closed. Since the provision of the “probability variation state” is determined by the combination of the three elements in total, it is difficult to predict that the “probability variation state” will be imparted. Therefore, even when the “latency probability changing effect mode” is being executed, it is possible to create a game that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and improve the interest of the game be able to.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the variable winning device relating to the jackpot type (that is, the jackpot type “probability variation A”, “time reduction C”, and “latency probability variation C”) that can be won during the so-called consecutive resort. 65 and the second variable winning device 76 can be opened alternately without interruption, so that a quick game desired by a player in a so-called consecutive resort can be realized, and the game is prevented from being awakened, Can improve the interests.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 of the second embodiment in a front view.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the second variable winning device 76 is provided above the variable winning device 65, and has a horizontally-long rectangular second opening / closing plate 76b covering the second large winning opening 76a, and the second opening / closing plate. A second big prize opening solenoid 76c (see FIG. 38) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of 76b as an axis, a second big prize opening switch 71a for detecting a ball won in the second big prize opening 76a, A communication passage 77 through which a ball detected by the second big prize opening switch 71a flows down is provided.

  The second big prize opening switch 71a is embedded in the passage in the vicinity of the second big prize opening 76a, and when the second big prize opening switch 71a detects a ball, 15 prize balls are paid out. Further, after the second opening / closing plate 76b is opened, when 10 balls are detected by the second big prize opening switch 71a, the second opening / closing plate 76b is closed so that one round is completed. It is configured.

  The communication passage 77 is a passage through which the ball that has flowed into the second large winning opening 76a flows down, and is communicated with the guide passage 72 of the variable winning device 65 through the junction portion 77a. Further, a right side probability variation region 73 and a left side probability variation region 74 are provided on the downstream side of the junction 77a between the guide passage 72 of the variable prize device 65 and the communication passage 77 of the second variable prize device 76, and the right side A discharge passage 75 is provided downstream of the probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region 74. Accordingly, the sphere that flows into the second grand prize winning port 76a and flows down the communication passage 77 passes through the right probability variation area 73 or the left certain probability variation area 74 in the same manner as the sphere that flows into the large prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65. Or the discharge passage 75.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, after the ball that has flowed into the second big prize opening 76a is detected by the second big prize opening switch 71a, the ball passes through the communication passage 77 until reaching the upper side of the right probability variation area 73. “1.7 seconds” is required, and the ball flowing into the second big prize opening 76 a is detected by the second big prize opening switch 71 a, and then passes through the communication passage 77 to the left probability variation area 74. It is configured so that it takes about “1.8” seconds to reach the upper side. Accordingly, the sphere detected by the second big prize opening switch 71a is configured to be able to flow into the right probability variation region 73 or the left probability variation region 74 within "2 seconds".

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the inside of the variable winning device 65 and the inside of the second variable winning device 76 are communicated by the communication passage 77, and the right-side probability changing region 73 and the flow path of the communication destination are connected. A left side probability variation region 74 is disposed. With this configuration, there is no need to provide a plurality of probability variation areas 73 and 74 for each of the variable winning devices 65 and 76, so that the number of parts in the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 38 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment.

  In the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 according to the second embodiment, a big prize opening opening / closing table 202h is stored.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 39, the special winning opening opening / closing table 202h will be described. FIG. 39 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the special winning opening / closing table 202h. The big prize opening / closing table 202h shown in FIG. 39 shows the variable prize winning device 65 or the second variable prize winning device 76 that is opened for each round for each jackpot type in each special symbol. When the device 65 is opened, it is expressed as “lower”, and when the second variable winning device 76 is opened, it is expressed as “up”. In the second embodiment, when one variable winning device 65, 76 (for example, variable winning device 65) is opened, the other variable winning device 65, 76 (for example, the second variable winning device 76) is opened. Is configured to be closed.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the open / close pattern “only on top” of each variable winning device 65, 76 corresponding to the jackpot type “time A” and “latency probability variation A” of the first special symbol is all rounds (ie, In the first round to the seventh round), only the second variable winning device 76 is opened, and the variable winning device 65 is kept closed during the jackpot game.

  Therefore, in the jackpot type “short time A” and “latency probability variation A”, the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 76a of the second variable winning device 76 is repeated during the big hit game, and the interval time during the closing is Is configured to occur.

  In addition, since the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 is the same for the jackpot types “short time A” and “latency probability variation A”, the jackpot type cannot be determined only by the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning devices 65 and 76. By doing so, it is difficult to recognize (impossible) which jackpot type is won by the player, creating gameability that makes the player guess which game state the player is playing, The fun of gaming can be improved.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 39, the opening / closing pattern “only under” of each variable winning device 65, 76 corresponding to the jackpot type “time B” and “latency probability variation B” of the first special symbol is all round ( That is, only the variable winning device 65 is opened in the first to seventh rounds, and the second variable winning device 76 is kept closed during the jackpot game.

  Accordingly, in the jackpot types “short time B” and “latency probability variation B”, the opening and closing of the jackpot 65a of the variable winning device 65 is repeated during the jackpot game, and an interval time during the closing occurs. It is configured.

  The jackpot types “short time B” and “latency probability variation B” have the same opening / closing pattern of the variable winning devices 65, 76, so that the jackpot type cannot be determined only by the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning devices 65, 76. By doing so, it is difficult to recognize (impossible) which jackpot type is won by the player, creating gameability that makes the player guess which game state the player is playing, The fun of gaming can be improved.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 39, the open / close pattern “alternating top and bottom” of each of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 corresponding to the “probability variation A” which is the jackpot type of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is an odd round ( That is, only the second variable winning device 76 is opened in 1 round, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds, 9 rounds, 11 rounds, 13 rounds and 15 rounds), and the variable winning device 65 is closed during the odd rounds. It is comprised so that.

  In addition, the open / close pattern “alternate top and bottom” is open only in the variable winning device 65 in even-numbered rounds (that is, 2 rounds, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds, 12 rounds and 14 rounds). Is configured such that the second variable winning device 76 is closed.

  Accordingly, in the jackpot type “probability variation A”, one of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 is configured to be opened without interruption. By configuring in this way, the interval time during the jackpot game can be eliminated, the jackpot game can be quickly digested, and the game will not be delayed, preventing the player from awakening can do. In particular, the jackpot type “probability variation A” notifies the player that a “probability variation state” will be given after the jackpot game, and the player quickly sets the “probability variation state” for the next jackpot. I expect it to come. In such a state, the game as expected by the player can be realized by quickly digesting the jackpot game.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 39, the open / close pattern “alternate lower and upper” of each of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 corresponding to “short time C” and “latency probability variation C” which are jackpot types of the second special symbol is an odd number. Only the variable winning device 65 is opened in rounds (that is, 1 round, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds, 9 rounds, 11 rounds, 13 rounds and 15 rounds), and during the odd rounds, the second variable winning device 76 is opened. It is configured to be closed.

  The open / close pattern “alternating lower and upper” is such that only the second variable winning device 76 is opened in the even-numbered rounds (that is, 2 rounds, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds, 12 rounds, and 14 rounds). The variable winning device 65 is configured to be closed during the even-numbered round.

  Accordingly, in the jackpot type “time-short C” and “latency probability variation C”, similarly to the jackpot type “probability variation A”, one of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 is configured to be opened without interruption. By configuring in this way, the interval time during the jackpot game can be eliminated, the jackpot game can be quickly digested, and the game will not be delayed, preventing the player from awakening can do.

  The jackpot types “short time C” and “latency probability variation C” have the same opening / closing pattern of the variable winning devices 65, 76, so that the jackpot type cannot be determined only by the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning devices 65, 76. By doing so, it is difficult to recognize (impossible) which jackpot type is won by the player, creating gameability that makes the player guess which game state the player is playing, The fun of gaming can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 38, the description will be continued. The input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 according to the second embodiment is provided in the second variable winning device 76 and is opened / closed forward with the lower side of the second opening / closing plate 76b of the second large winning opening 76a as an axis. Is connected to the second big prize winning solenoid 76c, and the MPU 201 transmits a control signal via the input / output port 205.

  In addition, the input / output port 205 of the second embodiment is connected to a second big prize opening switch 71a provided in the second big prize opening 76a for detecting a ball won in the second big prize opening 76a. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signal output from the second big prize opening switch 71a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the detection mode of the sphere in each round of the jackpot type “latency probability variation C” of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 40 shows the big prize opening solenoid 65c, the second big prize opening solenoid 76c, the right probability variation area solenoid 73b, and the left probability variation area solenoid in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type “latency probability variation C” of the second embodiment. 74b, the winning timing switch 71a, the second winning winning port switch 71a, the right probability changing area switch 73d and the left probability changing area switch 74d, the right probability changing effective flag 203g, the left probability changing effective flag 203h, It is the timing chart which showed typically each time with the setting timing of probability change flag 203i.

  As described above, in the jackpot type “latency probability variation C”, a total of 15 rounds of jackpot game are executed, and at the start of odd-numbered rounds, the big prize opening solenoid 65c is turned on and the open / close plate 65b is opened, and even-numbered rounds start. Sometimes the second big prize opening solenoid 76c is turned on and the second opening / closing plate 76b is opened. Then, in a predetermined condition (in the second embodiment, a maximum of “30 seconds” has elapsed since the opening of each of the opening / closing plates 65b and 76b (see Max t1 in FIG. 40. Max t1 <“30000 ms”)), or the big prize opening switch 71 Alternatively, when the second big prize opening switch 71a detects any one of 10 balls, the opened big prize opening solenoid 65c or the second big prize opening solenoid 76c is turned off. The opening / closing plate 65b or the second opening / closing plate 76b is closed, and one round is completed.

  Then, when the jackpot continues when one round ends, the other variable winning devices 76, 65 other than the one variable winning device 65, 76 released in the previous round are released first. After closing the variable prize-winning devices 65 and 76, they are configured to be opened immediately. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce (eliminate) the interval time for the big hit.

  Also, in the jackpot type “latency probability variation C”, the open / close pattern of the right probability variation area 73 and the left probability variation area 74 is “Y2” as in the jackpot classification “time reduction C”. Therefore, in the first round, when the first winning ball switch 71 detects the first count ball, both the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t2 in FIG. 40). t2 = “60 ms”.), the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are configured to be able to recognize whether or not they can be normally driven.

  Then, when the ball of the third count is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the right probability variation region solenoid 73b is turned on for 2000 ms (see t3 in FIG. 40. t3 = “2000 ms”). In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the time required to reach the right probability variation area 73 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (in the second embodiment, “1. 5 seconds ". See t4 in FIG. 40. t4 <" 2000ms "). Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the right probability variation region 73 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latency probability variation C” is “B”, and the right probability variation area 73 in the third round and the left probability variation area 74 in the sixth round are valid. Is set. Therefore, in the first round, the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are both invalid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left probability variation valid flag 203h are set off. Accordingly, even when the sphere passes to the right probability variation region 73 and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d in the first round, since the right probability variation region 73 is not set to be effective, the probability variation transition flag is set. 203i remains off without being turned on.

  It should be noted that in the odd-numbered rounds (ie, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds, 9 rounds, 11 rounds, 13 rounds and 15 rounds) of the jackpot type “latency probability variation C”, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b The driving mode is equivalent to that in the first round (not shown).

  Next, in the second round of the jackpot type “latency probability variation C”, when the first count ball is detected by the second big prize opening switch 71a, as in the first round, the right probability variation area solenoid 73b and the left probability variation are changed. Both the region solenoids 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t5 in FIG. 40. t5 = “60 ms”), and it is possible to recognize whether the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b can be normally driven. Has been.

  Then, when the ball of the third count is detected by the second big prize opening switch 71a, only the left probability changing region solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000ms" (see t6 in FIG. 40. t6 = "2000ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the time required to reach the left probability variation region 74 after the ball is detected by the second big prize opening switch 71a is within “2 seconds” (that is, “1.8 seconds). “See t7 in FIG. 40. t7 <“ 2000 ms ”.). Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the left probability variation region 74 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latency probability variation C” is “B”, and the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are invalid in the second round, and the right probability variation validity flag 203g and The left likelihood variation valid flag 203h is set to off. Therefore, even in the second round, even if the sphere passes to the left probability variation region 74 and the sphere is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d, the probability variation transition flag is not set because the left probability variation region 74 is not set to be valid. 203i remains off without being turned on.

  It should be noted that in the even rounds (ie, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds, 12 rounds, and 14 rounds) of the jackpot type “latency probability variation C”, the drive mode of the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b Is equivalent to the second round (not shown).

  Next, in the third round of the jackpot type “latency probability variation C”, when the first-count ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71, the right probability change region solenoid 73b and Both the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t8 in FIG. 40. t8 = “60 ms”), and it is possible to recognize whether the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. It is configured.

  Then, in the third round, when the ball of the third count is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the right probability variation region solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000ms" (see t9 in FIG. 40. t9 = "2000ms"). .) In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the time required to reach the right probability variation area 73 after the ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (that is, “1.5 seconds”). See t10 in Fig. 40. t10 <"2000ms"). Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the right probability variation region 73 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latency probability variation C” is “B”. In the third round, only the right probability variation area 73 is valid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g is turned on. In addition to being set, the left likelihood change valid flag 203h is set to OFF. Therefore, in the third round, when the sphere passes to the right probability variation region 73 and the sphere is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d, the right probability variation region 73 is set to be valid, and the probability variation transition flag 203i is turned on. Set to

  Although not shown, in the sixth round of the jackpot type “latency probability variation C”, only the left probability variation region 74 is valid, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set on, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g is Set to off. Therefore, even when the probability change transition flag 203i is not turned on in the third round, the sphere can flow into the left probability change region 74 located downstream of the right probability change region 73 in the sixth round, and the left probability change When the sphere passes through the region 74 and the sphere is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d, the probability variation transition flag 203i is set to ON.

  Therefore, in the big hit type “latency probability variation C”, when the sphere passes through the probability change areas 73 and 74 and is detected by the probability change area switches 73d and 74d, the sphere is detected in the third round and the sixth round. Since the probability variation areas 73 and 74 corresponding to the certain probability variation area switches 73d and 74d are set to be valid, the probability variation transition flag 203i is set to ON. At the end of the jackpot, the “probability variation state” is set with reference to the probability variation transition flag 203i.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are alternately arranged in each round of a predetermined jackpot game (“probability variation A”, “time-short C”, and “latency probability variation C”). And one of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 is opened without interruption during a predetermined jackpot game. By configuring in this way, the interval time during a predetermined jackpot game can be eliminated, the jackpot game can be quickly digested, and the game will not be delayed, and the player will be awakened Can be prevented.

  In particular, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are interrupted with respect to the jackpot type that can be won during the so-called consecutive resort (that is, the jackpot type “probability variation A”, “time reduction C”, and “latency probability variation C”). It is possible to realize the quick game desired by the players in the so-called consecutive resorts, prevent the game from being awakened, and improve the interest of the game.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the variable winning devices 65 and 76 are opened or closed in addition to the two elements of opening or closing the probability changing areas 73 and 74 and valid or invalid of the probability changing areas 73 and 74. Since the provision of the “probability variation state” is determined by the combination of the three elements in total, it is difficult to predict that the “probability variation state” will be imparted. Therefore, even when the “latency probability changing effect mode” is being executed, it is possible to create a game that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and improve the interest of the game be able to.

  Furthermore, by shortening the interval time of the variable winning devices 65 and 76, the opening pattern and the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are made different between the “short time C” and the “latency probability variation C”, thereby allowing the player to A “probability fluctuation state” is given by shortening the examination time of which variable winning devices 65 and 76 are open and which probability variation regions 73 and 74 are effective. It can be hard to foresee. Therefore, even when the “latency probability changing effect mode” is being executed, it is possible to create a game that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and improve the interest of the game be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the jackpot process (S103) of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a jackpot process (S103) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the second embodiment. In the jackpot processing (S103) of the second embodiment, the probability variation area opening / closing table 202f (see FIG. 11) and the probability variation area valid table 202g (see FIG. 12) are set at the start of the jackpot according to the jackpot type. In addition, a special winning opening opening / closing table 202h (see FIG. 39) is set.

  In the jackpot process (S103) of the second embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot is won (S403: Yes), the processes of S404 to S410 are executed in the same manner as the jackpot process (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment. Round counter setting (S404 to S406), opening command setting (S407), opening time setting (S408), probability variation area opening / closing table 202f (see FIG. 11) setting (S409), and probability variation area valid table 202g (see FIG. 12) is set (S410).

  Next, the big winning opening opening / closing table 202h (see FIG. 39) is set according to the type of jackpot (type of jackpot) (S501), and the process proceeds to S411. Specifically, as described above, if the jackpot type is “short time A” and “latency probability variation A”, the open / close pattern of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 is set to “top only”, and the jackpot type “short time B”. If “latency probability variation B”, the open / close pattern of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 is set to “only”, and if the jackpot type “probability variation A”, the open / close pattern of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 is “up / down”. If the jackpot type is “short time C” and “latency probability variation C”, the open / close pattern of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 is set to “lower and upper alternate”.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, in addition to the variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 76 is provided, and a predetermined jackpot game ("probability variation A", "short time C") is provided. In addition, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are alternately opened in each round of the “latency probability variation C”), and one of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 is released without interruption during a predetermined jackpot game. To be configured. By configuring in this way, it is possible to eliminate an interval time during a predetermined jackpot game. Therefore, the jackpot game can be quickly digested and the game is not delayed, so that the player can be prevented from awakening.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the inside of the variable winning device 65 and the inside of the second variable winning device 76 are communicated by the communication passage 77, and the right probability variation region 73 and the left certain probability variation are connected to the communication destination channel. Region 74 is disposed. With this configuration, there is no need to provide a plurality of probability variation areas 73 and 74 for each of the variable winning devices 65 and 76, so that the number of parts in the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. .

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, in addition to the two elements of opening or closing the probability changing areas 73 and 74 and enabling or disabling the probability changing areas 73 and 74, the variable winning devices 65 and 76 are opened or closed. Since the provision of the “probability variation state” is determined by the combination of the three elements in total, it is difficult to predict that the “probability variation state” will be imparted. Therefore, even when the “latency probability changing effect mode” is being executed, it is possible to create a game that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and improve the interest of the game be able to.

  In addition, since the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 is the same for a plurality of jackpot types (for example, “short time C” and “latency probability variation C”), only the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 is a big hit. Configure so that the type cannot be determined. By constructing in this way, it is difficult to recognize (impossible) which jackpot type is won by the player, and the gameability that makes the player infer in which gaming state the game is played Create and improve the fun of the game.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the variable winning device regarding the jackpot type (that is, the jackpot type “probability variation A”, “time-short C”, and “latency probability variation C”) that can be won during the so-called consecutive resort. 65 and the second variable winning device 76 can be opened alternately without interruption, so that a quick game desired by a player in a so-called consecutive resort can be realized, and the game is prevented from being awakened, Can improve the interests.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in 2nd Embodiment has the same effect by the structure same as 1st Embodiment.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 47. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, a plurality of variable winning devices 65 and 76 are provided, and the probability changing regions 73 and 74 are shared by the variable winning devices 65 and 76, and the opening / closing pattern of the probability changing regions 73 and 74 and By switching the effective pattern in each round of jackpot game, it is controlled whether or not to generate a “probability variation state” after the jackpot ends.

  Here, the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are provided inside the large prize winning opening 65a (second grand prize winning opening 76a), and the right probability variation area opening / closing plate 73a and the left probability variation area opening / closing plate 74a (for each probability variation area 73, 74). Hereinafter, the right probability changing region opening / closing plate 73a and the left probability changing region opening / closing plate 74a are collectively referred to as “probability changing region opening / closing plates 73a, 74a”), and the probability changing region opening / closing plates 73a, 74a are driven to open and close. Right probability variation region solenoid 73b and left probability variation region solenoid 74b (hereinafter, right probability variation region solenoid 73b and left probability variation region solenoid 74b may be collectively referred to as “probability variation region solenoids 73b, 74b”), and right probability variation region solenoid. The switch 73d and the left probability variation region switch 74d (hereinafter, the right probability variation region switch 73d and the left probability variation region switch 74d are collectively referred to as “probability variation region switch”). 3d, 74d "may be provided), the parts 73a, 73b, 73d, 74a, 74b, and 74d must be installed in a small space, and the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device are provided. The design of the device 76 can be complicated.

  In addition, the opening / closing plate 65b, the large winning opening solenoid 65c and the large winning opening switch 71 in the variable winning device 65, and the second opening / closing plate 76b, the second large winning opening solenoid 76c, and the second large winning opening in the second variable winning device 76 are provided. Since the parts 73a, 73b, 73d, 74a, 74b, and 74d are provided in addition to the switch 71a, the number of parts used in the pachinko machine 10 may increase and the manufacturing cost may increase.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the two variable winning devices 65 and 76 are provided, and the second variable winning device 76 is provided to the guide passage 72 of the variable winning device 65. The communication passage 77 is communicated via the merging portion 77 a, and the position of the merging portion 77 a is on the downstream side of the right side probability variation region 73 and on the upstream side of the left side probability variation region 74. And it is comprised so that a ball | bowl can always flow in into each probability variation area | region 73,74, without providing probability variation area | region opening-and-closing plate 73a, 74a in probability variation area | region 73,74. With this configuration, the ball that has won the variable winning device 65 flows into the right probability variation area 73, and the ball that has won the second variable winning device 76 flows into the left probability variation area 74.

  In the case of the jackpot type that gives the “probability variation state” (that is, “latent probability variation A to C” and “probability variation A”), the variable corresponding to the probability variation regions 73 and 74 that are set effectively. In the case of a jackpot type (ie, “short-time A to C”) in which a ball is awarded to the winning devices 65 and 76 and “probability variation state” is given but “probability variation state” is not given, it is set to be effective. Instead of the certain probability variation areas 73 and 74, the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set to invalid are awarded, and the “probability variation state” is not given.

  With this configuration, even if a sphere passes through each probability variation region 73, 74, if the probability variation region 73, 74 is not set to be effective internally, a “probability variation state” occurs after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, even if the player visually recognizes the passage of the ball to each probability variation region 73, 74, the probability variation region opening and closing plate 73a, Since it is not necessary to provide 74a and probability variation area solenoids 73b and 74b, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are simply configured without complicating the design of the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76. Thus, it becomes possible to design easily.

  Further, since it is not necessary to provide the probability change region opening / closing plates 73a and 74a and the probability change region solenoids 73b and 74b, the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 of the third embodiment in a front view.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the communication passage 77 of the second variable winning device 76 communicates with the guide passage 72 of the variable winning device 65 via a merging portion 77a, and the position of the merging portion 77a is located on the right side probability changing region. 73 on the downstream side of 73 and upstream of the left-side probability variation region 74.

  Further, the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of the third embodiment are not provided with the probability variation region opening / closing plates 73a and 74a and the probability variation region solenoids 73b and 74b as in the second embodiment. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the top of each probability variation region 73, 74 is configured to flow into the probability variation region 73, 74.

  That is, in the third embodiment, the ball that has won the variable winning device 65 is configured to flow into the right probability variation area 73, and the ball that has won the second variable winning device 76 flows into the left probability variation area 74. Is configured to do. The variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are configured to share the discharge passage 75.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 43 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment.

  Since the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is not provided with the probability changing area opening / closing plates 73a and 74a and the probability changing area solenoids 73b and 74b, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 according to the third embodiment has the first embodiment. And the probability variation area opening / closing table 202f (see FIG. 11) as in the second embodiment is not stored. On the other hand, as in the second embodiment, a special winning opening / closing table 202h is stored.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 44, the special winning opening opening / closing table 202h of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 44 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the special winning opening / closing table 202h according to the third embodiment. The big prize opening opening / closing table 202h shown in FIG. 44 shows the variable prize winning device 65 or the second variable prize winning device 76 that is opened for each round for each jackpot type in each special symbol. When the device 65 is opened, it is expressed as “lower”, and when the second variable winning device 76 is opened, it is expressed as “up”. In the third embodiment, when one variable winning device 65 or 76 (for example, the variable winning device 65) is opened, the other variable winning device 65 or 76 (for example, the second variable winning device 76) is opened. Is configured to be closed.

  As shown in FIG. 44, the third embodiment is configured such that the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are alternately opened and closed in all jackpot types. Specifically, each variable winning device 65 corresponding to the jackpot types “time A” and “latency probability variation A” of the first special symbol, and “time C” and “latency probability variation C” of the second special symbol. , 76 open / close pattern “alternating lower and upper” is open only by the variable prize device 65 in odd-numbered rounds (that is, 1 round, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds, 9 rounds, 11 rounds, 13 rounds and 15 rounds). The second variable winning device 76 is configured to be closed during the odd-numbered round.

  The open / close pattern “alternating lower and upper” is such that only the second variable winning device 76 is opened in the even-numbered rounds (that is, 2 rounds, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds, 12 rounds, and 14 rounds). The variable winning device 65 is configured to be closed during the even-numbered round.

  Next, the open / close pattern “alternately up and down” of each variable winning device 65, 76 corresponding to the jackpot type “time B”, “latency probability variation B” and “probability variation A” of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is: In the odd rounds (that is, 1 round, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds, 9 rounds, 11 rounds, 13 rounds and 15 rounds), only the second variable winning device 76 is opened, and during the odd rounds, the variable winning device 65 Is configured to be closed.

  In addition, the open / close pattern “alternate top and bottom” is open only in the variable winning device 65 in even-numbered rounds (that is, 2 rounds, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds, 12 rounds and 14 rounds). Is configured such that the second variable winning device 76 is closed.

  Therefore, in all jackpot types of the third embodiment, either one of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 is configured to be opened without interruption. By configuring in this way, the interval time during the jackpot game can be eliminated, the jackpot game can be quickly digested, and the game will not be delayed, preventing the player from awakening can do.

  Further, the jackpot types “time-short A” and “latency probability variation A”, “time-short B” and “latency probability variation B”, or “time-short C” and “latency probability variation C” are the variable winning devices 65, 76. Since the opening / closing pattern is the same, it is difficult (not impossible) for the player to recognize which jackpot type is won by making it impossible to determine the jackpot type only by the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning devices 65 and 76. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the jackpot processing (S103) of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a jackpot process (S103) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the third embodiment. In the jackpot process (S103) of the third embodiment, at the start of the jackpot, the probability variation area valid table 202g (see FIG. 12) and the jackpot opening / closing table 202h (see FIG. 44) are set according to the jackpot type. The probability variation area opening / closing table 202f as in the second embodiment is not set.

  In the jackpot processing (S103) of the third embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot is won (S403: Yes), the jackpot processing (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment and the second embodiment (see FIG. 26), S404 to The processing of S408 is executed to set the round counter (S404 to S406), the opening command (S407), and the opening time (S408).

  Then, the probability variation region opening / closing table 202f (see FIG. 11) is not set as in the first and second embodiments, but the probability variation region effective table 202g (see FIG. 12) is set (S410).

  Next, the big prize opening opening / closing table 202h (see FIG. 44) is set according to the type of jackpot (big jackpot type) (S501), and the process proceeds to S411. Specifically, as described above, if the jackpot type is “time-shortening A”, “latency probability variation A”, “time-shortening C”, and “latency probability variation C”, the open / close pattern of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 is set to “down”. If the jackpot type is “time-short B”, “latent probability variation B”, and “probability variation A”, the open / close pattern of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 is set to “vertical alternate”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the opening setting process (S422) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the opening setting process (S422) of the third embodiment. In the opening setting process (S422) of the third embodiment, either the variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 76 is referred to with reference to the big winning opening / closing table 202h (see FIG. 44) set at the start of the big hit. Set the release of.

  In the opening setting process (S422) of the third embodiment, first, since it is the timing for opening the big prize opening 65a or the second big prize opening 76a, any of the big prize opening 65a or the second big prize opening 76a is opened. Therefore, the variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 76 is set to open based on the set big winning opening opening / closing table 202h (S511), and the process proceeds to S432. By performing this opening setting, either the big prize opening solenoid 65c or the second big prize opening solenoid 76c is driven, and the opening / closing plate 65b or the second opening / closing plate 76b corresponding to the driven solenoids 65c, 76c is provided. The ball is opened, and the ball can flow into the big prize opening 65a or the second big prize opening 76a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the process during opening (S424) of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the open process (S424) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the third embodiment. In the opening process (S424) of the third embodiment, since the probability changing area opening and closing plates 73a and 74a are not provided, the count number is determined when the big prize opening switch 71 or the second big prize opening switch 71a is detected. This eliminates the need for the process of confirming the control, and can reduce the control burden.

  In the opening process (S424) of the third embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S446 that the opening time of any of the big winning openings 65a, 76a has not elapsed (S446: No), It is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize opening 65a and the big prize opening switch 71 is turned on, or whether or not the ball has won a prize in the second big prize opening 76a and the second big prize opening switch 71a is turned on. (S515).

  In the process of S515, if the big prize opening switch 71 or the second big prize opening switch 71a is turned on (S515: Yes), the ball has won the big prize opening 65a or the second big prize opening 76a. The value of the winning counter is decremented by 1 (S449), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter decremented by 1 is greater than “0” (S454). When the value of the winning counter is not greater than “0” (S454: No), that is, when the value of the winning counter is “0” or less, the ball is 10 in the big winning opening 65a or the second big winning opening 76a. Since the closing condition for the winning prize opening 65a or the second winning prize opening 76a is established after individual winning, the process proceeds to S455 in order to close the winning prize opening 65a or the second winning prize opening 76a.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the two variable winning devices 65 and 76 are provided, and the communication passage of the second variable winning device 76 with respect to the guide passage 72 of the variable winning device 65. 77 is communicated via the merging portion 77a, and the position of the merging portion 77a is on the downstream side of the right-side probability variation region 73 and upstream of the left-side probability variation region 74. And it is comprised so that a ball | bowl can always flow in into each probability variation area | region 73,74, without providing probability variation area | region opening-and-closing plate 73a, 74a in probability variation area | region 73,74. With this configuration, the ball that has won the variable winning device 65 flows into the right probability variation area 73, and the ball that has won the second variable winning device 76 flows into the left probability variation area 74. In the case of the jackpot type that gives the “probability variation state” (that is, “latent probability variation A to C” and “probability variation A”), the variable corresponding to the probability variation regions 73 and 74 that are set effectively. A “probability variation state” is given by winning a ball to the winning devices 65 and 76 and passing the ball to the probability changing regions 73 and 74 that are set effectively. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot type that does not give the “probability variation state” (that is, “short time A to C”), not the probability variation regions 73 and 74 that are set to be valid but the probability variation region 73 that is set to be invalid. , 74 is awarded to the variable winning devices 65, 76, and the balls are not passed to the probability changing regions 73, 74 that are set to be valid, but are passed to the probability changing regions 73, 74 that are set to be invalid. It is configured so that the “probability fluctuation state” is not given by passing the filter.

  With this configuration, even if a sphere passes through each probability variation region 73, 74, if the probability variation region 73, 74 is not set to be effective internally, a “probability variation state” occurs after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, even if the player visually recognizes the passage of the ball to each probability variation region 73, 74, the probability variation region opening and closing plate 73a, It is not necessary to provide 74a and probability variation region solenoids 73b and 74b. As a result, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 can be easily designed with a simple configuration without complicating the design of the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, it is not necessary to provide the probability changing area opening / closing plates 73a and 74a and the probability changing area solenoids 73b and 74b, thereby reducing the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 and reducing the manufacturing cost. can do.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, since the probability variation area opening / closing plates 73a, 74a are not provided, the big prize opening switch 71 for determining the opening / closing timing of the probability variation area opening / closing plates 73a, 74a. Alternatively, when the second big prize opening switch 71a is detected, it is not necessary to confirm the count number, and the control burden can be reduced.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in 3rd Embodiment has the same effect by the structure same as 1st Embodiment or 2nd Embodiment.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 52. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the right probability variation area 73 and the left certain probability variation area 74 are provided in the large winning opening 65a of one variable prize winning device 65, and the balls to the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set effectively are provided. Based on the passage, a “probability variation state” is given after the jackpot is over.

  Here, the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are provided inside the special winning opening 65a, and the probability variation region opening and closing plates 73a and 74a and the probability variation region opening and closing plates 73a and 74a are opened and closed for each probability variation region 73 and 74, respectively. When a plurality of drive mechanisms with the area solenoids 73b and 74b are provided, the parts 73a, 73b, 74a and 74b must be installed in a small space, and the design of the variable winning device 65 may be complicated. .

  Further, since the components 73a, 73b, 74a and 74b are provided in addition to the opening / closing plate 65b, the large winning port solenoid 65c and the large winning port switch 71 in the variable winning device 65, the number of components used in the pachinko machine 10 is increased. However, the manufacturing cost may increase.

  Furthermore, since a plurality of drive mechanisms are disposed in the probability variation regions 73 and 74, maintenance work is required for each of the drive mechanisms, and the maintenance man-hour may increase.

  Further, when opening and closing each of the probability change areas 73 and 74 by a plurality of drive mechanisms, for example, when the failure occurs, the both probability change areas 73 and 74 are kept open, or both probability change areas 73 and 74 are opened. Based on the passage of the ball to the probability variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set, the gameability that gives the “probability variation state” may end after the jackpot ends.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the right probability variation region 73 and the left certain probability variation region 74 are formed by one drive mechanism including the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a, the drive gear 78b, and the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c. At the same time, it is configured so that it can be closed, and the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is driven to rotate forward or reversely, so that the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c is configured to be slidable in a direction parallel to the guide passage 72.

  Specifically, when the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is driven to rotate in the forward direction, the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c slides to the downstream side of the guide passage 72 to open the right probability variation region 73, and the right certain probability variation region. The sphere is caused to flow into 73. On the other hand, when the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is driven in reverse, the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c is slid to the upstream side of the guide passage 72 to open the left certain variation region 74, and the sphere is moved to the left certain variation region 74. Let it flow.

  By configuring in this way, two probability variation regions (right probability variation region 73 and left probability variation region 74) are provided in the big winning opening 65a, and the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is provided for each jackpot round according to the jackpot type. Is driven forward or reversely to cause the ball to flow into one of the probability change areas 73 and 74, and the setting of validity or invalidity of each of the probability change areas 73 and 74 is switched (internally) in a state that the player cannot recognize. To control. When the ball passes through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set effectively during the jackpot, a “probability variation state” is generated after the jackpot is over. On the other hand, even if the sphere passes through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 set to be invalid, the “probability variation state” is not generated after the big hit.

  With this configuration, the probability variation regions 73 and 74 can be opened or closed with one drive mechanism 78, so that the design of the variable winning device 65 is not complicated, and the variable winning device 65 as a whole can be realized. The configuration can be simplified and designed easily.

  In addition, the probability changing regions 73 and 74 are opened / closed or closed by a single drive mechanism 78, and the probability changing regions 73 and 74 need not be opened or closed by a plurality of drive mechanisms, thereby reducing the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10. Manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the probability changing regions 73 and 74 are opened / closed or closed by one drive mechanism 78, maintenance work for only one drive mechanism 78 may be performed, and the number of maintenance steps can be reduced.

  Further, by opening and closing the probability changing regions 73 and 74 by one drive mechanism 78, when one of the probability changing regions 73 and 74 is opened, the other probability changing region 74 and 73 can be closed without fail. Therefore, by opening both probability variation areas 73 and 74 due to a failure or the like, a “probability variation state” is given after the end of jackpot based on the passage of the sphere to the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set effectively. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the event that the gameability collapses, and to realize a novel gameplay.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to third embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 48, the variable winning device 65 of 4th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 48A is a schematic cross-sectional view in a front view of the variable prize winning device 65 of the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (a), in the fourth embodiment, one drive mechanism 78 is provided between the right probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region 74 provided in the guide passage 72 of the variable winning device 65. It has been.

  The drive mechanism 78 includes a probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a (see FIG. 49) built in the depth direction of the front view of the wall portion positioned between the right probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region 74, and the probability variation region opening / closing motor. A drive gear 78b that is rotationally driven by 78a and a probability change region opening / closing plate 78c provided with a transmission gear that meshes with the drive gear 78b.

  The probability changing region opening / closing motor 78a (see FIG. 49) is a stepping motor that can be driven in forward rotation (counterclockwise) and reverse rotation (clockwise). Therefore, when the probability change region opening / closing motor 78a is driven forward, the drive gear 78b is also rotated counterclockwise, and when driven reversely, the drive gear 78b is also rotated clockwise.

  The drive gear 78b is connected to a probability change region opening / closing motor 78a, and the drive gear 78b is also rotationally driven as the probability change region opening / closing motor 78a is driven. The drive gear 78b is meshed with a transmission gear provided on the lower surface of a probability change region opening / closing plate 78c described later.

  In the initial state, the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c is configured such that the right portion of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c closes the right probability variation region 73 and the left portion of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c closes the left probability variation region 74. Has been. The probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c is disposed such that the upper surface thereof is flush with the bottom surface (the rolling surface of the sphere) of the guide passage 72. Further, a transmission gear that meshes with the drive gear 78b is provided on the lower surface of the probability change region opening / closing plate 78c, and the probability change region opening / closing plate 78c is configured to be slidable as the drive gear 78b rotates. Has been.

  In the fourth embodiment, the probability variation region meshed with the drive gear 78b when the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is driven to rotate forward (counterclockwise) and the drive gear 78b is rotated counterclockwise. The open / close plate 78c is slidably driven to the downstream side of the guide passage 72, and the right side probability variation region 73 is opened. On the other hand, when the probability change region opening / closing motor 78a is driven to rotate in the reverse direction (clockwise) and the drive gear 78b is rotated clockwise, the probability change region opening / closing plate 78c meshed with the drive gear 78b serves as a guide passage. 72 is configured to slide to the upstream side of 72 and open the left side probability variation region 74.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 48 (b) to FIG. 48 (d), the inflow pattern of the sphere flowing down in the guide passage 72 will be described. FIG. 48B shows a state in which the probability variation area opening / closing plate 78c is slid to the downstream side, the right probability variation area 73 is in the open state, and the left probability variation area 74 is in the closed state. 48 (c) is a schematic enlarged cross-sectional view for explaining the behavior of a sphere flowing down, and FIG. 48 (c) shows a state in which the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c is slid and driven upstream, and the left probability variation region 74 is in an open state. FIG. 48D is a schematic enlarged cross-sectional view for explaining the behavior of a sphere flowing down in the guide passage 72 when the right-side probability variation region 73 is in a closed state. FIG. FIG. 6 is a schematic enlarged cross-sectional view for explaining the behavior of a sphere flowing down in the guide passage 72 when the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation region 74 are both closed.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (b), when the big win is won and a special game state occurs, the opening / closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened, and the ball can flow into the big winning opening 65a. Then, when the probability variation area opening / closing plate 78c is slid to the downstream side and the right probability variation area 73 is in the open state, the ball that has flowed into the special prize opening 65a is first detected by the special prize opening switch 71, and then Then, it flows down the guide passage 72. Since the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c is slid to the downstream side by the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a (see FIG. 49), the right probability variation region 73 is opened, and the sphere enters the right probability variation region passage 73c. Inflow. Thereafter, the sphere is detected by a right probability variation region switch 73d embedded in the right probability variation region passage 73c. Note that the ball detected by the right probability change area switch 73d is discharged out of the variable winning device 65 (on the back side of the game board 13) through a discharge path (not shown).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (c), when the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c is slid to the upstream side and the left probability variation region 74 is in an open state, the ball that has flowed into the big prize opening 65a is This is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 and then flows down the guide passage 72. Then, the upper surface of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c closing the right probability variation region 73 is rolled, and the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c is slid to the upstream side by the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a (see FIG. 49). For this reason, the left side probability variation region 74 is opened, and the sphere flows into the left probability variation region passage 74c. Thereafter, the sphere is detected by a left probability changing region switch 74d embedded in the left probability changing region passage 74c. The ball detected by the left probability changing area switch 74d is discharged out of the variable winning device 65 (on the back side of the game board 13) through a discharge path (not shown).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (d), when the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c is in the initial position and both the right probability variation region 73 and the left certain probability variation region 74 are in the closed state, it flows into the big prize opening 65a. The ball is first detected by the big prize opening switch 71 and then flows down the guide passage 72. Then, it rolls on the upper surface of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c, passes above the right probability variation region 73 and the left certain probability variation region 74, and from the discharge path 75 provided on the downstream side outside the variable winning device 65 (the back of the game board 13). To the side).

  With this configuration, the probability variation regions 73 and 74 can be opened or closed with one drive mechanism 78, so that the design of the variable winning device 65 is not complicated, and the variable winning device 65 as a whole can be realized. The configuration can be simplified and designed easily. In addition, the probability changing regions 73 and 74 are opened / closed or closed by a single drive mechanism 78, and the probability changing regions 73 and 74 need not be opened or closed by a plurality of drive mechanisms, thereby reducing the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10. Manufacturing cost can be reduced. Furthermore, since the probability changing regions 73 and 74 are opened / closed or closed by one drive mechanism 78, maintenance work for only one drive mechanism 78 may be performed, and the number of maintenance steps can be reduced. Further, by opening and closing the probability changing regions 73 and 74 by one drive mechanism 78, when one of the probability changing regions 73 and 74 is opened, the other probability changing region 74 and 73 can be closed without fail. Therefore, by opening both probability variation areas 73 and 74 due to a failure or the like, a “probability variation state” is given after the end of jackpot based on the passage of the sphere to the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set effectively. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the event that the gameability collapses, and to realize a novel gameplay.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 49 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment.

  The ROM 202 of the main controller 110 according to the fourth embodiment stores a probability change area opening / closing table 202f for setting a drive pattern of the probability change area opening / closing motor 78a.

  In addition, the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 of the fourth embodiment is connected to a probability change region opening / closing motor 78a for slidingly driving the probability change region opening / closing plate 78c. The MPU 201 is connected via the input / output port 205. Send a control signal. In the fourth embodiment, the probability variation region opening / closing table 202f set based on the jackpot type is referred to at the start of each round, and the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is driven to rotate forward or reversely to drive either probability variation region. 73 and 74 are opened. When a predetermined time (“6000 ms” in the fourth embodiment) elapses after the forward rotation driving or reverse rotation driving, the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is returned to the initial position, and both the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are brought together. Configure to close.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 50, the opening / closing pattern of each probability variation area 73 and 74 for every jackpot type is demonstrated. FIG. 50 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the probability variation area opening / closing table 202f according to the fourth embodiment. The probability variation region opening / closing table 202f shown in FIG. 50 shows the drive pattern of the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a for each jackpot type in each special symbol, and the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is driven forward (reverse) every round. When the right probability variation region 73 is opened by being rotated clockwise, it is expressed as “positive”, and when the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is driven in reverse (clockwise) to open the left probability variation region 74, “ "Reverse". In the fourth embodiment, when one probability variation region 73, 74 (for example, the right probability variation region 73) is open, the other probability variation region 74, 73 (for example, the left probability variation region 74) is necessarily closed. It is configured to be.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the opening / closing pattern “X3” of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 corresponding to the jackpot type “temporal time A” and “latency probability variation A” which is a jackpot of up to seven rounds of the first special symbol is an odd number. In rounds (ie, 1 round, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, and 7 rounds), the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is driven to rotate forward, the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c is slid to the downstream side, and the right probability variation region 73 is opened. As a result, the sphere can pass through the right probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region 74 is closed by the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c, so that the sphere cannot pass through the left probability variation region 74.

  Further, in the open / close pattern “X3”, in the even-numbered rounds (that is, the 2nd round, the 4th round, and the 6th round), the probability changing area opening / closing motor 78a is driven to rotate reversely, and the probability changing area opening / closing plate 78c is slid to the upstream side. By opening the probability variation region 74, the sphere can pass through the left probability variation region 74, and the right probability variation region 73 is closed by the probability variation region opening and closing plate 78c so that the sphere cannot pass through the right probability variation region 73.

  That is, in the opening / closing pattern “X3”, a sphere can pass into the right probability variation area 73 in the first round of jackpot, and a sphere can pass into the left probability variation area 74 in the next round (that is, two rounds). Until the end (that is, the end of the seventh round), the sphere can pass alternately to the right side probability variation region 73 or the left side probability variation region 74 every round. Therefore, the number of rounds that can be passed to the right-side probability variation area 73 is “4”, and the number of rounds that can be passed to the left-side probability variation area 74 is “3”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 50, the open / close pattern “X4” of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 corresponding to the jackpot types “time-short B” and “latency probability variation B” that are jackpots of up to seven rounds of the first special symbol is In odd-numbered rounds (ie, 1 round, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, and 7 rounds), the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is driven in reverse, the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c is slid to the upstream side, and the left probability variation region 74 is opened. As a result, the sphere can pass through the left side probability variation region 74 and the right side probability variation region 73 is closed by the probability variation region opening and closing plate 78c, so that the sphere cannot pass through the right side probability variation region 73.

  In the open / close pattern “X4”, in the even-numbered rounds (that is, the 2nd round, the 4th round, and the 6th round), the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is driven to rotate forward and the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c is slid to the downstream side By opening the right probability variation region 73, the sphere can pass through the right probability variation region 73, and the left probability variation region 74 is closed by the probability variation region opening and closing plate 78c so that the sphere cannot pass through the left probability variation region 74. .

  That is, in the opening / closing pattern “X4”, the sphere can pass through the left probability variation area 74 in the first round of the big hit, and the sphere can pass through the right probability variation area 73 in the next round (that is, two rounds). Until the end (that is, the end of the seventh round), the sphere can pass alternately to the left probability variation region 74 or the right probability variation region 73 every round. Accordingly, the number of rounds that can be passed to the left side probability variation area 74 is “4”, and the number of rounds that can be passed to the right side probability variation area 73 is “3”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 50, the open / close pattern “Y3” of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 corresponding to the jackpot type “probability variation A”, which is a jackpot of a maximum of 15 rounds of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, In odd-numbered rounds (ie, 1 round, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds, 9 rounds, 11 rounds, 13 rounds and 15 rounds), the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is driven in reverse and the probability variation region switching plate 78c is upstream. When the left probability variation region 74 is opened, the sphere can pass through the left probability variation region 74, and the right probability variation region 73 is closed by the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78 c so that the right probability variation region 73 is It becomes impossible to pass.

  In addition, the open / close pattern “Y3” has a positive change in the even-numbered rounds (that is, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, the 12th round, and the 14th round). The area open / close plate 78c is slid to the downstream side to open the right probability change area 73, so that the sphere can pass through the right probability change area 73 and the left probability change area 74 is closed by the probability change area open / close plate 78c. The sphere cannot pass through the left side probability variation region 74.

  That is, in the opening / closing pattern “Y3”, the sphere can pass through the left-side probability variation area 74 in the first round of jackpot, and the sphere can pass through the right-side probability variation area 73 in the next round (that is, two rounds). Until the end (that is, the end of the 15th round), the sphere can pass alternately to the left side probability variation region 74 or the right side probability variation region 73 every round. Accordingly, the number of rounds that can be passed to the left side probability variation area 74 is “8”, and the number of rounds that can be passed to the right side probability variation area 73 is “7”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 50, the open / close pattern “Y4” of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 corresponding to the jackpot type “hour / short C” and “latency probability variation C”, which is a jackpot of up to 15 rounds of the second special symbol, is In odd-numbered rounds (that is, 1 round, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds, 9 rounds, 11 rounds, 13 rounds and 15 rounds), the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is driven to rotate forward, and the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c is By sliding to the downstream side and opening the right probability variation region 73, the sphere can pass through the right probability variation region 73, and the left probability variation region 74 is closed by the probability variation region opening and closing plate 78c, so that the left certain variation region 74 is defined. The ball cannot pass.

  In the open / close pattern “Y4”, the odd-numbered round (ie, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, the 12th round, and the 14th round) are driven by the probability variation area opening / closing motor 78a in the reverse direction. The opening / closing plate 78c slides upstream to open the left-side probability variation region 74, so that the sphere can pass through the left-side probability variation region 74, and the right-side probability variation region 73 is closed by the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c. The sphere cannot pass through the probability variation region 73.

  That is, in the opening / closing pattern “Y4”, the sphere can pass into the right probability variation area 73 in the first round of jackpot, and the sphere can pass into the left probability variation area 74 in the next round (that is, two rounds). Until the end (that is, the end of the 15th round), the sphere can pass alternately to the right probability variation region 73 or the left probability variation region 74 every round. Accordingly, the number of rounds that can be passed to the right-side probability variation area 73 is “8”, and the number of rounds that can be passed to the left-side probability variation area 74 is “7”.

  In this way, the jackpot type (that is, jackpot type “short-time A” and “latency probability variation A”, jackpot type “short-time” in which the opening and closing patterns of the probability changing areas 73 and 74 according to the drive pattern of the probability changing area opening and closing motor 78a are equivalent. B ”and“ latency probability variation B ”, and jackpot types“ short time C ”and“ latency probability variation C ”) are provided, respectively, so that the jackpot type cannot be determined only by the opening / closing patterns of the respective probability variation areas 73 and 74. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize which jackpot type is won by the player (impossible), and it creates a game property that allows the player to guess in which gaming state the game is being played. Interest can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the opening setting process (S422) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the opening setting process (S422) of the fourth embodiment. In the opening setting process (S422) of the fourth embodiment, the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is driven to rotate forward or reversely with reference to the probability variation region opening / closing table 202f (see FIG. 50) set at the start of the big hit.

  In the opening setting process (S422) of the fourth embodiment, similarly to the opening setting process (S422) of the first embodiment, the processes of S431 to S434 are performed to set the big winning opening opening (S431), and the winning counter is set. “10” is set (S432), an opening time is set (S433), and an opening command is set (S434).

  Next, depending on the type of jackpot (type of jackpot), the probability variation area opening / closing motor 78a is driven forward or reversely based on the probability variation area opening / closing table 202f (see FIG. 50) set at the time of starting the jackpot ( S521), one of the probability change regions 73 and 74 is opened and the other probability change region 74 and 73 is closed, and the process proceeds to S436.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the process during opening (S424) of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the open process (S424) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the fourth embodiment. In the open process (S424) of the fourth embodiment, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (in the fourth embodiment, “6000 ms”) has elapsed since the driving of the probability change region opening / closing motor 78a is started. When the predetermined time has elapsed, the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is returned to the initial position, and both the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are closed.

  In the open process (S424) of the fourth embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, first, the processes of S441 to S445 are performed, and the probability variation transition flag 203i is set based on the passage of the sphere to the probability variation regions 73 and 74. And the process proceeds to S531.

  In the process of S531, it is determined whether or not “6000 ms” has elapsed since the start of driving of the probability variation area opening / closing motor 78a in S521 of the above-described release setting process (see FIG. 51) (S531). As a result of the determination, if “6000 ms” has elapsed from the start of driving of the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a (S531: Yes), the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is returned to the initial position (S532), and both the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are brought together. The process is closed and the process proceeds to S446. On the other hand, if “6000 ms” has not elapsed since the start of driving of the probability change region opening / closing motor 78a (S531: No), the process of S532 is skipped and the process proceeds to S446.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the right probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region are provided by one drive mechanism including the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a and the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c. 74 is configured to be closed at the same time, and the probability changing region opening / closing motor 78a is driven to rotate forward or reversely, so that the probability changing region opening / closing plate 78c is configured to be slidable in a direction parallel to the guide passage 72. Further, two probability variation regions (right probability variation region 73 and left probability variation region 74) are provided in the big winning opening 65a, and the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is driven to rotate forward or reverse for each jackpot according to the jackpot type. The ball is caused to flow into one of the probability change areas 73 and 74 and is controlled so as to switch (internally) whether or not the player can recognize the valid or invalid setting of each of the probability change areas 73 and 74. When the ball passes through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set effectively during the jackpot, a “probability variation state” is generated after the jackpot is over. On the other hand, even if the sphere passes through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 set to be invalid, the “probability variation state” is not generated after the big hit.

  With this configuration, the probability variation regions 73 and 74 can be opened or closed with one drive mechanism 78, so that the design of the variable winning device 65 is not complicated, and the variable winning device 65 as a whole can be realized. The configuration can be simplified and designed easily.

  In addition, the probability changing regions 73 and 74 are opened / closed or closed by a single drive mechanism 78, and the probability changing regions 73 and 74 need not be opened or closed by a plurality of drive mechanisms, thereby reducing the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10. Manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the probability changing regions 73 and 74 are opened / closed or closed by the single drive mechanism 78, only the single drive mechanism 78 needs to be maintained, and the maintenance man-hours of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In addition, when one of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 is opened by opening and closing the probability variation regions 73 and 74 by slidingly driving the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c, the other probability variation region 74 and 73 must be closed. Can do. Therefore, by opening both probability variation areas 73 and 74 due to a failure or the like, a “probability variation state” is given after the end of jackpot based on the passage of the sphere to the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set effectively. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the event that the gameability collapses, and to realize a novel gameplay.

  Further, when the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c is not driven (initial position), the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is not normally operated due to a failure or the like by closing both the probability variation regions 73 and 74. Even if it exists, it can be set as the state which closed both the probability change area | regions 73 and 74, and the inflow of the ball | bowl to the probability change area | regions 73 and 74 can be prevented even at the time of abnormality. Therefore, even if the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are set to be valid at the time of abnormality, it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from occurring in the game hall.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment has the same effects as the first embodiment to the third embodiment.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the right probability variation area 73 and the left certain probability variation area 74 are provided in the large winning opening 65a of one variable prize winning device 65, and the balls to the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set effectively are provided. Based on the passage, a “probability variation state” is given after the jackpot is over.

  Here, there is a possibility that a ball that has won a prize winning opening 65a in the round immediately before the currently executed round remains (stays) in the guide passage 72. In particular, as in the second embodiment, when two big winning devices 65 and 76 are used to digest a jackpot game with no (less) interval time between rounds, the above-mentioned event occurs frequently.

  However, when the above event has occurred, the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are validly set simultaneously with the start of each round. In spite of this, the ball won in the previous round passes through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are effectively set that cannot be passed, and there is an unexpected game value in the game specifications. It is possible that unexpected loss will occur in the game hall.

  In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is configured such that the effective setting of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 is performed not after the start of the round but after a predetermined period has elapsed since the big winning opening 65a is opened. Specifically, the probability changing areas 73 and 74 are set to be effective simultaneously with the driving of the probability changing area solenoids 73b and 74b accompanying the winning of the third ball after the large winning opening 65a is opened.

  By configuring in this way, the ball won in the previous round is effectively set so that it can not pass by itself even though the jackpot type that does not give "probability fluctuation state" is won at the beginning. It is possible to make it difficult to generate an event that passes through certain probability variation areas 73 and 74, and to give a player a gaming value as expected in the gaming specifications, and to prevent an unexpected loss from occurring in the game hall. Can do.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with a focus on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fourth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to fourth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 53, the detection mode of the sphere in each round of the jackpot type “time reduction A” according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 shows operation timings of the big winning opening solenoid 65c, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b, and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b in the first and second rounds of the first special symbol jackpot type “time reduction A” of the fifth embodiment. , Each time of the detection timing of the sphere in the big winning opening switch 71, the right probability variation region switch 73d and the left probability variation region switch 74d, and the set timing of the right probability variation effective flag 203g, the left probability variation effective flag 203h and the probability variation transition flag 203i are schematically shown. It is the timing chart shown automatically.

  In the jackpot type “short time A” of the fifth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a total of seven rounds of jackpot game is executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoid 65c is turned on and the open / close plate 65b is opened. Is done. Then, a predetermined condition (in the fifth embodiment, a maximum of “30 seconds” has elapsed from the release (see Max t1 in FIG. 53. Max t1 <“30000 ms”)) or ten balls are detected by the big prize opening switch 71, If any one of the above events) is established, the special prize opening solenoid 65c is turned off, the open / close plate 65b is closed, and one round is completed.

  In addition, in the jackpot type “short time A”, the open / close pattern of the right probability variation area 73 and the left probability variation area 74 is “X1”, and therefore, the first winning ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71 in the first round. In this case, both the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t2 in FIG. 53. t2 = “60 ms”), and the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are normal. It is configured to be able to recognize whether or not it can be driven.

  Then, when the ball of the third count is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the right probability variation region solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms" (see t3 in FIG. 53. t3 = “2000 ms”). In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the time required to reach the right probability variation area 73 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (in the fifth embodiment, “1. 5 seconds ". See t4 in Fig. 53. t4 <" 2000ms "). Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the right probability variation region 73 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “short time A” is “A”, and the right probability variation area 73 of the second round and the left probability variation area 74 of the fifth round are set to be valid. The Therefore, in the first round, the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are both invalid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left probability variation valid flag 203h are set off. Accordingly, even when the sphere passes to the right probability variation region 73 and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d in the first round, since the right probability variation region 73 is not set to be effective, the probability variation transition flag is set. 203i remains off without being turned on.

  It should be noted that in the odd-numbered rounds (ie, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, and 7 rounds) of the jackpot type “time-short A”, the drive modes of the right probability change region solenoid 73b and the left probability change region solenoid 74b are the same as those in the first round.

  Next, when the first count ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71 in the second round of the jackpot type “short time A”, as in the first round, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are Both are turned on for “60 ms” (see t5 in FIG. 53. t5 = “60 ms”), so that it is possible to recognize whether the right probability changing region solenoid 73b and the left probability changing region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

  Then, when the ball of the third count is detected by the special winning opening switch 71, only the left probability changing region solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms" (see t6 in FIG. 53. t6 = "2000ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the time required to reach the left probability variation region 74 after the ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (that is, “1.6 seconds”). See t7 in Fig. 53. t7 <"2000ms"). Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the left probability variation region 74 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d.

  In the fifth embodiment, when the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are set to be valid, when the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, the corresponding probability variation valid flags 203g and 203h are set to ON. It is configured as follows. In other words, even in the round in which the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are effectively set, the probability variation during the period in which at least three balls flow into the big winning opening 65a after the start of the round (see t8 in FIG. 53). The valid flags 203g and 203h are set to off. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, since the ball is fired at intervals of “0.6 seconds”, the probability variation valid flags 203g and 203h are turned off for at least “1.8 seconds” after the big winning opening 65a is opened. Can be left alone.

  In particular, when the ball of the first count is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 in each round, the probability variation area opening and closing plates 73a and 74a are opened for “60 ms” for operation confirmation. If the round sphere remains (resides) in the guide passage 72, the sphere may flow into the open probability change regions 73 and 74.

  Therefore, the effective setting of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 is configured not to be performed at the start of the round, but to be performed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the special winning opening 65a is opened. Specifically, the probability changing areas 73 and 74 are set to be effective simultaneously with the driving of the probability changing area solenoids 73b and 74b accompanying the winning of the third ball after the large winning opening 65a is opened. By configuring in this way, the ball that won in the previous round (that is, the first round) in spite of having won the jackpot type “Time A” that does not give the “probability variation state” at first, It is possible to eliminate as much as possible an event that passes through the probability variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set and cannot pass through. Therefore, while confirming the operation of the probability variation area opening / closing plates 73a and 74a, it is possible to give the player a gaming value as expected in the gaming specifications and prevent an unexpected loss from occurring in the game hall.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the detection mode of the sphere in each round of the jackpot type “latency probability variation A” of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 shows the operation timings of the big winning opening solenoid 65c, the right probability changing area solenoid 73b, and the left probability changing area solenoid 74b in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type “latency probability variation A”, the big winning opening switch 71, the right FIG. 10 is a timing chart schematically showing the time of the detection timing of a sphere in the probability variation region switch 73d and the left probability variation region switch 74d and the setting timing of the right probability variation effective flag 203g, the left probability variation effective flag 203h, and the probability variation transition flag 203i. .

  In the jackpot type “latency probability variation A” of the fifth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a total of seven rounds of jackpot game is executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoid 65c is turned on and the open / close plate 65b is turned on. Is released. Then, a predetermined condition (in the fifth embodiment, a maximum of “30 seconds” has elapsed from the release (see Max t1 in FIG. 54. Max t1 <“30000 ms”)) or ten balls are detected by the big prize opening switch 71, If any one of the above events) is established, the special prize opening solenoid 65c is turned off, the open / close plate 65b is closed, and one round is completed.

  Also, in the jackpot type “latency probability variation A”, the open / close pattern of the right probability variation area 73 and the left probability variation area 74 is “X1”, as in the jackpot type “time reduction A”. When the first count sphere is detected by the switch 71, both the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t2 in FIG. 54. t2 = "60 ms"). Whether or not the probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b can be normally driven can be recognized.

  At this time, since the probability variation valid flags 203g and 203h are still set to OFF, even if a ball flows into the probability variation regions 73 and 74 at this timing, the ON condition of the probability variation transition flag 203i is not satisfied.

  Then, when the ball of the third count is detected by the special winning opening switch 71, only the right probability changing area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms" (see t3 in FIG. 54. t3 = "2000ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the time required to reach the right probability variation area 73 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (in the fifth embodiment, “1. 5 seconds ". See t4 in FIG. 54. t4 <" 2000ms "). Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the right probability variation region 73 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latency probability variation A” is “B”, and the right probability variation region 73 in the third round and the left probability variation region 74 in the sixth round are valid. Is set. Therefore, in the first round, the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are both invalid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left probability variation valid flag 203h are set off. Accordingly, even when the sphere passes to the right probability variation region 73 and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d in the first round, since the right probability variation region 73 is not set to be effective, the probability variation transition flag is set. 203i remains off without being turned on.

  In the odd rounds (ie, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, and 7 rounds) of the jackpot type “latency probability variation A”, the drive modes of the right probability variation region solenoid 73 b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74 b are the same as those in the first round. .

  Next, in the second round of the big hit type “latency probability variation A”, when the first count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid are the same as in the first round. 74b are both turned on for "60ms" (see t5 in FIG. 54. t5 = "60ms"), and it is configured to be able to recognize whether the right probability changing region solenoid 73b and the left probability changing region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. Yes.

  Then, when the ball of the third count is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the left probability changing region solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000ms" (see t6 in FIG. 54. t6 = "2000ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the time required to reach the left probability variation area 74 after the ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (that is, “1.6 seconds”). See t7 in Fig. 54. t7 <"2000ms"). Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the left probability variation region 74 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latency probability variation A” is “B”, and the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are invalid in the second round, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and The left likelihood variation valid flag 203h is set to off. Therefore, even in the second round, even if the sphere passes to the left probability variation region 74 and the sphere is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d, the probability variation transition flag is not set because the left probability variation region 74 is not set to be valid. 203i remains off without being turned on.

  Note that, in the even rounds (ie, the 4th round and the 6th round) of the big hit type “latency probability variation A”, the drive modes of the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are the same as those in the second round.

  Next, in the third round of the jackpot type “latency probability variation A”, when the first-count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, the right probability change region solenoid 73b and Both the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t8 in FIG. 54. t8 = “60 ms”), and it is possible to recognize whether the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. It is configured.

  In the third round, only the right probability variation region solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000ms" (see t9 in FIG. 54. t9 = "2000ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the time required to reach the right probability variation area 73 after the ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (that is, “1.5 seconds”). See t10 in Fig. 54. t10 <"2000ms"). Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the right probability variation region 73 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latency probability variation A” is “B”, and only the right probability variation area 73 is valid in the third round. Further, when the third winning ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71 after the big winning opening 65a is opened (see t11 in FIG. 53), the right probability variation valid flag 203g is set to ON. Therefore, in the third round, when the sphere after the third count flows into the right probability variation region 73 and the right probability variation region switch 73d detects the sphere, the right probability variation region 73 is set to be effective. The probability variation flag 203i is set to on.

  Therefore, in the jackpot type “latency probability variation A” of the fifth embodiment, even if the effective setting of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 is started from the third count of the big prize opening switch 71, the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are entered. The third and subsequent spheres can be passed. As a result, it becomes possible to pass the sphere to the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set to be effective, and the probability change transition flag 203i is turned on as the sphere passes to the probability change areas 73 and 74 that are set to be effective. By setting, at the end of the jackpot, it is possible to give a “probability fluctuation state” with reference to the probability variation transition flag 203i.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the opening setting process (S422) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the opening setting process (S422) of the fifth embodiment. The release setting process (S422) of the fifth embodiment is configured so that the probability variation valid flags 203g and 203h are not processed at the start of the round.

  Accordingly, in the opening setting process (S422) of the fifth embodiment, similarly to the opening setting process (S422) of the first embodiment, the processes of S431 to S434 are performed to set the big prize opening opening (S431), and the winning is achieved. “10” is set in the counter (S432), an opening time is set (S433), and an opening command is set (S434).

  Then, the release setting process (S422) of the fifth embodiment does not refer to the probability variation area validity table 202g at this stage and ends the release setting process (S422) as it is. Therefore, at the start of the round, the probability variation valid flags 203g and 203h remain off.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a process during opening (S424) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing processing during open (S424) of the fifth embodiment. In the opening process of the fifth embodiment, the ball winning detection process associated with the opening of the big winning opening 65a, the opening / closing control process of the right probability variation area 73 and the left probability variation area 74, or the opened right probability variation area 73 or left side. The processing for detecting the passage of a sphere to the probability variation area 74 is executed, and at the timing when a predetermined number of spheres wins, the validity settings of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are set based on the set probability variation area validity table 202g (see FIG. 12). I do.

  In the open process (S424) of the fifth embodiment, in the process of S452, whether or not the current ON detection of the big prize opening switch 71 is the third count, that is, whether or not the value of the winning counter is “7”. Is discriminated (S452). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the current on-detection of the big winning opening switch 71 is the third count (S452: Yes), the probability change set according to the jackpot type in the jackpot processing (see FIG. 26). Based on the region opening / closing table 202f (see FIG. 11), the right probability changing region solenoid 73b or the left probability changing region solenoid 74b is set to ON for “2000 ms” (S453), and the right probability changing region opening / closing plate 73a or the left probability changing region opening / closing is opened. One of the plates 74a is opened so that the sphere can flow into the open probability changing regions 73 and 74.

  After the processing of S453, based on the probability variation area valid table 202g (see FIG. 12) set according to the jackpot type in the jackpot processing (see FIG. 26), the right probability variation valid flag 203g or the left probability variation valid flag in the round 203h is set (S491), and the opening setting process (S422) is terminated. After the completion of the opening setting process (S422), the process proceeds to S423 of the special prize opening / closing control process (see FIG. 27). Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, the probability variation valid flags 203g and 203h can be set valid after a predetermined period has elapsed since the special winning opening 65a is opened.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the effective setting of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 is performed not after the start of the round but after a predetermined period has elapsed since the grand prize winning opening 65a is opened. Configure as follows. Specifically, the probability changing areas 73 and 74 are set to be effective simultaneously with the driving of the probability changing area solenoids 73b and 74b accompanying the winning of the third ball after the large winning opening 65a is opened.

  By configuring in this way, the ball won in the previous round is effectively set so that it can not pass by itself even though the jackpot type that does not give "probability fluctuation state" is won at the beginning. It is possible to make it difficult to generate an event that passes through certain probability variation areas 73 and 74, and to give a player a gaming value as expected in the gaming specifications, and to prevent an unexpected loss from occurring in the game hall. Can do.

  Even when the effective setting of the probability changing areas 73 and 74 is started from the third count of the big winning opening switch 71, the third and subsequent balls can be passed to the probability changing areas 73 and 74. As a result, it becomes possible to pass the sphere to the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set to be effective, and the probability change transition flag 203i is turned on as the sphere passes to the probability change areas 73 and 74 that are set to be effective. By setting, at the end of the jackpot, it is possible to give a “probability fluctuation state” with reference to the probability variation transition flag 203i.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment has the same effects by the same configuration as that of the first to fourth embodiments.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, “30 seconds” have elapsed after the big winning opening 65a starts to be opened in one round of the jackpot, or ten balls are won while the big winning opening 65a is opened. Thus, one “round” is configured to be executed. Therefore, the player is configured to be able to grasp the current number of rounds by counting the number of times the special winning opening 65a is opened.

  In addition, the interval between rounds is a state in which the big prize opening 65a is closed, and the player is in the interval whether the big prize opening 65a is being opened (that is, during the round) in the big hit game. It is possible to grasp easily.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, in a predetermined round (the second and third rounds in the sixth embodiment), the grand prize opening 65a is opened a plurality of times within one round (the first round The opening time of the pseudo-interval performed between the first opening and the second opening in the round is the same as the opening time of the first opening and the second opening. Execute (hereinafter, the above opening mode is referred to as “special opening”). The interval time between rounds is also configured to be the same as the opening time and closing time. Then, in a part of the round in which the special opening is executed, the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are set to be effective, and when the ball passes to the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set to be effective, It is configured to give a “variation state”.

  With this configuration, even if the number of rounds in the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set effectively by the player is recognized, the player knows the number of rounds currently being executed. It is possible to make it difficult to clearly recognize whether or not a “probability variation state” occurs. Therefore, even when the “latency probability changing effect mode” is being executed, it is possible to create a game that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and improve the interest of the game be able to.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fifth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to fifth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, referring to FIG. 57, the operations of the big winning opening solenoid 65c, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b, and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type “latency probability variation A” of the sixth embodiment. The timing, the detection timing of the sphere in the big winning opening switch 71, the right probability change area switch 73d and the left probability change area switch 74d, and the time of setting the right probability change effective flag 203g, the left probability change effective flag 203h and the probability change transition flag 203i It is the timing chart which showed typically.

  In the jackpot type “latency probability variation A” of the sixth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a total of seven rounds of jackpot game is executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoid 65c is turned on and the open / close plate 65b is turned on. Is released. In the first round, the opening pattern of the special winning opening 65a is normally open, and a maximum of “30 seconds” has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening 65a (see Max t1 in FIG. 57. Max t1 <“30000 ms”). Alternatively, when any one of the ten balls detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is established, the big prize opening solenoid 65c is turned off, the open / close plate 65b is closed, and the first round is completed.

  Also, in the jackpot type “latency probability variation A”, the open / close pattern of the right side probability variation area 73 and the left side probability variation area 74 is “X1” similarly to the jackpot type “time reduction A”. Therefore, in the first round, when the first winning ball switch 71 detects the first count ball, both the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t2 in FIG. 57). t2 = “60 ms”.), the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are configured to be able to recognize whether or not they can be normally driven.

  Then, when the ball of the third count is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the right probability changing region solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms" (see t3 in FIG. 57. t3 = "2000ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the time required to reach the right probability variation area 73 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (in the sixth embodiment, “1. 5 seconds ". See t4 in FIG. 57. t4 <" 2000ms "). Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the right probability variation region 73 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latency probability variation A” is “B”, and the right probability variation region 73 in the third round and the left probability variation region 74 in the sixth round are valid. Is set. Therefore, in the first round, the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are both invalid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left probability variation valid flag 203h are set off. Accordingly, even when the sphere passes to the right probability variation region 73 and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d in the first round, since the right probability variation region 73 is not set to be effective, the probability variation transition flag is set. 203i remains off without being turned on.

  Next, when the big winning opening 65a in the first round of the jackpot type “latency probability variation A” is closed, an interval time of “3 seconds” (FIG. 57) until the next round (that is, two rounds) is started. T5 = t3000 = “3000 ms”). When it is determined that the interval time has elapsed, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 7) of the main control device 110 starts to open the second prize winning opening 65a.

  Next, in the second round of the jackpot type “latency probability variation A” of the sixth embodiment, the opening mode of the big winning opening 65a is special opening, and the first opening is performed among a plurality of opening, and the big winning prize is achieved. When “3 seconds” have elapsed since the opening of the opening 65a (see t6 in FIG. 57, t6 = “3000 ms”), the big prize opening solenoid 65c is turned off and the opening / closing plate 65b is closed, and the first of the second round Opening ends.

  At the time of the first opening of the second round, when the first winning ball switch 71 detects the ball of the first count, both the right probability changing region solenoid 73b and the left probability changing region solenoid 74b are both “60 ms”, as in the first round. Is turned on (see t7 in FIG. 57, t5 = “60 ms”), and it is configured to be able to recognize whether the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b can be normally driven.

  Then, after the first opening of the second round, a pseudo-interval is performed, and when “3 seconds” have elapsed since the closing of the grand prize opening 65a (see t8 in FIG. 57, t8 = “3000 ms”), the big prize is won. The opening solenoid 65c is turned on to open the opening / closing plate 65b, and the second round pseudo-interval ends.

  Thereafter, in the second round of the jackpot type “latency probability variation A”, a second release is performed among a plurality of releases, and “3 seconds” have elapsed since the opening of the big prize opening 65a (see t9 in FIG. 57). = “3000 ms”), the special prize opening solenoid 65c is turned off, the open / close plate 65b is closed, the second opening of the second round ends, and the second round ends.

  At the time of the first opening or the second opening of the second round, when the ball of the third count is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the left probability changing region solenoid 74b is turned on for “2000 ms” (FIG. 57). (See t10. t10 = “2000 ms”). In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the time required to reach the left probability variation region 74 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (in the sixth embodiment, “1. 6 seconds ". See t11 in FIG. 57. t11 <" 2000ms ". Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the left probability variation region 74 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latency probability variation A” is “B”, and the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are invalid in the second round, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and The left likelihood variation valid flag 203h is set to off. Therefore, at the time of the second opening of the second round, even if the sphere passes to the left probability variation region 74 and is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d, the left probability variation region 74 is not set to be effective. Therefore, the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on but remains off.

  Note that, in the even rounds (ie, the 4th round and the 6th round) of the big hit type “latency probability variation A”, the drive modes of the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are the same as those in the second round. In addition, when 10 balls in total are detected by the big prize opening switch 71 during the first opening and the second opening in the first opening and the second opening of the big winning opening 65a in the second round, the second round Is configured to end.

  Next, when the big winning opening 65a in the second round of the jackpot type “latency probability variation A” is closed, as in the interval time after the first round, until the next round (that is, three rounds) is started, An interval time of “3 seconds” (see t12 in FIG. 57. t12 = “3000 ms”) is provided. When it is determined that the interval time has elapsed, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 7) of the main control device 110 starts to open the third round big winning opening 65a.

  Next, in the third round of the jackpot type “latency probability variation A” of the sixth embodiment, as in the second round, the opening mode of the big prize opening 65a is a special opening, and the first opening of a plurality of opening When “3 seconds” have elapsed from the opening of the special winning opening 65a (see t13 in FIG. 57. t13 = “3000 ms”), the special winning opening solenoid 65c is turned off and the open / close plate 65b is closed. The first opening of the third round is completed.

  At the time of the first opening of the third round, when the first winning ball switch 71 detects the ball of the first count, the right probability changing region solenoid 73b and the left probability changing region solenoid 74b are the same as in the first and second rounds. Are turned on for 60 ms (see t14 in FIG. 57, t14 = “60 ms”), so that it is possible to recognize whether the right probability changing region solenoid 73b and the left probability changing region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. .

  Then, after the first opening of the third round, a pseudo-interval is performed, and when “3 seconds” have elapsed since the closing of the big winning opening 65a (see t15 in FIG. 57. t15 = “3000 ms”), the big prize is won. The opening solenoid 65c is turned on to open the opening / closing plate 65b, and the third round pseudo-interval ends.

  Thereafter, in the third round of the jackpot type “latency probability variation A”, the second release is performed among the plurality of releases, and “3 seconds” have elapsed since the opening of the big prize opening 65a (see t16 in FIG. 57). = “3000 ms”), the big prize opening solenoid 65c is turned off, the opening / closing plate 65b is closed, the second opening of the third round is finished, and the third round is finished.

  At the time of the first opening or the second opening of the third round, when the ball of the third count is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the right probability changing area solenoid 73b is turned on for “2000 ms” (FIG. 57). (See t17. t17 = “2000 ms”). In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the time required to reach the right probability variation area 73 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within “2 seconds” (in the sixth embodiment, “1. 5 seconds ". See t18 in FIG. 57. t18 <" 2000ms "). Therefore, it becomes possible to flow into the right probability variation region 73 where the third count ball is opened, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

  At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latency probability variation A” is “B”. In the third round, only the right probability variation area 73 is valid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g is turned on. In addition to being set, the left likelihood change valid flag 203h is set to OFF. Therefore, in the third round, when the sphere passes to the right probability variation region 73 and the sphere is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d, the right probability variation region 73 is set to be valid, and the probability variation transition flag 203i is turned on. Set to

  Therefore, in the jackpot type “latency probability variation A”, the probability variation regions 73 and 74 corresponding to the probability variation region switches 73 d and 74 d that have detected the sphere in the third round (the sixth round) are set to be effective, so the probability variation transition is performed. The flag 203i is set on. At the end of the jackpot, the “probability variation state” is set with reference to the probability variation transition flag 203i.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, in a predetermined round (the second and third rounds in the sixth embodiment), a plurality of large winning openings 65a are provided within one round. The special opening that performs the opening once (the first opening and the second opening) is executed, and the closing time of the pseudo interval that is performed between the first opening and the second opening in the round is set as the first opening and the second opening. It is executed so that it is the same as the opening time of. The interval time between rounds is also configured to be the same as the opening time and closing time. Then, in the round in which the special opening is executed, when the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are set to be valid, and the sphere passes through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set to be valid, the “probability variation state” after the jackpot ends. Is configured to be granted.

  With this configuration, even if the number of rounds in the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set effectively by the player is recognized, the player knows the number of rounds currently being executed. It is possible to make it difficult to clearly recognize whether or not a “probability variation state” occurs. Therefore, even when the “latency probability changing effect mode” is being executed, it is possible to create a game that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and improve the interest of the game be able to.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment has the same effects by the same configuration as the first to fifth embodiments.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a right probability variation region 73 and a left probability variation region 74 are provided as probability variation regions through which a ball flowing in from the variable winning device 65 can pass, and a right probability variation region 73 is disposed on the upstream side. A left-side probability variation region 74 is disposed on the downstream side in the left direction of the game board 13 when viewed from the front.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, as the probability variation region through which the ball flowing in from the variable winning device 65 can pass, the front certain probability variation region 73e is provided on the front side of the game board 13 and the downstream side thereof. The back side probability changing region 74e is provided on the side and the back side in the front view. Then, two probability variation regions (the front side probability variation region 73e and the back side probability variation region 74e) of the opening / closing plates 73f and 74f provided for each probability variation region 73e and 74e for each big hit round according to the big hit type. The driving control is performed so as to open either one of them, and the control is performed so as to switch (internally) the valid / invalid setting of each probability variation area 73e, 74e in a state where the player cannot recognize it. When the ball passes through the probability variation areas 73e and 74e that are effectively set during the jackpot, a “probability variation state” is generated after the jackpot is over. On the other hand, even if the sphere passes through the probability variation areas 73e and 74e set to be invalid, the “probability variation state” is not generated after the big hit.

  By configuring in this way, each probability variation area 73e, 74e overlaps in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, and which probability variation area 73e, 74e has flowed into the player visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 It can be difficult to recognize whether or not. In particular, by configuring the probability change region opening / closing plates 73f and 74f with a transparent member, it is difficult to recognize which of the probability change regions 73e and 74e is open. Therefore, even when the “latency probability changing effect mode” is executed, it makes the player difficult to recognize whether the state is a “probability variation state”, “time reduction state”, or “normal gaming state”. Thus, it is possible to create game characteristics that allow the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to sixth embodiments. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first to sixth embodiments, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 58, the variable winning device 65 of 7th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the configuration of the variable winning device 65 of the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 58 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view in front view of the variable winning device 65 of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 58B is a schematic cross-sectional view (a cross-sectional top view) of the variable winning device 65 taken along the line AA in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 58 (a) and 58 (b), the variable winning device 65 according to the seventh embodiment has a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate 65b covering the large winning opening 65a and a lower side of the opening / closing plate 65b. As shown in FIG. 7, a big prize opening solenoid 65c (see FIG. 7) for driving the opening / closing plate 65b to open and close, a big prize opening switch 71 for detecting a ball won in the big prize opening 65a, and the big prize opening switch 71 A guide passage 72 in which the ball detected in step S3 flows down, a near-side probability variation area 73e provided on the downstream side of the guide passage 72 and in the direction toward the back of the game board 13 from the guide passage, and the near-side probability variation area A depth-side probability variation region 74e provided downstream of 73e and in the direction of the back of the game board 13 as viewed from the front, and a depth of downstream provided in the direction of the depth of the game board 13 and downstream of the probability-of-change side 74e A discharge passage 75a is provided.

  The guide passage 72 of the seventh embodiment is a passage formed in a crank shape when viewed from above in a cross section of the game board 13 in which a ball that has flowed into the special winning opening 65a flows down. The guide passage 72 is provided with a front side probability variation region 73e and a rear side probability variation region 74e at a predetermined position of the passage that extends downstream of the guide passage 72 and extends in the depth direction of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. A rearmost discharge passage 75a is provided on the downstream side of the near side probability changing region 73e and the back side probability changing region 74e and in the direction of the back side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the sphere that flows into the special winning opening 65a and flows down the guide passage 72 passes through the near side probability variation region 73e, the back side probability variation region 74e, or the deepest discharge passage 75a. .

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the ball that has flowed into the big prize opening 65a is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, and then passes through the guide passage 72 until reaching the upper side of the near-side variation area 73e. 5 seconds ", and after the ball that has flowed into the big prize opening 65a is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, it passes through the guide passage 72 and reaches the upper part of the back side probability variation area 74e. It is configured to take “1.6 seconds”. Accordingly, the sphere detected by the special winning opening switch 71 is configured to be able to flow into the near side probability variation area 73e or the back side certain probability variation area 74e within "2 seconds".

  The near side probability changing region 73e is disposed so that the upper surface thereof is flush with the bottom surface (the rolling surface of the sphere) of the guide passage 72 in the closed state (projecting state). The front certain change region opening / closing plate 73f configured to be displaceable to the right, the front certain change region solenoid 73g (not shown) capable of opening and closing the front certain change region opening / closing plate 73f, and the lower side in the vertical direction of the front certain change region opening / closing plate 73f. A near-probability change area passage 73h that can flow down the sphere, and a near-probability change area switch 73i embedded in the front probability change area path 73h and capable of detecting a sphere passing through the front probability change area passage 73h; It consists of

  Here, all the members 73f to 73i constituting the near-side probability variation region 73e are formed of a transparent material or a semi-transparent material (for example, a polycarbonate resin or an acrylic resin). As a result, the player passes the sphere passing through the near side probability changing area 73e and the sphere passing through the back side probability changing area 74e (and the innermost discharge passage 75a) arranged in the front view depth direction of the game board 13. It is possible to view from the front side of the game board 13 respectively.

  The back side probability variation region 74e is configured to be displaceable from the closed state to the open state (immersion state) with its upper surface being flush with the bottom surface of the guide passage 72 in the closed state (projecting state). An open / close plate 74f, a back probability change region solenoid 74g (not shown) capable of opening and closing the back probability change region open / close plate 74f, and a back provided on the lower side in the vertical direction of the back probability change region open / close plate 74f so that a ball can flow down. A probability variation region passage 74h and a depth probability variation region switch 74i embedded in the depth probability variation region passage 74h and capable of detecting a sphere passing through the depth probability variation region passage 74h are configured.

  Here, the members 74f to 74i constituting the back side probability variation region 74e are all transparent materials or semi-transparent materials (for example, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc.) like the members 73f to 73i constituting the near side probability variation region 73e. ). As a result, the player passes from the front side of the game board 13 the sphere passing through the back side probability variation region 74e and the sphere passing through the innermost discharge passage 75a disposed in the depth direction of the front view of the game board 13 respectively. Visual recognition is possible.

  Further, when the front probability variation region opening / closing plate 73f of the front probability variation region 73e and the depth probability variation region opening / closing plate 74f of the rear probability variation region 74e open the respective probability variation regions 73e, 74e, the front of the game board 13 in the guide passage 72 is provided. It is driven by the front probability variation region solenoid 73g and the back probability variation region solenoid 74g so as to be immersed (buried) in the side wall on the left side of the view. Then, the front probability variation region opening / closing plate 73f and the depth probability variation region opening / closing plate 74f are immersed on the front side (player side) of the game board 13 at the immersion position of the front probability variation region opening / closing plate 73f and the depth probability variation region opening / closing plate 74f. A concealing member (not shown) that conceals the state invisible is disposed. Therefore, by making the state in which the front probability changing area opening / closing plate 73f and the depth probability changing area opening / closing plate 74f are immersed in the side wall of the guide passage 72 invisible to the player sitting on the front side of the game board 13, It is possible to make it difficult to grasp the drive states of the area opening / closing plate 73f and the depth change region opening / closing plate 74f.

  The innermost discharge passage 75a allows the ball that has flowed into the large winning opening 65a to flow out of the variable winning device 65 (the game board) when the ball does not flow into either the near side probability variation region 73e or the deep side probability variation region 74e. 13 is a passage for discharging to the back side.

  Here, the members constituting the innermost discharge passage 75a are all transparent materials, like the members 73f to 73i constituting the near side probability variation region 73e and the members 74f to 74i constituting the rear side probability variation region 74e. Alternatively, it is made of a translucent material (for example, polycarbonate resin or acrylic resin). Thereby, it becomes possible for the player to visually recognize the balls passing through the innermost discharge passage 75a from the front side of the game board 13.

  Further, the front probability changing area opening / closing plate 73f, the back probability changing area opening / closing plate 74f, and the innermost discharge passage 75a are made of a transparent material or a translucent material. Therefore, the probability variation regions 73e and 74e are opened or closed by the probability variation region opening and closing plates 73f and 74f by making it difficult for the player to recognize the positions (driving modes) of the probability variation region opening and closing plates 73f and 74f. It can be made difficult for the player to determine whether or not. Note that the front probability variation region opening / closing plate 73f and the back probability variation region opening / closing plate 74f may be made of colored resin.

  Here, the inflow pattern of the sphere that has flowed into the large winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 of the seventh embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, when a big win is won and a special game state occurs, the opening / closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened, and a ball can flow into the big winning port 65a. Then, when the front probability change region opening / closing plate 73f is in the open state (immersion state) and the back probability change region opening / closing plate 74f is in the closed state (protruding state), the ball that has flowed into the big winning opening 65a is: First, it is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, and then flows down the guide passage 72. And it collides with the near side wall of the guide passage 72, and the flow-down direction changes in the front view depth direction of the game board 13. Thereafter, since the front probability change region opening / closing plate 73f is opened (immersed) by a front probability change region solenoid 73g (not shown), the sphere flows into the front probability change region passage 73h. Thereafter, the sphere is detected by a front probability variation region switch 73i embedded in the front probability variation region passage 73h. Note that the ball detected by the front probability change area switch 73i is discharged out of the variable winning device 65 (on the back side of the game board 13) through a discharge path (not shown).

  In addition, when the front probability change region opening / closing plate 73f is in a closed state (projecting state) and the back probability change region opening / closing plate 74f is in an open state (immersion state), the ball that has flowed into the big prize opening 65a is: First, it is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, and then flows down the guide passage 72. And it collides with the near side wall of the guide passage 72, and the flow-down direction changes in the front view depth direction of the game board 13. Thereafter, the upper surface of the near-probability changing region opening / closing plate 73f in the closed state (protruding state) rolls, and the back-probability changing region opening / closing plate 74f provided on the downstream side of the near-probability changing region opening / closing plate 73f and in the back as viewed from the front is changed back. Since the area solenoid 74g (not shown) is opened (immersed), the sphere flows into the depth variation area passage 74h. Thereafter, the sphere is detected by a depth probability change region switch 74i embedded in the depth probability change region passage 74h. Note that the ball detected by the depth probability changing area switch 74i is discharged out of the variable winning device 65 (on the back side of the game board 13) through a discharge path (not shown).

  Furthermore, when both the front probability variation area opening / closing plate 73f and the depth probability variation region opening / closing plate 74f are in the closed state (projecting state), the ball that has flowed into the large winning opening 65a is first detected by the large winning opening switch 71, Thereafter, it flows down the guide passage 72. And it collides with the near side wall of the guide passage 72, and the flow-down direction changes in the front view depth direction of the game board 13. After that, it rolls on the upper surface of the front probability change region opening / closing plate 73f in the closed state (projecting state) and the upper surface of the back probability change region opening / closing plate 74f, collides with the inner wall on the back side of the guide passage 72, and the flow direction is the game board. 13 changes to the left when viewed from the front. And it discharges | emits out of the variable prize apparatus 65 (the back side of the game board 13) from the innermost discharge path 75a provided in the downstream.

  By configuring in this way, the front side probability variation region 73e and the back side probability variation region 74e (and the innermost discharge passage 75a) overlap in the front-rear direction (depth direction) of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front. In general, human visual perception is more difficult to recognize the difference in the depth image than the difference in the plane image. ), When the front side probability variation region 73e and the back side probability variation region 74e (and the innermost discharge passage 75a) are disposed in the front-rear direction, the front side probability variation region from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the probability changing regions 73e and 74e (or the innermost discharge passage 75a) has flowed into the player who visually recognizes 73e and the innermost probability changing region 74e (and the innermost discharge passage 75a). . In particular, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the probability variation regions 73e and 74e is open by configuring the front probability variation region opening / closing plate 73f and the depth probability variation region opening / closing plate 74f with a transparent member. Therefore, even if the player has recognized the probability variation areas 73e and 74e that are set to be effective, the probability variation areas 73e and 74e through which the ball has passed can be made difficult to identify from the player. It can be difficult to grasp whether or not the “probability fluctuation state” is given. As a result, even when the “latency probability variation effect mode” is executed, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the state is a “probability variation state”, “time reduction state”, or “normal game state”. Thus, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Can be easily guessed. For example, the numerical values given in the above embodiments are examples, and other numerical values can naturally be adopted.

  In addition, it is naturally possible to configure the configurations of the above-described embodiments in combination with any configuration of the following modifications. Furthermore, it is naturally possible to configure each of the configurations of other modified examples shown below by combining each configuration of one or more modified examples. In these cases, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

<Modification 1: One side continuous open (non-alternate)>
In the above embodiment, the right probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region 74 are alternately opened in each round at the time of the big hit. Instead of this, either one of the probability changing regions 73 and 74 may be continuously opened, or only one of the probability changing regions 73 and 74 may be opened. By configuring in this way, the variation patterns of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are made rich according to the jackpot type, and it is difficult (impossible) to recognize which jackpot type is won by the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played.

<Modification 2: Number of effective rounds is 3 or more, or only 1>
In the above embodiment, the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are set to be valid in any two rounds in one jackpot type. Instead, a jackpot type with three or more rounds for enabling the probability variation areas 73 and 74, a jackpot type with only one round for enabling the probability variation areas 73 and 74, or the probability variation areas 73 and 74 You may comprise so that the jackpot type which is not set effectively may be provided. By configuring in this way, by configuring in this way, the variation of the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 according to the jackpot type is abundant, and the player recognizes which jackpot type is won. It is difficult or impossible to construct, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played.

<Modification 3: Turn off the valid flag before the end of the round>
In the above embodiment, the probability variation valid flags 203g and 203h are turned off at the end of one round, that is, when the special winning opening 65a is closed. On the other hand, the probability variation valid flags 203g and 203h are set to a timing before the closing of one round, for example, when the probability variation region solenoids 73b and 74b are turned off (when the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are closed) or a predetermined number. It is set to be turned off when the ball is counted (for example, the fifth count), or when a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, “5 seconds”) from the opening of the special prize opening 65a or the probability variation areas 73 and 74. It may be configured. By configuring in this way, the period during which the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are set to be effective is shortened. For example, a ball that has been won in another round cannot stay through the variable winning device 65 due to retention. Even if an event that the sphere passes through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 occurs, the probability variation area 73 is reduced when the staying sphere passes the probability variation areas 73 and 74 by shortening the effective period of the probability variation areas 73 and 74. , 74 can be set to be invalid to prevent an unintended “probability fluctuation state” from being applied. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a game value as expected in the game specification and prevent an unexpected loss from occurring in the game hall.

<Variation 4: One specific area for each double attacker>
In the second embodiment, the plurality of variable winning devices 65 and 76 are configured to share the probability changing areas 73 and 74. Instead of this, one probability variation area 73, 74 may be provided for each of the variable winning devices 65, 76. By configuring in this way, the flow paths in each of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 can be individually designed, and there is no need to design based on the merge of the guide passage 72 and the communication passage 77. The degree of freedom in design of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 can be increased.

<Modification 5: All latent jackpot>
In the above embodiment, when the jackpot type “probability variation A” is won, the “probability variation notification effect mode” for notifying that the “probability variation state” is given is executed. On the other hand, you may comprise so that it may not alert | report that the "probability fluctuation state" is provided with all the jackpot types. By configuring in this way, it is possible to always create a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Variation 6: Accuracy, small hit>
In each of the above embodiments, in the special symbol lottery, any of the big hits of “15R probability variation jackpot”, “15R latent probability variation jackpot”, “7R latent probability variation jackpot”, “15R hourly jackpot”, or “7R hour jackpot” It was configured to be granted. On the other hand, a lottery different from the jackpot (for example, so-called “sudden probability change jackpot (2R probability change jackpot)”) or “small jackpot” different from the jackpot may be selected. By configuring in this way, in the case of winning a jackpot, the game value given to the player is made different, thereby providing variations in the game and improving the interest of the game by realizing various game characteristics be able to.

  In particular, when “small hit” is provided in the lottery of special symbols, when winning a small bonus, the open / close mode of the big prize winning port 65a or the like (that is, similar to or similar to the big hit to which the “latency probability variation state” is given) If “7R latency probability change jackpot” is set, “7R jackpot” that opens and closes the 7th prize opening 65a in the same manner as the “7R latency probability change jackpot” is given to the player as “normal game” It is difficult to distinguish between “state” and “latency probability fluctuation state”. By configuring in this way, gameability for guessing which game state is born is born, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that “small hit” is a lottery result in which the opening / closing of the big prize opening 65a or the like is executed, but unlike “15R probability change big hit” or “7R latent probability change big hit”, the game state transition is not executed.

<Modification 7: Probability suggestion production>
In the above embodiment, the player is informed only of the “probability change notification effect mode” that the “probability change state” is given. Instead of this, a “probability variation state” may be given, or it may be configured to suggest to the player that it is given by a special effect. As a special effect, for example, in the third symbol display device 81, a special character that is more easily selected in a situation where the “probability variation state” is given and is difficult to be selected when the “probability variation state” is not given. It is easy to output when it is displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of jackpot, at the end of jackpot, or during a fluctuating effect), or when the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are set to be valid, and is set to invalid. When it passes through the probability variation areas 73 and 74, an effect such as a special sound effect that is difficult to output is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 8: Valid setting multiple times>
In the above-described embodiment, the release pattern that allows the ball to flow into one of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 is executed once within one round of the jackpot. Instead of this, an open pattern in which a ball can flow into one of the probability change regions 73 and 74 may be executed two or more times in one round. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the inflow opportunity of the ball to the probability changing areas 73 and 74 that are set effectively, and to easily give the player the right to the “probability change state”.

<Modification 9: Effective setting switching according to the number of counts in one round>
In the above embodiment, one of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 is set to be valid in one round. Instead, the effective setting of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 may be switched within one round. Specifically, for example, when the second round big winning opening 65a is opened, the right probability variation area 73 is set valid, and then the right probability variation area 73 is invalidated after the fifth count in the second round. The left probability variation region 74 is configured to be set valid. By configuring in this way, the variation of the effective patterns of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 is made rich so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which jackpot type is won, and the game is performed in any game state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game that makes the player guess whether or not the game is in progress.

<Modification Example 10: Opening / Closing Member Only Upstream of Probability Change Area 2>
In the first embodiment, the opening / closing plates 73a and 74a are disposed in the right-side probability changing region 73 and the left-side probability changing region 74, respectively, and the opening / closing plates 73a and 74a are controlled to open and close to flow into the probability changing regions 73 and 74. I was distributing balls. Instead, the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a is disposed only in the upstream probability variation region, that is, the right probability variation region 73, and when the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a is open, the ball is moved to the right probability variation region 73. And the right probability variation area opening / closing plate 73a is closed so that the sphere flows into the left probability variation area 74. With this configuration, there is no need to dispose a drive mechanism in the left-side probability variation region 74, so the number of parts can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the ball that has won the variable winning device 65 always passes through the left-side probability variation region 74 and there is no need to provide a discharge passage 75 on the downstream side of the left-side probability variation region 74, the degree of freedom in designing the variable winning device 65 is improved. can do.

<Modification 11: Non-electric sorter>
In the above-described embodiment, the likelihood change regions 73 and 74 are opened or closed by the electric members (probability change region solenoids 73b and 74b or the probability change region opening / closing motor 78a) disposed in the vicinity of the probability change regions 73 and 74. The probability variation regions 73 and 74 into which the gas flows are changed. Instead of this, a non-electrical distribution device (for example, a distribution device that alternately distributes the balls that have entered the distribution entrance into the left path or the right path in the alternate distribution unit 64) is used. You may comprise so that the ball | bowl to the area | regions 73 and 74 may be distributed. With this configuration, the number of parts in the variable winning device 65 can be reduced, and control regarding each drive mechanism is not required, so that the control burden on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

<Modification 12: Time for rolling on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate is different>
In the above embodiment, when the right probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region 74 are closed, there is a particular difference between the probability variation region opening / closing plates 73a and 74a that close the probability variation regions 73 and 74. In other words, the time required for the spheres to pass through the upper surfaces of the probability change regions 73 and 74 is not different. On the other hand, by making the configuration of one probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a, 74a different from the configuration of the other probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a, 74a, there is a difference in the time that the sphere passes through the upper surface of the probability variation region 73, 74. It may be configured to occur. Specifically, for example, the length of the right probability change region opening / closing plate 73a is made longer than the length of the left probability change region opening / closing plate 74a, and the time for the sphere to roll on the upper surface of the right probability change region opening / closing plate 73a is changed to the left probability change. The upper surface of the area opening / closing plate 74a is configured to be longer than the time for the sphere to roll. With this configuration, by providing variations in the opening / closing timings of the probability variation region opening / closing plates 73a and 74a, variations in the probability variation regions 73 and 74 into which the sphere flowing down in the guide passage 72 flows can be increased. .

<Modification 13: Loop type>
In each of the above-described embodiments, even if any of the jackpots is won, the game is configured with a so-called ST type game specification in which a predetermined number of “probability variation states” are given after the jackpot is over. On the other hand, after the jackpot is ended, it may be configured by a so-called loop type game specification that maintains the “probability variation state” until the next jackpot occurs. In a so-called loop-type pachinko machine in which the next jackpot is promised, by applying the configuration of the present invention, it is possible to improve the playability of the game whether or not the ball passes through the probability changing areas 73 and 74 that are set effectively Can be achieved.

<Modification 14: Three or more probability variation regions>
In the above-described embodiment, two probability variation regions 73 and 74 are provided in the guide passage 72, and the ball that has won the big winning opening 65a during the big hit is configured to flow into one of the probability variation regions 73 and 74. It was. Instead of this, three or more probability variation regions may be provided in the guide passage 72, and a ball that has won a prize winning opening 65a may flow into any one probability variation region. By configuring in this way, the variation of the inflow pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 is made abundant, and it is difficult (not) to recognize which jackpot type is won by the player, and which gaming state This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game that makes the player guess whether the game is being played.

<Modification 15: Opening and Closing According to Driving Amount>
In the fourth embodiment, the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is disposed between the right probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region 74, and the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is driven forward or backward to drive the probability variation region. The opening / closing plate 78c is configured to be slidable to the upstream side or the downstream side of the guide passage 72 in accordance with the above driving. Instead, the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is disposed upstream of the right probability variation region 73, and the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is configured to be capable of only one direction (right rotation). A plurality of driving amounts of the motor 78a may be provided. When the probability change region opening / closing motor 78a is driven by the first drive amount (for example, 60 pulses), only the left probability change region 74 is opened, and the second drive amount (for example, 120 pulses) larger than the first drive amount. When driven, both the right probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region 74 are opened. With this configuration, it is possible to distribute the spheres that flow into the probability variation regions 73 and 74 according to the driving amount of one driving mechanism 78, and it is possible to perform the above-described distribution even with a motor that can be driven in only one direction. The playability of the present invention can be realized at a low cost.

<Modification 16: Movement of the lip of the opening / closing plate>
In the fourth embodiment, the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is disposed between the right probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region 74, and the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is driven forward or backward to drive the probability variation region. The opening / closing plate 78c is configured to be slidable to the upstream side or the downstream side of the guide passage 72 in accordance with the above driving. Instead, a driving solenoid (or a driving motor) and one opening / closing plate connected to the driving solenoid are provided, and when the driving solenoid is turned off, the opening / closing plate opens the right-side probability variation region 73 and the left side. While the probability variation region 74 is closed, the opening / closing plate may be configured to close the right probability variation region 73 and open the left certain variation region 74 when the drive solenoid is turned on. With this configuration, it is possible to distribute the spheres that flow into the probability variation areas 73 and 74 by driving one drive mechanism 78, and to realize the gameability of the present invention at a low cost.

<Modification 17: Multiple pseudo intervals during one round>
In the sixth embodiment, the pseudo interval time is provided once during one round. Alternatively, the pseudo interval time may be provided a plurality of times in one round. In other words, when the pseudo-interval time is provided a plurality of times during one round, the number of times that the variable winning device 65 is released during the round may be three or more. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to grasp the number of rounds currently being executed.

<Modification 18: Variable winning device for winning by left hand and second variable winning device for winning by right hand>
In the second embodiment, the two variable winning devices 65 and 76 are arranged on the right side of the game area. Instead, one variable winning device is arranged in the center of the game area, and the other variable winning device is arranged on the right side of the game area, and the variable winning devices that can be won by left-handed or right-handed are different. You may comprise as follows.

<Modification 19: A jackpot that only one of the two variable winning devices opens>
In the second embodiment, the two variable winning devices 65 and 76 are alternately opened according to each jackpot type at the jackpot. On the other hand, even when two variable winning devices 65 and 76 are arranged, a jackpot type that opens only one of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 may be provided.

<Modification 20: Identity of pseudo-interval time>
In the said 6th Embodiment, it comprised so that the interval time between jackpot rounds and the closing time of the pseudo | simulation interval which closes in pseudo | simulation during a round may become the same time. On the other hand, the interval time between jackpot rounds and the closing time of the pseudo-interval that closes in the meantime during the round can be any time as long as it is difficult for the player to identify each time (mode). (Mode) may be sufficient. Specifically, when the interval time between jackpot rounds is 2 seconds, the pseudo-interval time is set between 1 second and 3 seconds, or the interval time between jackpot rounds is set to a plurality of times ( For example, the pseudo-interval time is executed at a time (for example, 1 second or 2 seconds) equivalent to the plurality of times. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know the number of rounds being executed, and even if a round in which the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are effectively set is recognized, the probability variation It can be configured that it is difficult to grasp whether or not a state is given.

<Modification 21: One side continuous effective (non-alternate)>
In the above embodiment, the right probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region 74 are alternately set to be valid in each round at the time of the big hit. Instead of this, either one of the probability changing regions 73 and 74 may be set to be valid continuously, or only one of the probability changing regions 73 and 74 may be set to be valid. By configuring in this way, the variation of the effective patterns of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 according to the jackpot type is abundant, and it is difficult (impossible) to recognize which jackpot type is won by the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played.

<Modification 22: Validity / Invalidity of 1 Specific Area at 1st Prize Winner>
In the first embodiment, one variable winning device 65 is provided with two probability variation areas 73 and 74, and one of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 is set valid for each jackpot round, and the other is invalidated. It was set. On the other hand, in one variable winning device 65, when one probability variation area is provided, and the probability variation area is set to be valid or valid for each jackpot round, and the ball passes the valid probability variation area Alternatively, a probability variation state may be generated.

<Modification 23: Valid setting round is fixed>
In the first embodiment, one variable winning device 65 is provided with two probability variation areas 73 and 74, and one of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 is set valid for each round based on the jackpot type, while the other Was set to disabled. On the other hand, a round in which the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are valid in all jackpots is fixedly configured, and only the opening / closing pattern of the probability variation region opening and closing plates 73a and 74a is changed to provide a probability variation state. It may be configured.

<Modification 24: Multiple Open / Close Patterns in Special Figure 2>
In the first embodiment, in the jackpot type in the second special symbol, one kind of opening / closing pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 for making it difficult to determine whether or not a probability variation state is given to the player (that is, “ Open / close pattern “Y2”) of “short time C” and “latency probability variation C”. On the other hand, in the second special symbol, similarly to the first special symbol, the jackpot type (for example, “time reduction D”) of the opening / closing pattern different from the opening / closing pattern of “Y2” (for example, “Y3” corresponding to “X2”) And “latency probability variation D”), and it may be difficult to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the probability variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set for the player.

<Modification 25: Pattern in a state in which any probability variation region is closed>
In the said 1st Embodiment, in the big hit, it was comprised so that either one of the probability variation area | regions 73 and 74 might be open | released by all means. On the other hand, an open / close pattern (closed pattern) may be provided in which both probability variation regions 73 and 74 are closed.

<Modification 26: Double attacker without communication passage>
In the second embodiment, two variable winning devices 65 and 76 are provided, and the inside thereof is communicated by the communication passage 77. On the other hand, an opening / closing plate of another variable winning device is provided immediately above (directly below) the opening / closing plate of one variable winning device, and two variable winning devices are provided so that balls flowing in from each opening / closing plate immediately merge. You may comprise. By configuring in this way, the configuration of the communication passage is unnecessary, and the installation space can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced when the two variable winning devices are provided.

<Modification 27: Electric Chu Type Attacker>
In the first embodiment, since the opening / closing plate 65b is normally closed, the ball does not win the big winning opening 65a provided therein, and the opening / closing plate 65b is opened based on the jackpot so that the inside of the opening / closing plate 65b is opened. When the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are provided in the variable prize winning device 65 in which the ball is awarded at the large winning opening 65a provided in the sphere, and the sphere passes through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set effectively, the probability variation state is indicated. It was configured to grant. On the other hand, a so-called electric Chu type variable winning device is provided, in which the ball is easy to win when turning, and the ball is harder to win than when turning, and the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are provided therein. May be. In normal times, the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are closed or invalidated so that the balls do not pass through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set to be valid. Even in such a case, the probability variation state can be prevented from being given.

<Modification 28: Variable winning device 65 and probability variation area are separate>
In the said 1st Embodiment, it comprised so that the probability change area | regions 73 and 74 might be provided in the variable prize-winning apparatus 65. FIG. On the other hand, you may comprise so that the probability variation area | regions 73 and 74 may be arrange | positioned in the mechanism (for example, assembly path | pass board which collects a winning ball) on the back side of the game board 13 separate from the variable winning apparatus 65. By configuring in this way, the degree of freedom in designing the variable winning device 65 and the probability variation areas 73 and 74 can be improved.

<Variation 29: One version of probability variation area of the seventh embodiment>
In the seventh embodiment, the front side probability variation region 73e and the back side probability variation region 74e are disposed in the variable winning device 65, and each of the probability variation regions is configured so that a sphere can pass therethrough. The other probability variation regions 74e and 73e are invalidated while setting 73e and 74e valid, and a probability variation state is given when a sphere passes through the probability variation regions 73e and 74e that are validated. It was. On the other hand, only the near side probability variation region 73e may be arranged in the variable winning device 65, and the innermost discharge passage 75a may be arranged on the rear side when viewed from the front. With this configuration, even when only one opening / closing plate 73f is provided, the near side probability variation region 73e and the innermost discharge passage 75a overlap each other in the front view of the game board 13, so that the near side probability variation region 73e is formed. Opened, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether the ball has passed through the near side probability variation area 73e or whether the ball has passed through the innermost discharge passage 75a.

<Modification 30: Version without the innermost discharge passage of the seventh embodiment>
In the seventh embodiment, the variable winning device 65 is provided with the near side probability changing region 73e, the back side probability changing region 74e, and the innermost discharge passage 75a, and the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 is in any region or passage. It was configured to flow in. On the other hand, the innermost discharge passage 75a may be eliminated, and the sphere may flow into either the front side probability variation region 73e or the rear side probability variation region 74e. In this case, it is desirable that the opening / closing plate for closing each probability changing region 73e, 74e is an opening / closing plate for opening the other probability changing region 74e, 73e when one probability changing region 73e, 74e is closed. With this configuration, the sphere that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 can flow into any of the probability variation areas 73e and 74e, and always passes through any of the probability variation areas 73e and 74e from within the large winning opening 65a. It can be configured to be discharged.

<Modification 31: Opening and closing the discharge passage>
In the above embodiment, the opening / closing plates 73a and 74a are provided in the probability changing regions 73 and 74, respectively, and the opening and closing of the opening and closing plates 73a and 74a controls whether or not a sphere flows into the probability changing regions 73e and 74e. . On the other hand, the discharge passage 75 may be provided on the upstream side (near side) of the probability change regions 73 and 74, and an opening / closing plate may be provided in the discharge passage 75. In this case, when the open / close plate is in the open state, the sphere flows down the discharge passage 75, whereas when the open / close plate is in the closed state, the sphere does not flow down to the discharge passage 75, and the probability variation regions 73 and 74 on the downstream side thereof. Will flow down.

  In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 issues a display instruction to the display control device 114. A command may be directly transmitted from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, the audio lamp control device 113 may be connected to the display control device 114 so that a command instructing the output of each audio and lighting of the lamp is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113. Furthermore, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the variation that becomes a big hit during the variation effect of the third symbol (special symbol) that is held and executed upon entering the special figure 1 winning port 64b or the special figure 2 winning port 64c (start winning prize) Whether or not there is an effect has been described in the case of performing “hold change notice” in the execution symbol and the hold symbol. On the other hand, whether or not there is a variable display of the normal symbol that is held and executed when the ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 67 (start winning prize) is a win (stopped at the symbol “◯”). Using the normal symbol holding lamp 84, the third symbol display device 81, or the like, whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit during the variation effect of the third symbol, or instead, You may notify. Thereby, the player can grasp whether or not there is a variable display that is a hit in the variable display of the normal symbol being held or in the variable display of the normal symbol being executed and held. Therefore, it can be estimated whether or not the normal symbol is a hit before execution of variable display of the normal symbol. Among gaming machines, there are those that have increased gaming performance by the presence or absence of normal symbols, and are particularly effective in such gaming machines.

  In the above embodiment, the case has been described in which the demonstration effect is to stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9”, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Moreover, you may display a character and back image completely different from the 3rd pattern and back image which are used by the change production.

  In the above embodiment, the case where “holding change notice”, which is one form of continuous notice effect, is executed on the third symbol display device 81 in which the fluctuating effect is performed has been described. A fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 is provided in the machine 10, and the fourth symbol is displayed on the fourth symbol display device together with the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81. Unlike the “pending change notice” or “pending change notice”, a continuous notice effect (hereinafter referred to as “continuous notice effect” including the “pending change notice”) is executed. May be. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or by the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an accessory that is different from each movable accessory that operates in accordance with various effects, and the accessory is operated in a predetermined manner together with the variable effects, thereby executing a continuous notice effect. Also good. Further, the continuous warning effect may be executed by outputting the voice for the continuous warning effect from the voice output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the voice lamp control device 113, or the illumination unit of the pachinko machine 10 The continuous notice effect may be executed by turning on or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

  As a result, every time a variation effect (dynamic display) is performed in the third symbol display device 81 (and the special symbol display device 37), symbols are continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or a character is specified. The player can have a big hit expectation by operating in the above manner, by outputting a sound from the sound output device 226, or by turning on or blinking the lighting units 29 to 33. In addition, the player usually keeps playing the game by gazing at the 3rd symbol display device 81 where the variation effect is performed, but the symbol display by the 4th symbol display device different from the 3rd symbol display device 81 Since the continuous notice effect is performed by the operation of the accessory, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting / flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33, an effect different from the normal effect is performed for the player. Can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous notice effect is easily continued by simple control such as display of a symbol by the fourth symbol display device, operation of an accessory, sound output from the sound output device 226, or lighting / flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33. A notice effect can be performed.

  Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by voice output from the sound output device 226 or lighting or blinking of the lighting units 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113. The main control device 110 performs the lottery process at the time of start / failure and the start of variation, causes the audio lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous notice effect, and causes the display control device 114 to perform the variation effect. When performing a notice effect, each control apparatus can share each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

  In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect in the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect in the 4th symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the sound from the sound output device 226 A combination of at least two of the output and lighting or flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33 may be combined and controlled in conjunction with each other to execute the continuous notice effect. Thereby, a more various continuous notice effect can be performed. Also, a method for executing a continuous notice effect (display by the 3rd symbol display device 81, display by the 4th symbol display device, operation of the accessory, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33) , Or a combination of them), the game state after the end of the continuous announcement effect (“15R probability variation jackpot”, “15R latency probability variation jackpot”, “15R time probability jackpot”, “7R latency probability variation jackpot”, “7R time shortening” A plurality of continuous notice effect modes selected according to “big hit” and “off” may be prepared.

  In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 performs sound lamp control on the number of reserved balls added by “1” when there is a winning (start winning) in the special figure 1 winning port 64b or the special figure 2 winning port 64c. The case where the number of held balls command to be notified to the device 113 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 including the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c as a result of the start winning has been described. However, the type of the counter included in the reserved ball number command may be a part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include values of other counters. In addition, when the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of the values of the respective counters acquired with the start winning prize, the information indicating the values of these counters is included in the reserved ball number command. Instead of this, information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command different from the reserved ball number command, and these values may be notified to the voice lamp control device 113. As another command, a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired in accordance with the start winning prize may be used, or other information such as a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command may be voiced. The value of each counter acquired along with the start winning may be added to the command for notifying the lamp control device 113. As another command, when the value of each counter acquired in accordance with the start winning prize is notified to the audio lamp control device 113, the value of each counter notified to the command is a variable effect corresponding to any number of holding times. Information indicating whether this is the case may be included. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113, based on the information regarding the number of times of holding included in the command, in each area included in the command in any one of the holding information first to fourth areas corresponding to the number of times of holding. A counter value can be stored.

  In the above-described embodiment, the winning in the special figure 1 winning port 64b and the special figure 2 winning port 64c and the passing through the normal symbol gate 67 are each held up to four times. The number is not limited to four times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuating effects based on winning in the special figure 1 winning port 64b or the special figure 2 winning port 64c is divided into four or four in a part of the third symbol display device 81. The area may be displayed in a different form (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of reserved balls, and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the special symbol display device 37, and the light is retained by the light emitting member. You may comprise so that the number of balls may be notified.

  In addition, as shown in the above embodiment, the variation effect that is the variation display of the third symbol is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, It may be performed by moving and displaying the symbols along a predetermined path such as a horizontal direction or an L-shape. In addition, the symbol variation display is not limited to symbol variation effects. For example, one or a plurality of characters can be displayed together with the symbols or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbols. Display is also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variation effect is executed, the case has been described in which the high-speed variation is displayed in which all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize. Instead, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a reduced size so that they cannot be visually recognized, or all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed. Also good.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated may be used.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.
<Group A: Enable / disable specific area>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is launched toward a gaming area provided on the gaming board, and the gaming ball is entered into one of a plurality of entrances provided in the gaming area. When the winning / losing lottery is performed based on the player's entry and the winning / winning lottery is won, the variable closing means, which is normally closed, is opened to give the player a predetermined game value. Is provided.

  In such a gaming machine, a special area is provided through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable entry means can pass, and the special area is controlled to be opened and closed by an opening / closing member or the like. There is a pachinko machine that generates a special game value based on a second advantageous state different from a predetermined game value based on the advantageous state.

  Further, in the pachinko machine, for example, even when the second advantageous state occurs, the second advantageous state does not occur without notifying the player whether or not the second advantageous state occurs. Some perform the notification mode. In other words, the game is performed as if the second advantageous state does not occur for the player, and the game is created to infer whether or not the second advantageous state is given to the player. (For example, patent document 1 (Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2017-148264)).

  However, in the above gaming machine, when the game ball passes through the special area, it is configured to generate the second advantageous state without fail, so when the player visually recognizes that the game ball has passed through the special area, 2. The player will recognize that an advantageous state will occur. For this reason, if the normal notification mode is executed after the player recognizes the occurrence of the second advantageous state due to the passage of the game ball to the special area, the player is provided with the expected interest of the game. However, there is still a room for improvement in this regard.

  The invention of group A has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of games.

A launching means for launching a game ball (eg, a ball launching unit 112a);
A ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 winning opening 64b) into which a game ball launched by the launch means can enter,
Information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entry means;
Determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a);
Using the determination result of the determination means, gaming state changing means for changing the gaming state (for example, jackpot end processing (S415));
When the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, notification means (for example, a third symbol display device) that executes state suggestion notification (for example, “probability change notification effect mode”) that suggests the gaming state to the player. 81)
Variable ball entry means (for example, variable winning device 65) that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or inaccessible and a second state in which a game ball can enter;
By using the determination result by the determination means, the advantage state means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for changing the variable pitching means from the first state to the second state (for example, the big hit state). )When,
In a gaming machine provided with a special area (for example, the right probability variation area 73 and the left probability variation area 74) through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable pitching means can pass,
The gaming state changing means is
Second advantageous state means (for example, probability change transition flag 203i) capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means,
Said advantageous state means comprises:
Special region switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special region (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g or the left probability variation valid flag 203h),
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
When the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, while generating the second advantageous state,
When the game ball passes through the special area that is not effectively set by the special area switching means, it is configured not to generate the second advantageous state,
The notification means includes
Suggestion notification non-execution means (for example, “latency probability variation A The game machine A0 is provided with a “latent probability change effect mode” based on “winning”.

  According to the gaming machine A0, the game ball is launched by the launching means, and the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the entrance means, and the game ball has entered the entrance means. As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and by using the determination result of the determination means, the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, and the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means. When the change is made, the state suggestion notification for notifying the player of the gaming state is executed by the notification means. In addition, variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter is provided, and by using the determination result by the determination means, By the advantageous state means, the variable pitching means is changed from the first state to the second state. In addition, a special area through which game balls that have flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass is provided. Here, a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means can be generated by the second advantageous state means provided in the gaming state changing means. Further, whether or not to enable the special area is switched by the special area switching means provided in the advantageous state means. Then, when the game ball passes through the special area that is effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means, while it is set effectively by the special area switching means. The second advantageous state means is configured not to generate the second advantageous state when the game ball passes through a special area that does not exist. Then, the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means. That is, even if the game ball passes through the special area, if the special area is not effective, the second advantageous state can be prevented, and the game ball passes through the special area that is set to be effective. However, it is not suggested to the player that the second advantageous state occurs at that timing. Thereby, even if it is a case where the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot be generated. Then, the suggestion notification non-execution means does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the effectively set special area, and informs the player that it is in the second advantageous state. When the recognition is not performed, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special area. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to create game characteristics that allow the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine A0,
Said advantageous state means comprises:
In one advantageous state, unit game execution means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for executing a unit game (for example, one round) for changing the variable pitching means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times ), And
The special area switching means includes
In at least any one of the unit games, a unit game valid means for validating the special area (for example, the second round of “latency probability variation B”);
A game characterized in that the unit game valid means includes valid suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of valid setting of probability variation areas 73 and 74) that does not suggest that the special area is valid. Machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A1, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A0, the following effects are achieved. That is, the unit game executing means provided in the advantageous state means executes the unit game for changing the variable pitching means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times in one advantageous state. Then, the special area is made valid in at least one of the unit games by the unit game valid means provided in the special area switching means, and the unit game is executed by the effective suggestion non-execution means also provided in the special area switching means. The effective means does not suggest that the special area is effective. As a result, the special area becomes effective in any of the unit games in the advantageous state, and it is not suggested that the special area is effective. By flowing the game ball into the special area during the unit game, the second advantageous state is obtained. Can be generated. Therefore, it is impossible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special area. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to create game characteristics that allow the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine A1,
The special area is
The first special region (for example, the right probability variation region 73);
A second special region different from the first special region (for example, the left probability variation region 74),
The special area switching means includes
In the predetermined unit game, one of the first special area and the second special area is enabled, and the other is not enabled.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the special area, a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area are provided, and in the predetermined unit game by the special area switching means, the first special area or the second special area. Either one is valid and the other is not valid. Thereby, by providing an effective pattern of a plurality of special areas, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the first special area or the second special area which is set effectively, and as a result, the game is performed in the second advantageous state. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game that makes the player infer whether or not the game is present.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A2,
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
When it is determined by the determination means that the first lottery result (for example, the “latency probability variation A” lottery result) that can generate the second advantageous state, the advantageous state based on the first lottery result A valid passage means for passing the game ball to the special area that is valid (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g and turning on the right probability variation region solenoid 73b);
When it is determined by the determination means that the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state (for example, the result of lottery “Time A”), during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, Passage preventing means that prevents the game ball from passing through the special area that is valid (for example, the right probability variation valid flag 203g is turned on and the right probability variation region solenoid 73b is turned off). .

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A0 to A2, the following effects are produced. That is, when it is determined by the determination means that the first lottery result can generate the second advantageous state, the effective state passing means provided in the second advantageous state means is in the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. In addition, it is configured to pass the game ball to a special area that is effective. On the other hand, when it is determined by the determination means that the second lottery result does not generate the second advantageous state, the passage blocking means provided in the second advantageous state means during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, The game ball is configured not to pass through a special area that is effective. That is, in the case of the first lottery result that can generate the second advantageous state, the second advantageous state is generated while the second advantageous state is not generated by passing the game ball to the effective special area. In the case of the second lottery result, the second advantageous state is not generated by preventing the game ball from passing through the valid special area. As a result, even if the game ball passes through the special area while generating the second advantageous state depending on whether or not the game ball is passed to the valid special area, the second advantageous state if the special area is not valid. It is possible to create a game that makes the player guess whether or not a game is being played in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game. There is.

In gaming machine A3,
First opening / closing means for opening and closing the first special area (for example, a right probability changing area opening / closing plate 73a);
A second opening / closing means for opening and closing the second special area (for example, a left probability changing area opening and closing plate 74a),
The effective passage means is
When the first special area is valid by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the first special area,
When the second special area is valid by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the second special area.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the first special area is opened and closed by the first opening and closing means, and the second special area is opened and closed by the second opening and closing means. Then, when the first special area is valid by the special area switching means by the effective passage means, the first opening / closing means is opened, and a game ball flows into the first special area, and the special area switching means When the special area is valid, the second opening / closing means is opened, and a game ball flows into the second special area. Thus, when the second advantageous state is generated, there is an effect that the second advantageous state can be appropriately generated by passing the game ball to the effective special area.

In gaming machine A4,
The passage blocking means is
When the first special area is effective by the special area switching means, the first opening and closing means is closed, and the game ball is not allowed to flow into the first special area,
When the second special area is valid by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is closed to prevent the game ball from flowing into the second special area.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first special area is valid by the special game switching means by the passage preventing means, the first opening / closing means is closed and the game ball is not flown into the first special area. Similarly, when the second special area is valid by the special area switching means by the passage blocking means, the second opening / closing means is closed and the game ball is not flown into the second special area. Accordingly, when the second advantageous state is not generated, even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area by not passing the game ball to the effective special area, A situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur can be created. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game that allows the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine A4 or A5,
The passage blocking means is
When the first special area is valid by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the second special area,
When the second special area is valid by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the first special area.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4 or A5, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first special area is valid by the special game switching means by the passage preventing means, the second opening / closing means is opened and the game ball is flowed into the second special area. Similarly, when the second special area is valid by the special area switching means by the passage blocking means, the first opening / closing means is opened and a game ball is flowed into the first special area. As a result, even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area by passing the game ball to the special area that is not effective when the second advantageous state is not generated, 2. It is possible to create a situation where an advantageous state cannot be generated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game that allows the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines A3 to A6,
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
Effective pattern determining means (for example, probability variation area effective table 202g) for determining whether to enable the special area for each unit game using the determination result by the determining means;
An opening / closing pattern determining means (for example, probability variation area opening / closing table 202f) for determining whether or not a game ball is allowed to flow into the special area for each unit game using the determination result by the determining means;
An opening / closing pattern identical means (for example, an opening / closing pattern “X1”) for making the opening / closing pattern of the special region the same by the opening / closing pattern determination means in the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
Effective pattern mismatching means (for example, effective patterns “A” and “B”) for making the effective pattern of the special area different by the effective pattern determining means depending on the first lottery result and the second lottery result. A gaming machine A7 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A3 to A6, the following effects are produced. That is, the effective pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to enable the special area for each unit game using the determination result by the determining means. Similarly, the open / close pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not the game ball is allowed to flow into the special area for each unit game using the determination result by the determining means. The opening / closing pattern identical means makes the first lottery result and the second lottery result have the same opening / closing pattern of the special area by the opening / closing pattern determining means, and the effective pattern mismatch means makes the first lottery result and the second lottery result. Thus, the effective pattern of the special area by the effective pattern determining means is made different. Thereby, the opening / closing pattern of the special area is made the same in the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the lottery result cannot be identified only by the opening / closing pattern, while the special area is different in the first lottery result and the second lottery result. By making different effective patterns, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and creates a game property that allows the player to infer whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state. Thus, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A3 to A7,
Display means for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result (for example, a special symbol display device 37);
Result discriminating means for making it difficult to discriminate the first lottery result or the second lottery result based on the display result by the display means (for example, 127 kinds of display patterns of “time reduction C” and “latency probability fluctuation C” A gaming machine A8 comprising 127 kinds of display patterns, and each display pattern is a random pattern having no regularity of eight LEDs.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A3 to A7, the following effects are produced. That is, the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed by the display means, and the first lottery result or the second lottery result is configured to be difficult to identify by the display result by the display means by the result identification difficult means. Thus, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, it is difficult to identify which lottery result is to prevent the player from recognizing the second advantageous state. If the second advantageous state cannot be recognized only by passing the game ball in the special area, and whether or not the second advantageous state also occurs in the display result of the display means. I can't recognize it. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to create game characteristics that allow the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A8,
The special area is
A gaming machine A9, which is disposed at a position visible to a player.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines A0 to A8, the following effects are achieved. That is, the special area is disposed at a position that can be visually recognized by the player. Thereby, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that the game ball has passed through the special area, and to create a game property that makes it possible to guess whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, thereby improving the interest of the game. effective.

In any of the gaming machines A4 to A9,
The first opening / closing means and / or the second opening / closing means are:
A gaming machine A10 that is formed of a transparent or translucent material.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A4 to A9, the following effects are produced. That is, the first opening / closing means and / or the second opening / closing means are formed of a transparent or translucent material. This makes it difficult for the player to determine the driving mode of the first opening / closing means and / or the second opening / closing means, so that the first opening / closing means can be opened and flow into the first special area, or the second opening / closing means. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the situation can be opened to flow into the second special area. As a result, it becomes difficult to recognize the inflow pattern into each special area in advance, and it is possible to create a gameability that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state. There is an effect that it can be improved.

<Group B: Double attacker x probability variation area>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is launched toward a gaming area provided on the gaming board, and the gaming ball is entered into one of a plurality of entrances provided in the gaming area. When the winning / losing lottery is performed based on the player's entry and the winning / winning lottery is won, the variable closing means, which is normally closed, is opened to give the player a predetermined game value. Is provided.

  In such a gaming machine, a special area is provided through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable entry means can pass, and the special area is controlled to be opened and closed by an opening / closing member or the like. There is a pachinko machine that generates a special game value based on a second advantageous state different from a predetermined game value based on the advantageous state.

  Further, in the pachinko machine, for example, even when the second advantageous state occurs, the second advantageous state does not occur without notifying the player whether or not the second advantageous state occurs. Some perform the notification mode. In other words, the game is performed as if the second advantageous state does not occur for the player, and the game is created to infer whether or not the second advantageous state is given to the player. (For example, patent document 1 (Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2017-148264)).

  However, in the above gaming machine, when the game ball passes through the special area, it is configured to generate the second advantageous state without fail, so when the player visually recognizes that the game ball has passed through the special area, 2. The player will recognize that an advantageous state will occur. For this reason, if the normal notification mode is executed after the player recognizes the occurrence of the second advantageous state due to the passing of the game ball to the special area, the player is provided with the expected interest of the game. However, there is still a room for improvement in this regard.

  The invention of group B has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

A launching means for launching a game ball (eg, a ball launching unit 112a);
A ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 winning opening 64b) into which a game ball launched by the launch means can enter,
Information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entry means;
Determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a);
A game state changing means for changing the gaming state by using the determination result of the determining means (for example, from “normal gaming state” to “latency probability fluctuation state”);
When the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, notification means (for example, a third symbol display device) that executes state suggestion notification (for example, “probability change notification effect mode”) that suggests the gaming state to the player. 81)
A first variable entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) and a second variable entry that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which a game ball can enter. Means (for example, the second variable winning device 76);
By using the determination result by the determination unit, an advantageous state (for example, a big hit state) in which one or both of the first variable ball entering unit and the second variable ball entering unit are changed from the first state to the second state. ) Advantageous state means (for example, opening of the big prize opening 65a and the second big prize opening 76a at the time of big hit),
In a gaming machine provided with a special area (for example, the right probability variation area 73 and the left probability variation area 74) through which the game balls flowing into the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means can pass,
The gaming state changing means is
Second advantageous state means capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means (for example, generation of “probability variation state”),
Said advantageous state means comprises:
Special region switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special region (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g or the left probability variation valid flag 203h),
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
When the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, while generating the second advantageous state,
When the game ball passes through the special area that is not effectively set by the special area switching means, it is configured not to generate the second advantageous state,
The notification means includes
Suggestion notification non-execution means that does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the special region that is effectively set by the special region switching means (for example, “latency probability variation A The game machine B0 is provided with a “latent probability change effect mode” based on the winning of “”.

  According to the gaming machine B0, a game ball is launched by the launching means, and the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the entrance means, and the game ball has entered the entrance means. As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and by using the determination result of the determination means, the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, and the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means. When the change is made, the state suggestion notification for notifying the player of the gaming state is executed by the notification means. Further, a first variable ball entry means and a second variable ball entry means are provided, which can change between a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter, and a determination means. By using the determination result according to the above, the advantageous state means changes one or both of the first variable entry ball means and the second variable entry ball means from the first state to the advantageous state. In addition, a special area through which game balls that have flowed into the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means can pass is provided. Here, a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means can be generated by the second advantageous state means provided in the gaming state changing means. Here, whether or not to enable the special area is switched by the special area switching means provided in the advantageous state means. Then, when the game ball passes through the special area that is effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means, while it is set effectively by the special area switching means. The second advantageous state means is configured not to generate the second advantageous state when the game ball passes through a special area that does not exist. Then, the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means. That is, even if the game ball passes through the special area, if the special area is not effective, the second advantageous state can be prevented, and the game ball passes through the special area that is set to be effective. However, it is not suggested to the player that the second advantageous state occurs at that timing. Thereby, even if it is a case where the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot be generated. Therefore, when the suggestion notification non-execution means does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state and does not allow the player to recognize that it is in the second advantageous state, It is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing. Also, by providing the second advantageous state by a combination of opening and closing of the two variable entry means and the validity or invalidity of the second special area, if the variation of each combination is not grasped in advance, the second advantageous state Can not recognize that occurs. As a result, it can be difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and it is possible to create a game property that makes the player guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine B0,
Said advantageous state means comprises:
1 unit game in which a unit game (for example, one round) for changing the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state is executed a plurality of times. Execution means (for example, jackpot processing (S103));
Each time the unit game is executed in the predetermined advantageous state by the unit game execution means, the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means are alternately placed in the second state without interruption. The game machine B1 is characterized by comprising alternating winning means (for example, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are opened without an interval time).

  According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B0, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the unit game execution means provided in the advantageous state means executes the unit game for changing the first variable entry means or the second variable entry means from the first state to the second state multiple times in one advantageous state. Is done. Each time a unit game is executed in a predetermined advantageous state by the unit game execution means, the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means are provided by the alternating entry means provided in the advantage state means. The second state is alternately repeated without interruption.

  Conventionally, when the advantageous state is digested by opening or closing one variable ball entry means, it is necessary to provide an interval time for closing the variable ball entry means, and it takes time to digest the advantageous state, There is a possibility that the game will be prolonged and the player may be awakened, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the first and second variable pitching means are alternately set to the second state without interruption in units of the predetermined advantageous state by the alternate pitching means, The interval time associated with the closing of the variable entry means can be eliminated. Therefore, the advantageous state can be quickly digested, and the game is not delayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being awakened. Also, by providing the second advantageous state by a combination of opening and closing of the two variable entry means and the validity or invalidity of the second special area, if the variation of each combination is not grasped in advance, the second advantageous state Can not recognize that occurs. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs while reducing the player's thinking time in an advantageous state that is performed quickly, and playing a game in the second advantageous state. It is possible to create a game that allows the player to infer whether or not, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B0 or B1,
A first flow path (for example, a guide path 72) for flowing down the game ball that has flowed into the first variable pitching means;
A second flow path (for example, a communication path 77) for flowing down the game ball that has flowed into the second variable pitching means;
A gaming machine B2 comprising merging means (for example, a merging portion 77a) for merging the first channel and the second channel on the upstream side of the special region.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B0 or B1, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the first variable ball entry means is caused to flow down by the first flow path, and the game ball that has flowed into the second variable ball entry means is flowed down through the second flow path. The flow path and the second flow path are joined on the upstream side of the special region. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the first variable ball entry means and the game ball that has flowed into the second variable ball entry means can both flow into the special area. By configuring in this way, there is no need to provide a special area for each variable ball entry means, so there is an effect that the number of parts in the gaming machine can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

In gaming machine B1 or B2,
The alternating ball entry means includes:
One advantageous state appears, and then a new advantageous state appears within a predetermined period of time (for example, during the “probability fluctuation state” or “time reduction state”, that is, a big hit in the second special symbol). In this case, each time the unit game is executed, the gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means are alternately switched to the second state without interruption.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the one advantageous state appears by the alternate pitching means, and then a new advantageous state appears within a predetermined period, the first variable pitching means and the first variable pitching means each time the unit game is executed. The two variable pitching means are alternately in the second state without interruption.

  Conventionally, in a situation where an advantageous state is continuously generated within a predetermined period (so-called “village”), the player desires a quick game, and in such a situation, the variable in the advantageous state is variable. If time is required for the interval time associated with closing the ball entry means, there is a possibility that the player will be easily awakened to the game.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B3, when a new advantageous state appears within a predetermined period, each time the unit game is executed, the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means are The second state can be made alternately without interruption, and the advantageous state can be quickly digested. Therefore, in the situation where the advantageous state is continuously generated, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are alternately switched to the second state without interruption, and a quick game desired by the player is achieved. It can be realized, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from being awakened and to improve the interest of the game. Also, by providing the second advantageous state by a combination of opening and closing of the two variable entry means and the validity or invalidity of the second special area, if the variation of each combination is not grasped in advance, the second advantageous state Can not recognize that occurs. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs while reducing the player's thinking time in an advantageous state that is performed quickly, and playing a game in the second advantageous state. It is possible to create a game that allows the player to infer whether or not, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3,
The special area switching means includes
In at least any one of the unit games, a unit game valid means for validating the special area (for example, the second round of “latency probability variation B”);
A game characterized in that the unit game valid means includes valid suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of valid setting of probability variation areas 73 and 74) that does not suggest that the special area is valid. Machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are produced. That is, the special area is validated in at least one of the unit games by the unit game valid means provided in the special area switching means, and the unit game is not performed by the effective suggestion non-execution means provided in the special area switching means. The effective means does not suggest that the special area is effective. As a result, the special area becomes effective in any of the unit games in the advantageous state, and it is not suggested that the special area is effective. By flowing the game ball into the special area during the unit game, the second advantageous state is obtained. Can be generated. Therefore, it is impossible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special area. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to create game characteristics that allow the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4,
The special area is
The first special region (for example, the right probability variation region 73);
A second special region different from the first special region (for example, the left probability variation region 74),
The special area switching means includes
In the predetermined unit game, one of the first special area and the second special area is enabled, and the other is not enabled.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are produced. That is, as the special area, a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area are provided, and in the predetermined unit game by the special area switching means, the first special area or the second special area. Either one is valid and the other is not valid. Thereby, by providing an effective pattern of a plurality of special areas, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the first special area or the second special area which is set effectively, and as a result, the game is performed in the second advantageous state. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game that makes the player infer whether or not the game is present.

In any of gaming machines B0 to B5,
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
When it is determined by the determination means that the first lottery result (for example, the “latency probability variation A” lottery result) that can generate the second advantageous state, the advantageous state based on the first lottery result A valid passage means for passing the game ball to the special area that is valid (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g and turning on the right probability variation region solenoid 73b);
When it is determined by the determination means that the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state (for example, the result of lottery “Time A”), during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, Passage preventing means (for example, turning on the right probability variation effective flag 203g and turning off the right probability variation region solenoid 73b) that prevents the game ball from passing through the special region that is valid is provided. .

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B0 to B5, the following effects are produced. That is, when it is determined by the determination means that the first lottery result can generate the second advantageous state, the effective state passing means provided in the second advantageous state means is in the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. In addition, it is configured to pass the game ball to a special area that is effective. On the other hand, when it is determined by the determination means that the second lottery result does not generate the second advantageous state, the passage blocking means provided in the second advantageous state means during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, The game ball is configured not to pass through a special area that is effective. That is, in the case of the first lottery result that can generate the second advantageous state, the second advantageous state is generated while the second advantageous state is not generated by passing the game ball to the effective special area. In the case of the second lottery result, the second advantageous state is not generated by preventing the game ball from passing through the valid special area. As a result, even if the game ball passes through the special area while generating the second advantageous state depending on whether or not the game ball is passed to the valid special area, the second advantageous state if the special area is not valid. It is possible to create a game that makes the player guess whether or not a game is being played in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game. There is.

In gaming machine B6,
First opening / closing means for opening and closing the first special area (for example, a right probability changing area opening / closing plate 73a);
A second opening / closing means for opening and closing the second special area (for example, a left probability changing area opening and closing plate 74a),
The effective passage means is
When the first special area is valid by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the first special area,
When the second special area is valid by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the second special area.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B6, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the first special area is opened and closed by the first opening and closing means, and the second special area is opened and closed by the second opening and closing means. Then, when the first special area is valid by the special area switching means by the effective passage means, the first opening / closing means is opened, and a game ball flows into the first special area, and the special area switching means When the special area is valid, the second opening / closing means is opened, and a game ball flows into the second special area. Thus, when the second advantageous state is generated, there is an effect that the second advantageous state can be appropriately generated by passing the game ball to the effective special area.

In gaming machine B7,
The passage blocking means is
When the first special area is effective by the special area switching means, the first opening and closing means is closed, and the game ball is not allowed to flow into the first special area,
A gaming machine B8, wherein when the second special area is valid by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is closed to prevent a game ball from flowing into the second special area.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B7, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first special area is valid by the special game switching means by the passage preventing means, the first opening / closing means is closed and the game ball is not flown into the first special area. Similarly, when the second special area is valid by the special area switching means by the passage blocking means, the second opening / closing means is closed and the game ball is not flown into the second special area. Accordingly, when the second advantageous state is not generated, even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area by not passing the game ball to the effective special area, A situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur can be created. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game that allows the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine B7 or B8,
The passage blocking means is
When the first special area is valid by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the second special area,
When the second special area is valid by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the first special area.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B7 or B8, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first special area is valid by the special game switching means, the second opening / closing means is opened by the passage prevention means, and the game ball is flowed into the second special area. Further, when the second special area is valid by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is opened by the passage blocking means, and the game ball is flowed into the first special area. As a result, even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area by passing the game ball to the special area that is not effective when the second advantageous state is not generated, 2. It is possible to create a situation where an advantageous state cannot be generated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game that allows the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines B6 to B9,
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
An effective pattern determining means (for example, probability variation area effective table 202g) for determining whether or not to enable the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means;
An opening / closing pattern determining means (for example, a probability variation area opening / closing table 202f) for determining whether or not a game ball is allowed to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means;
An opening / closing pattern identical means (for example, an opening / closing pattern “X1”) for making the opening / closing pattern of the special region the same by the opening / closing pattern determination means in the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
Effective pattern mismatching means (for example, effective patterns “A” and “B”) for making the effective pattern of the special area different by the effective pattern determining means depending on the first lottery result and the second lottery result. A gaming machine B10 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B6 to B9, the following effects are produced. In other words, the effective pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether to activate the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Similarly, the open / close pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to flow the game ball into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. The opening / closing pattern identical means makes the first lottery result and the second lottery result have the same opening / closing pattern of the special area by the opening / closing pattern determining means, and the effective pattern mismatch means makes the first lottery result and the second lottery result. Thus, the effective pattern of the special area by the effective pattern determining means is made different. Thereby, the opening / closing pattern of the special area is made the same in the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the lottery result cannot be identified only by the opening / closing pattern, while the special area is different in the first lottery result and the second lottery result. By making different effective patterns, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and creates a game property that allows the player to infer whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state. Thus, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of gaming machines B6 to B10,
Display means for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result (for example, a special symbol display device 37);
Result discriminating means for making it difficult to discriminate the first lottery result or the second lottery result based on the display result by the display means (for example, 127 kinds of display patterns of “time reduction C” and “latency probability fluctuation C” A gaming machine B11 comprising 127 kinds of display patterns, and each display pattern is a random pattern having no regularity of eight LEDs.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B6 to B10, the following effects are produced. That is, the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed by the display means, and the first lottery result or the second lottery result is configured to be difficult to identify by the display result by the display means by the result identification difficult means. Thus, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, it is difficult to identify which lottery result is to prevent the player from recognizing the second advantageous state. If the second advantageous state cannot be recognized only by passing the game ball in the special area, and whether or not the second advantageous state also occurs in the display result of the display means. I can't recognize it. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to create game characteristics that allow the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines B0 to B11,
The special area is
A gaming machine B12, which is disposed at a position visible to a player.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B0 to B11, the following effects are produced. That is, the special area is disposed at a position that can be visually recognized by the player. Thereby, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that the game ball has passed through the special area, and to create a game property that makes it possible to guess whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, thereby improving the interest of the game. effective.

<C group: Distribution to two passages by one drive member>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is launched toward a gaming area provided on the gaming board, and the gaming ball is entered into one of a plurality of entrances provided in the gaming area. When the winning / losing lottery is performed based on the player's entry and the winning / winning lottery is won, the variable closing means, which is normally closed, is opened to give the player a predetermined game value. Is provided.

  In such a gaming machine, a special area is provided through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable entry means can pass, and the special area is controlled to be opened and closed by an opening / closing member or the like. There is a pachinko machine that generates a special game value based on a second advantageous state different from a predetermined game value based on the advantageous state.

  Further, in the pachinko machine, for example, even when the second advantageous state occurs, the second advantageous state does not occur without notifying the player whether or not the second advantageous state occurs. Some perform the notification mode. In other words, the game is performed as if the second advantageous state does not occur for the player, and the game is created to infer whether or not the second advantageous state is given to the player. (For example, patent document 1 (Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2017-148264)).

  However, in the above gaming machine, when the game ball passes through the special area, it is configured to generate the second advantageous state without fail, so when the player visually recognizes that the game ball has passed through the special area, 2. The player will recognize that an advantageous state will occur. For this reason, if the normal notification mode is executed after the player recognizes the occurrence of the second advantageous state due to the passing of the game ball to the special area, the player is provided with the expected interest of the game. However, there is still a room for improvement in this regard.

  The invention of group C is made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

A launching means for launching a game ball (eg, a ball launching unit 112a);
A ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 winning opening 64b) into which a game ball launched by the launch means can enter,
Information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entry means;
Determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a);
Using the determination result of the determination means, gaming state changing means for changing the gaming state (for example, jackpot end processing (S415));
When the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, notification means (for example, a third symbol display device) that executes state suggestion notification (for example, “probability change notification effect mode”) that suggests the gaming state to the player. 81)
Variable ball entry means (for example, variable winning device 65) that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or inaccessible and a second state in which a game ball can enter;
By using the determination result by the determination means, the advantage state means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for changing the variable pitching means from the first state to the second state (for example, the big hit state). ) And
The gaming state changing means is
In a gaming machine comprising second advantageous state means (for example, probability change transition flag 203i) capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means,
A first special area (for example, the right probability variation area 73) and a second special area (for example, the left probability variation area 74) through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable entry means can pass;
Opening / closing means that can open and close the first special region or the second special region (for example, the probability variation region opening and closing plate 78c),
Driving means for opening / closing the opening / closing means (for example, a probability changing region opening / closing motor 78a);
Special region switching means for switching between valid and invalid of the first special region or the second special region (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g or the left probability variation valid flag 203h),
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
When generating the second advantageous state, driving the opening and closing means by the driving means to open the first special area or the second special area that is made effective,
When the second advantageous state is not generated, the driving means drives the opening / closing means to close the activated first special area or the second special area,
The notification means includes
Suggestion notification non-execution means that does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the first special region or the second special region that is effectively set by the special region switching means. (For example, “latency probability changing effect mode” based on winning of “latency probability variation A”).

  According to the gaming machine C0, the game ball is launched by the launching means, and the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the entrance means, and the game ball has entered the entrance means. As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and by using the determination result of the determination means, the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, and the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means. When the change is made, the state suggestion notification for notifying the player of the gaming state is executed by the notification means. In addition, variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter is provided, and by using the determination result by the determination means, By the advantageous state means, the variable pitching means is changed from the first state to the second state. Moreover, the second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means can be generated by the second advantageous state means provided in the gaming state changing means. Here, a first special region and a second special region through which a game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass are provided, and the first special region or the second special region can be opened and closed by the opening / closing means, and the driving means Thus, the opening / closing means is driven to open / close. In addition, the special area switching means switches the validity or invalidity of the first special area or the second special area. Then, when the second advantageous state is generated, the opening / closing means is driven by the driving means by the second advantageous state means, and the effective first special region or second special region is opened. Further, when the second advantageous state is not generated, the opening / closing means is driven by the driving means by the second advantageous state means, and the first special region or the second special region which is made effective is closed. And the state corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the first special area or the second special area which is effectively set by the special area switching means by the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means The suggestion notification is configured not to be executed. That is, even if a game ball passes through the first special area or the second special area, the second advantageous state can be prevented from being generated unless the first special area or the second special area is valid. Even if the game ball passes through the effectively set first special area or second special area, it is not suggested to the player that the second advantageous state occurs at that timing. Thereby, even if it is a case where it is a case where a player recognizes passage of the game ball to the 1st special field or the 2nd special field, the situation which cannot generate the 2nd advantageous state can be created. Therefore, when the suggestion notification non-execution means does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state and does not allow the player to recognize that it is the second advantageous state, It is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game balls in the two special areas. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to create game characteristics that allow the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine C0,
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
When the second advantageous state is generated, the driving means drives the opening / closing means to close the second special area or the first special area which is not effective,
When the second advantageous state is not generated, the opening / closing means is driven by the driving means to open the second special area or the first special area which is not effective. C1.

  According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C0, the following effects are produced. That is, when the second advantageous state is generated, the opening / closing means is driven by the driving means by the second advantageous state means, and the second special region or the first special region which is not effective is closed. When the second advantageous state is not generated, the opening / closing means is driven by the driving means by the second advantageous state means, and the second special region or the first special region which is not effective is opened. As a result, when the second advantageous state is to be generated, the first special region or the second special region which is not effectively set is closed, and the ball is moved to the first special region or the second special region which is set to be effective. Can be passed. Therefore, when it is desired to generate the second advantageous state, it is possible to pass the ball to the first special region or the second special region that is effectively set, and the second advantageous state can be reliably generated. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine C0 or C1,
The driving means includes
Driving the opening / closing means in a first direction to open the first special area and close the second special area (for example, forward rotation driving);
Driving the opening / closing means in a second direction different from the first direction, thereby opening the second special region and closing the first special region (for example, reverse driving); A gaming machine C2 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C0 or C1, the following effects are produced. That is, by driving the opening / closing means in the first direction by the first direction driving means provided in the driving means, the first special area is opened and the second special area is closed. Also, the second special area is opened and the first special area is closed by driving the opening / closing means in a second direction different from the first direction by the second direction driving means provided in the driving means. The

  Conventionally, when a plurality of special areas are provided inside the variable pitching means, and a drive mechanism is provided for each special area, the parts of each drive mechanism must be installed in a small space. The design of the ball means may be complicated.

  In addition, since the above-described parts are provided, the number of parts used in the gaming machine may increase and the manufacturing cost may increase.

  Furthermore, since the drive mechanism is disposed in each special region, maintenance work is required for each drive mechanism, and the maintenance man-hour may increase.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, the opening and closing of the first special area and the second special area can be realized by the driving direction of one driving mechanism, so that the design of the variable pitching means is complicated. In addition, there is an effect that the entire structure of the variable pitching means can be simplified and easily designed.

  Further, the first special area and the second special area are opened / closed or closed by a single drive mechanism, and the first special area and the second special area need not be opened or closed by a plurality of drive mechanisms. The number of parts can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the first special area and the second special area are opened / closed or closed by one drive mechanism, only one drive mechanism needs to be maintained, and the maintenance man-hour of the gaming machine can be reduced. effective.

In the gaming machine C0 or C1,
The first special region is disposed on the upstream side of the second special region,
The driving means includes
Arranged upstream of the first special region and the second special region;
By driving the opening / closing means by a first predetermined amount, the second special region is opened and the first predetermined amount driving unit for closing the first special region (for example, driving the probability changing region opening / closing motor 78a by 60 pulses). )When,
The first special area and the second special area are driven by driving the opening / closing means in the same direction as the driving direction based on the driving of the first predetermined amount and larger than the first predetermined amount. And a second predetermined amount driving means (for example, driving the probability changing region opening / closing motor 78a by 120 pulses).

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C0 or C1, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first special region is disposed upstream of the second special region, and the driving means is disposed upstream of the first special region and the second special region. Then, by driving the first opening / closing means by the first predetermined amount by the first predetermined amount driving means provided in the driving means, the second special area is opened and the first special area is closed. Similarly, the second predetermined amount driving means provided in the driving means drives the opening and closing means in the same direction as the driving based on the first predetermined amount, and by driving a second predetermined amount larger than the first predetermined amount, Both the first special area and the second special area are opened. Thereby, the balls flowing into the first special region or the second special region can be distributed according to the drive amount of one drive mechanism, and the above-mentioned distribution can be performed according to the drive amount of one drive means in one direction. There is no need to provide the driving means, and there is an effect that the playability of the present invention can be realized at a low cost.

In the gaming machine C0 or C1,
The driving means includes
First driving pattern means for opening the first special area and closing the second special area when the driving pattern is the first driving pattern (including the initial position) (for example, the right probability changing area when the driving solenoid is turned off) 73 is opened and the left-side probability changing region 74 is closed),
Second drive pattern means for closing the first special area and opening the second special area when the second drive pattern is different from the first drive pattern (for example, the right-side positive change when the drive solenoid is turned on) A gaming machine C4 comprising: a region 73 is closed and a left-side probability variation region 74 is opened).

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C0 or C1, the following effects are produced. That is, by the first drive pattern means provided in the drive means, the first special area is opened and the second special area is closed in the case of the first drive pattern. Similarly, the second special pattern provided in the drive means closes the first special area and opens the second special area when the second drive pattern is different from the first drive pattern. Thereby, it is possible to distribute the gaming machine balls flowing into the first special area or the second special area by each drive pattern of one drive mechanism, and to realize the playability of the present invention at a low cost. effective.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C4,
The opening / closing means includes
A gaming machine C5, wherein the first special area and the second special area are closed at an initial position of the opening / closing means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C0 to C4, the following effects are produced. That is, the opening / closing means closes the first special area and the second special area at the initial position of the opening / closing means. That is, at the initial position of the opening / closing means, the first special area and the second special area are both closed, so that even if the driving means does not operate normally due to a failure or the like, both special areas are closed. It can be made into the state which carried out. Thereby, inflow of the game ball to the first special area and the second special area can be prevented even at the time of abnormality. Therefore, even if the first special area or the second special area is valid at the time of abnormality, the second advantageous state can be prevented from occurring, and an unexpected disadvantage is caused in the game hall. There is an effect that it can be prevented.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C5,
The variable pitching means is
A gaming machine C6 comprising a discharging means (for example, a discharge passage 75) for discharging the game ball to the outside of the variable pitching means on the downstream side of the first special area and the second special area. .

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C0 to C5, the following effects are produced. In other words, the game balls that have flowed down to the downstream side of the first special area and the second special area are discharged out of the variable ball entry means by the discharge means provided in the variable ball entry means. Thereby, the game balls that have not flowed into the first special area or the second special area can be appropriately discharged out of the variable ball entry means so that the game balls do not stay in the variable ball entry means. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball staying in the variable pitching means from flowing into the first special area or the second special area, and the game ball staying in the variable pitching means is the first special area or There is an effect that it is possible to prevent unexpected disadvantages in the game arcade, such as an unintended occurrence of the second advantageous state due to flowing into the second special area.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C6,
Said advantageous state means comprises:
In one advantageous state, unit game execution means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for executing a unit game (for example, one round) for changing the variable pitching means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times ), And
The special area switching means includes
In at least any one of the unit games, a unit game valid means for validating the special area (for example, the second round of “latency probability variation B”);
A game characterized in that the unit game valid means includes valid suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of valid setting of probability variation areas 73 and 74) that does not suggest that the special area is valid. Machine C7.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C0 to C6, the following effects are produced. That is, the unit game executing means provided in the advantageous state means executes the unit game for changing the variable pitching means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times in one advantageous state. Then, the special area is made valid in at least one of the unit games by the unit game valid means provided in the special area switching means, and the unit game is executed by the effective suggestion non-execution means also provided in the special area switching means. The effective means does not suggest that the special area is effective. As a result, the special area becomes effective in any of the unit games in the advantageous state, and it is not suggested that the special area is effective. By flowing the game ball into the special area during the unit game, the second advantageous state is obtained. Can be generated. Therefore, it is impossible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special area. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to create game characteristics that allow the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C7,
The special area switching means includes
In the predetermined unit game, one of the first special area and the second special area is enabled, and the other is not enabled.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C0 to C7, the following effects are produced. That is, the special area switching means is configured such that one of the first special area and the second special area is valid and the other is not valid in a predetermined unit game. Thereby, by providing an effective pattern of a plurality of special areas, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the first special area or the second special area which is set effectively, and as a result, the game is performed in the second advantageous state. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game that makes the player infer whether or not the game is present.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C8,
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
When it is determined by the determination means that the first lottery result (for example, the “latency probability variation A” lottery result) that can generate the second advantageous state, the advantageous state based on the first lottery result A valid passage means for passing the game ball to the first special area or the second special area that is valid (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g and turning on the right probability variation region solenoid 73b);
When it is determined by the determination means that the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state (for example, the result of lottery “Time A”), during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, Passing preventing means that prevents the game ball from passing through the first special region or the second special region that is valid (for example, the right probability variation effective flag 203g is turned on and the right probability variation region solenoid 73b is turned off). A gaming machine C9 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C0 to C8, the following effects are produced. That is, when it is determined by the determination means that the first lottery result can generate the second advantageous state, the advantageous state based on the first lottery result is provided by the effective passage means provided in the second advantageous state means. The game ball is configured to pass through the first special area or the second special area which is effective. On the other hand, when it is determined by the determination means that the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state, the passage blocking means provided in the second advantageous state means causes the advantageous state based on the second lottery result. The game ball is configured not to pass through the effective first special area or the second special area. That is, in the case of the first lottery result that can generate the second advantageous state, the second advantageous state is generated by passing the game ball to the effective first special region or the second special region, In the case of the second lottery result that does not generate the second advantageous state, the second advantageous state is not generated by preventing the game ball from passing through the valid first special area or the second special area. As a result, the game ball passes through the first special area or the second special area while generating the second advantageous state depending on whether or not the game ball is passed to the valid first special area or the second special area. However, if the first special area or the second special area is not valid, the second advantageous state is not generated, so that the player can guess whether or not the game is performed in the second advantageous state. There is an effect that game play can be created and the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine C9,
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
Effective pattern determining means (for example, probability variation area effective table) for determining whether to enable the first special area or the second special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. 202g)
By using the determination result by the determination means, an open / close pattern determination means (for example, a probability change area) that determines whether or not a game ball is allowed to flow into the first special area or the second special area for each unit game. Opening and closing table 202f),
Opening / closing pattern identical means (for example, opening / closing pattern “X1”) for making the opening / closing pattern of the first special area or the second special area by the opening / closing pattern determination means identical in the first lottery result and the second lottery result )When,
Effective pattern mismatch means (for example, an effective pattern “A”) that makes the effective pattern of the first special area or the second special area different by the effective pattern determination means between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. "B"), and a gaming machine C10.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C9, the following effects are produced. That is, whether or not to validate the first special area or the second special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determination means by the effective pattern determination means provided in the second advantageous state means. It is determined. Similarly, by using the determination result by the determination means by the opening / closing pattern determination means provided in the second advantageous state means, whether the game ball flows into the first special area or the second special area for each unit game. No is determined. Then, the opening / closing pattern identical means causes the first lottery result and the second lottery result to have the same opening / closing pattern of the first special area or the second special area by the opening / closing pattern determination means, and the effective pattern mismatch means The effective pattern of the first special area or the second special area by the effective pattern determining means is made different between the lottery result and the second lottery result. As a result, the opening / closing pattern of the first special region or the second special region is made the same for the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the lottery result cannot be identified only by the opening / closing pattern, while the first lottery result and the first lottery result By making the effective pattern of the first special area or the second special area different from the two lottery results, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and the game is performed in the second advantageous state. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game that makes the player infer whether or not the game is true.

In the gaming machine C9 or C10,
Display means for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result (for example, a special symbol display device 37);
Result discriminating means for making it difficult to discriminate the first lottery result or the second lottery result based on the display result by the display means (for example, 127 types of display patterns of “Time C” and A gaming machine C11 comprising 127 kinds of display patterns, and each display pattern is a random pattern having no regularity of eight LEDs.

  According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C9 or C10, the following effects are produced. That is, the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed by the display means, and the first lottery result or the second lottery result is configured to be difficult to identify by the display result by the display means by the result identification difficult means. Thus, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, it is difficult to identify which lottery result is to prevent the player from recognizing the second advantageous state. The second advantageous state cannot be recognized only by passing the game ball in the first special area or the second special area, and the second advantageous state is also indicated by the display result of the display means. Cannot recognize whether or not As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to create game characteristics that allow the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C11,
The special area is
A gaming machine C12, which is disposed at a position that is visible to a player.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C0 to C11, the following effects are produced. That is, the special area is disposed at a position that can be visually recognized by the player. Thereby, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that the game ball has passed through the special area, and to create a game property that makes it possible to guess whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, thereby improving the interest of the game. effective.

  <Group D: Opportunity to acquire right to change right multiple times during jackpot of 1>

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is launched toward a gaming area provided on the gaming board, and the gaming ball is entered into one of a plurality of entrances provided in the gaming area. When the winning / losing lottery is performed based on the player's entry and the winning / winning lottery is won, the variable closing means, which is normally closed, is opened to give the player a predetermined game value. Is provided.

  In such a gaming machine, a special area is provided through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable entry means can pass, and the special area is controlled to open and close by an opening and closing member or the like, and when the game ball passes the special area, There is a pachinko machine that generates a special game value based on a second advantageous state that is different from a predetermined game value based on the advantageous state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148264).

  However, the timing at which the game ball can pass to the special area is configured to occur only once in one advantageous state. For this reason, if the game ball cannot be flowed into the special region at the above timing due to a game abnormality such as a game ball launch abnormality or a sudden trouble such as poor physical condition of the player, the second advantageous state may be generated. Inability to do so may cause the player to suffer an unexpected disadvantage and arouse the game.

  The invention of group D has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

A launching means for launching a game ball (eg, a ball launching unit 112a);
A ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 winning opening 64b) into which a game ball launched by the launch means can enter,
Information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entry means;
Determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a);
Variable ball entry means (for example, variable winning device 65) that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or inaccessible and a second state in which a game ball can enter;
By using the determination result by the determination means, the advantage state means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for changing the variable pitching means from the first state to the second state (for example, the big hit state). )When,
A special area (for example, the right probability variation area 73 and the left probability variation area 74) through which the game ball flowing into the variable entry means can pass;
In a gaming machine comprising second advantageous state means (for example, probability change transition flag 203i) capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means,
Said advantageous state means comprises:
Special region switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special region (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g or the left probability variation valid flag 203h),
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
When the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, while generating the second advantageous state,
When the game ball passes through the special area that is not effectively set by the special area switching means, it is configured not to generate the second advantageous state,
When the second advantageous state is generated, a plurality of timing inflow means (for example, 3 in the “latency probability variation A”) that causes the game ball to flow into the special area that is effectively set at a plurality of timings during the advantageous state. A gaming machine D0, characterized in that it has a round and a sixth round).

  According to the gaming machine D0, a game ball is launched by the launching means, and the game ball fired by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the entrance means, and the game ball has entered the entrance means. As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determination unit determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition unit. In addition, variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter is provided, and by using the determination result by the determination means, By the advantageous state means, the variable pitching means is changed from the first state to the second state. Also, a special area through which game balls that have flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass is provided. Then, the second advantageous state means can generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means. Here, whether or not to enable the special area is switched by the special area switching means provided in the advantageous state means. Then, when the game ball passes through the special area that is effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means, while it is set effectively by the special area switching means. The second advantageous state means is configured not to generate the second advantageous state when the game ball passes through a special area that does not exist. Further, when the second advantageous state is generated by the plurality of timing inflow means provided in the second advantageous state means, the game balls are flowed into the effective special area at a plurality of timings during the advantageous state. That is, even if the game ball passes through the special area, if the special area is not effective, the second advantageous state can be prevented, and the game ball passes through the special area that is set to be effective. However, it is not suggested to the player that the second advantageous state occurs at that timing. Thereby, even if it is a case where the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot be generated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game that allows the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, when an advantageous state that generates the second advantageous state is won, the game ball can pass through a special area that is effectively set at a plurality of timings during the advantageous state. As a result, even if the game ball cannot be passed to the special area at one timing when the special area is valid, the game ball passes through the special area that is valid at the other timing. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, due to sudden troubles (for example, game abnormalities such as abnormal launches, poor physical condition of the player, etc.), there is a problem in passing the game ball to the special area at the timing when the special area is effective. Even if it is a case, by providing the possibility of passing the game ball to a special area that is valid at the other timing, it is possible to realize a comfortable game without incurring a disadvantage to the player due to an unexpected situation Can do. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being awakened with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine D0,
The special area is
The first special region (for example, the right probability variation region 73);
A second special region different from the first special region (for example, the left probability variation region 74),
The plurality of timing inflow means are
The game ball can be allowed to flow into the first special area that is effective at one timing during the advantageous state, and the second that is effective at another timing different from the first timing during the advantageous state. A gaming machine D1 that allows a game ball to flow into a special area.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D0, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the special area, a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area are provided. The multi-timing inflow means allows the game ball to flow into the first special area which is effective at one timing in the advantageous state, and is effective at another timing different from the one timing in the advantageous state. A game ball can flow into a certain second special area. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in one of the first special area or the second special area, the game ball passes in the other second special area or the first special area. A second advantageous state can be generated. Therefore, there is an effect that a comfortable game can be realized and the interest of the game can be improved without the player suffering a disadvantage due to an unexpected situation.

In the gaming machine D0 or D1,
Said advantageous state means comprises:
In one advantageous state, unit game execution means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for executing a unit game (for example, one round) for changing the variable pitching means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times ), And
The special area switching means includes
In each of at least any two of the unit games, unit game valid means for validating the special area (for example, the third and sixth rounds of “latency probability variation A”);
A game characterized in that the unit game valid means includes valid suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of valid setting of probability variation areas 73 and 74) that does not suggest that the special area is valid. Machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D0 or D1, the following effects are produced. That is, the unit game executing means provided in the advantageous state means executes the unit game for changing the variable pitching means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times in one advantageous state. And, in each of at least any two unit games from the unit game effective means provided in the special area switching means, the special area is made effective, and by the effective suggestion non-execution means also provided in the special area switching means, It is not suggested that the special area is effective by the unit game effective means. As a result, the special area is effective in at least two unit games of the unit game in the advantageous state, and it is not suggested that the special area is effective, and the game ball is moved to the special area in any one of the unit games. By flowing in, the second advantageous state can be generated. Therefore, it is impossible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special area. As a result, while configuring so that the second advantageous state can occur at a plurality of timings, it is possible to create a gameability that allows the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state. There is an effect that the interest of can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D2,
Using the determination result of the determination means, gaming state changing means for changing the gaming state (for example, jackpot end processing (S415));
When the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, notification means (for example, a third symbol display device) that executes state suggestion notification (for example, “probability change notification effect mode”) that suggests the gaming state to the player. 81)
The notification means includes
Suggestion notification non-execution means (for example, “latency probability variation A The game machine D3 is provided with a “latency probability changing effect mode” based on “winning”.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D0 to D2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the gaming state is changed by the game state changing means by using the determination result of the determining means, and the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, the notifying means notifies the player of the gaming state. State suggestion notification is executed. Then, the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means. Thereby, when the suggestion notification non-execution means does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state and does not allow the player to recognize that it is in the second advantageous state, the game ball in the special area Since it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing, it is possible to create a game property that makes the player guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D3,
The special area switching means includes
In the predetermined unit game, one of the first special area and the second special area is enabled, and the other is not enabled.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D0 to D3, the following effects are produced. That is, the special area switching means is configured such that one of the first special area and the second special area is valid and the other is not valid in a predetermined unit game. Thereby, by providing an effective pattern of a plurality of special areas, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the first special area or the second special area which is set effectively, and as a result, the game is performed in the second advantageous state. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game that makes the player infer whether or not the game is present.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D4,
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
When it is determined by the determination means that the first lottery result (for example, the “latency probability variation A” lottery result) that can generate the second advantageous state, the advantageous state based on the first lottery result A valid passage means for passing the game ball to the special area that is valid (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g and turning on the right probability variation region solenoid 73b);
When it is determined by the determination means that the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state (for example, the result of lottery “Time A”), during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, Passage preventing means (for example, turning on the right probability variation effective flag 203g and turning off the right probability variation region solenoid 73b) that prevents the game ball from passing through the special region that is valid is provided. .

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D0 to D4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when it is determined by the determination means that the first lottery result can generate the second advantageous state, the effective state passing means provided in the second advantageous state means is in the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. In addition, it is configured to pass the game ball to a special area that is effective. On the other hand, when it is determined by the determination means that the second lottery result does not generate the second advantageous state, the passage blocking means provided in the second advantageous state means during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, The game ball is configured not to pass through a special area that is effective. That is, in the case of the first lottery result that can generate the second advantageous state, the second advantageous state is generated while the second advantageous state is not generated by passing the game ball to the effective special area. In the case of the second lottery result, the second advantageous state is not generated by preventing the game ball from passing through the valid special area. As a result, even if the game ball passes through the special area while generating the second advantageous state depending on whether or not the game ball is passed to the valid special area, the second advantageous state if the special area is not valid. It is possible to create a game that makes the player guess whether or not a game is being played in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game. There is.

In gaming machine D5,
First opening / closing means for opening and closing the first special area (for example, a right probability changing area opening / closing plate 73a);
A second opening / closing means for opening and closing the second special area (for example, a left probability changing area opening and closing plate 74a),
The effective passage means is
When the first special area is valid by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the first special area,
When the second special area is valid by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the second special area.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first special area is opened and closed by the first opening and closing means, and the second special area is opened and closed by the second opening and closing means. Then, when the first special area is valid by the special area switching means by the effective passage means, the first opening / closing means is opened, and a game ball flows into the first special area, and the special area switching means When the special area is valid, the second opening / closing means is opened, and a game ball flows into the second special area. Thus, when the second advantageous state is generated, there is an effect that the second advantageous state can be appropriately generated by passing the game ball to the effective special area.

In gaming machine D6,
The passage blocking means is
When the first special area is effective by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is closed, and when the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is A gaming machine D7 that is closed.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first special area is valid by the special game switching means by the passage preventing means, the first opening / closing means is closed and the game ball is not flown into the first special area. Similarly, when the second special area is valid by the special area switching means by the passage blocking means, the second opening / closing means is closed and the game ball is not flown into the second special area. Accordingly, when the second advantageous state is not generated, even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area by not passing the game ball to the effective special area, A situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur can be created. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game that allows the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D6 or D7,
The passage blocking means is
When the first special area is valid by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the second special area,
When the second special area is valid by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the first special area.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6 or D7, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first special area is valid by the special game switching means, the second opening / closing means is opened by the passage prevention means, and the game ball is flowed into the second special area. Further, when the second special area is valid by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is opened by the passage blocking means, and the game ball is flowed into the first special area. As a result, even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area by passing the game ball to the special area that is not effective when the second advantageous state is not generated, 2. It is possible to create a situation where an advantageous state cannot be generated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game that allows the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines D5 to D8,
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
An effective pattern determining means (for example, probability variation area effective table 202g) for determining whether or not to enable the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means;
An opening / closing pattern determining means (for example, a probability variation area opening / closing table 202f) for determining whether or not a game ball is allowed to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means;
An opening / closing pattern identical means (for example, an opening / closing pattern “X1”) for making the opening / closing pattern of the special region the same by the opening / closing pattern determination means in the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
Effective pattern mismatching means (for example, effective patterns “A” and “B”) for making the effective pattern of the special area different by the effective pattern determining means depending on the first lottery result and the second lottery result. A gaming machine D9 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D5 to D8, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the effective pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether to activate the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Similarly, the open / close pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not the game ball is allowed to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. The opening / closing pattern identical means makes the first lottery result and the second lottery result have the same opening / closing pattern of the special area by the opening / closing pattern determining means, and the effective pattern mismatch means makes the first lottery result and the second lottery result. Thus, the effective pattern of the special area by the effective pattern determining means is made different. Thereby, the opening / closing pattern of the special area is made the same in the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the lottery result cannot be identified only by the opening / closing pattern, while the special area is different in the first lottery result and the second lottery result. By making different effective patterns, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and creates a game property that allows the player to infer whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state. Thus, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines D5 to D9,
Display means for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result (for example, a special symbol display device 37);
Result discriminating means for making it difficult to discriminate the first lottery result or the second lottery result based on the display result by the display means (for example, 127 kinds of display patterns of “time reduction C” and “latency probability fluctuation C” A gaming machine D10, comprising 127 kinds of display patterns, and each display pattern is a random pattern having no regularity of eight LEDs.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D5 to D9, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed by the display means, and the first lottery result or the second lottery result is configured to be difficult to identify by the display result by the display means by the result identification difficult means. Thus, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, it is difficult to identify which lottery result is to prevent the player from recognizing the second advantageous state. If the second advantageous state cannot be recognized only by passing the game ball in the special area, and whether or not the second advantageous state also occurs in the display result of the display means. I can't recognize it. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to create game characteristics that allow the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D10,
The special area is
A gaming machine D11, which is disposed at a position visible to a player.

  According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D0 to D10, the following effects are produced. That is, the special area is disposed at a position that can be visually recognized by the player. Thereby, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that the game ball has passed through the special area, and to create a game property that makes it possible to guess whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, thereby improving the interest of the game. effective.

  <E group: Valid setting period of probability variation valid flag>

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is launched toward a gaming area provided on the gaming board, and the gaming ball is entered into one of a plurality of entrances provided in the gaming area. When the winning lottery is performed based on the fact that the player enters the ball, and a winning game such as winning is won in the corresponding lottery, a unit game that releases the normally closed variable pitching means is executed a plurality of times, A predetermined game value is given to the player.

  In such a gaming machine, a special area through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable pitching means can pass is provided, and the special area is controlled to be opened and closed by an opening and closing member or the like, and the opening and closing member is opened in a predetermined unit game. There is a pachinko machine that generates a special game value based on a second advantageous state different from a predetermined game value based on the advantageous state when a ball passes through the special region.

  In the pachinko machine, in the advantageous state that can generate the second advantageous state, in the predetermined unit game, the opening / closing member is opened so that the game ball that has flowed into the variable pitching means can flow into the special area, while the second advantageous state can be generated. In the advantageous state where the advantageous state cannot occur, the open / close member is configured to be opened so that the game ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means cannot flow into the special area in the unit game (for example, patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148264)).

  However, in a unit game immediately before the unit game that opens the special area, the game ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means may remain (stay) in the variable ball entry means. In such a case, in spite of the fact that the second advantageous state does not occur at the beginning, the game ball that has flowed in in the previous unit game remains in the variable entry means, so that it passes normally. There is a risk of passing through a special area that cannot be obtained, giving a game value that is not assumed in the game specifications, and causing an unexpected loss in the game hall.

  The invention of Group E has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent an unexpected loss from occurring in a game arcade.

A launching means for launching a game ball (eg, a ball launching unit 112a);
A ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 winning opening 64b) into which a game ball launched by the launch means can enter,
Information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entry means;
Determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a);
Variable ball entry means (for example, variable winning device 65) that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or inaccessible and a second state in which a game ball can enter;
By using the determination result by the determination means, the advantage state means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for changing the variable pitching means from the first state to the second state (for example, the big hit state). )When,
In a gaming machine comprising second advantageous state means (for example, probability change transition flag 203i) capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means,
In one advantageous state, unit game execution means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for executing a unit game (for example, one round) for changing the variable pitching means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times )When,
A special region (for example, the right probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region 74) through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable entry means can pass;
Among the unit games executed by the unit game execution means, special area switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special area in a predetermined first unit game (for example, right probability change valid flag 203g or left probability change) The valid flag 203h is turned on),
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
When the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, while generating the second advantageous state,
When the game ball passes through the special area that is not effectively set by the special area switching means, it is configured not to generate the second advantageous state,
The special area switching means includes
In the first unit game, when the variable pitching means changes from the first state to the second state, effective delay means that does not make the special area valid for a predetermined period (for example, 1 count of rounds) Eyes and 2nd count),
A gaming machine E0 comprising post-period effective means (for example, after the third count of the round) that makes the special area effective after the predetermined period has elapsed.

  According to the gaming machine E0, the game ball is launched by the launching means, and the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the entrance means, and the game ball has entered the entrance means. As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determination unit determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition unit. In addition, variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which a game ball can enter is provided, and by using the determination result by the determination means, By the advantageous state means, the variable pitching means is changed from the first state to the second state. The second advantageous state means may generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means. Here, by the unit game executing means provided in the advantageous state means, in one advantageous state, the unit game for changing the variable pitching means from the first state to the second state is executed a plurality of times. Then, a special area through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable entry means can pass is provided, and among the unit games executed by the unit game execution means, in the predetermined first unit game, the special area is switched by the special area switching means. Whether to enable or not is switched. Then, when the game ball passes through the special area that is effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means, while it is set effectively by the special area switching means. The second advantageous state means is configured not to generate the second advantageous state when the game ball passes through a special area that does not exist. Here, in the first unit game, when the variable pitching means changes from the first state to the second state, the special area is valid for a predetermined period by the effective delay means provided in the special area switching means. Instead, after the predetermined period, the special area is validated by the valid means after the period. In other words, the special area is configured not to be effective when the first unit game is started but after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the variable pitching means has changed from the first state to the second state. As a result, the game ball that has flowed in the unit game before the first unit game remains in the variable entry means even though the advantageous state that does not generate the second advantageous state is won at the beginning. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for an event to pass through an effective special area that should not have been passed through, and to give the player the gaming value as expected in the gaming specification, and to make it unexpected It is possible to prevent the occurrence of loss.

In the gaming machine E0,
The firing means includes
Specific interval launching means for launching game balls at specific intervals (for example, launching game balls at intervals of “0.6 seconds”),
The predetermined period is
In the first unit game, the game machine E1 is a period until a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls of 2 or more flows in.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E0, the following effects are produced. That is, the game balls are fired at specific intervals by the specific interval launch means provided in the launch means, and the predetermined period is a period until a predetermined number of game balls flow in the first unit game. That is, in the first unit game, the special area is not effective until at least two or more predetermined number of game balls flow in. As a result, by not making the special area valid for at least a period more than the specific interval at which the game balls are fired, the game balls that flowed in the unit game before the first unit game should not be able to pass through. It is possible to make it difficult to generate an event that passes through a special area that is valid for the game, giving the player a gaming value as expected in the gaming specifications, and preventing unexpected loss in the game hall There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine E0,
The variable pitching means is
A flow path (for example, a guide path 72) for flowing down the game ball that has flowed into the variable pitching means,
The special area is
Disposed at a predetermined position of the flow path,
The predetermined period is
The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that it has a period equal to or longer than a period during which a game ball flows into the variable ball entry means and flows down the flow path to the predetermined position.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E0, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means is caused to flow down by the flow path provided in the variable ball entry means, and a special area is provided at a predetermined position of the flow path. A period longer than the period in which the game ball flows into the variable entry means and then flows down the flow path to a predetermined position is defined as a predetermined period. In other words, the special area is configured not to be effective at least until it flows into the variable pitching means and flows down to a predetermined position where the special area is disposed. As a result, the special area can be made effective after the game balls that have flowed in the unit game before the first unit game flow down to the downstream side of the special area. Despite winning, it makes it difficult for the game balls that flowed in in the unit game before the first unit game to pass through the special area that was supposed to be unable to pass through. be able to. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player a gaming value as expected in the gaming specification and prevent an unexpected loss from occurring in the game hall.

In any of the gaming machines E0 to E2,
The variable pitching means is
First variable pitching means (for example, variable winning device 65);
A second variable pitching means (for example, a second variable winning device 76) different from the variable pitching means,
Said advantageous state means comprises:
In the predetermined advantageous state, every time the unit game is executed, an alternate pitching means (for example, the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means are alternately and intermittently placed in the second state). A variable winning device 65 and a second variable winning device 76 are opened without an interval time), and a first flow path (for example, a guide passage 72) for flowing down the game ball that has flowed into the first variable winning means,
A second flow path (for example, a communication path 77) for flowing down the game ball that has flowed into the second variable pitching means;
A gaming machine E3, comprising: merging means (for example, a merging portion 77a) for merging the first channel and the second channel on the upstream side of the special region.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E0 to E2, the following effects are produced. That is, as the variable pitching means, a first variable pitching means and a second pitching means different from the first pitching means are provided. Then, by unit game execution means provided in the advantageous state means, in one advantageous state, the unit game for changing the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state is executed a plurality of times. Is done. Similarly, by the alternate pitching means provided in the advantageous state means, the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means are alternately alternately interrupted each time a unit game is executed in a predetermined advantageous state. The second state is set. Here, the game ball that has flowed into the first variable ball entry means is caused to flow down by the first flow path, and the game ball that has flowed into the second variable ball entry means is caused to flow down by the second flow path, The first flow path and the second flow path are joined on the upstream side of the special region.

  Conventionally, in a unit game immediately before a unit game that opens a special area, a game ball that has flowed into the variable entry means may remain (stay) in the variable entry means. In such a case, in spite of the advantageous state in which the second advantageous state does not occur at the beginning, the game ball that flows in and remains in the previous unit game passes through a special area that cannot normally pass. Therefore, there is a possibility that an unexpected game value is given according to the game specifications and an unexpected loss is generated in the game hall.

  In particular, in the case of an advantageous state in which unit games are digested alternately without interruption using two variable entry means, and when a special area is shared by the two variable entry means, the unit Since there is no (less) interval time between games, when one of the first variable pitching means or the second variable pitching means is in the second state based on the first unit game, before the first unit game In this unit game, there is a high possibility that the game ball that has flowed into the other second variable ball entry means or the first variable ball entry means remains, and an unexpected loss is likely to occur in the game field.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E3, the special area is not at the start of the first unit game, but after the first variable entry means or the second variable entry means changes from the first state to the second state. It is configured to be effective after a predetermined period has elapsed. As a result, the game ball that flowed in the unit game before the first unit game, which was originally won in the advantageous state that does not generate the second advantageous state, is supposed to be effective that should not be able to pass through. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event that passes through the designated special area, to give the player a gaming value as expected in the gaming specification, and to prevent an unexpected loss in the gaming area. There is an effect that.

In any of the gaming machines E0 to E3,
Using the determination result of the determination means, gaming state changing means for changing the gaming state (for example, jackpot end processing (S415));
When the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, notification means (for example, a third symbol display device) that executes state suggestion notification (for example, “probability change notification effect mode”) that suggests the gaming state to the player. 81)
The notification means includes
Suggestion notification non-execution means that does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the special region that is effectively set by the special region switching means (for example, “latency probability variation A The game machine E4 is provided with a “latency probability changing effect mode” based on “winning”.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E0 to E3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the gaming state is changed by the game state changing means by using the determination result of the determining means, and the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, the notifying means notifies the player of the gaming state. State suggestion notification is executed. Then, the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means. Thereby, when the suggestion notification non-execution means does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state and does not allow the player to recognize that it is in the second advantageous state, the game ball in the special area Since it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing, it is possible to create a game property that makes the player guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines E0 to E4,
The special area is
The first special region (for example, the right probability variation region 73);
A second special region different from the first special region (for example, the left probability variation region 74),
The special area switching means includes
In the predetermined unit game, one of the first special area and the second special area is enabled, and the other is not enabled.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines E0 to E4, the following effects are achieved. That is, as a special area, a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area are provided, and either the first special area or the second special area is provided for each unit game by the special area switching means. It is configured such that one of them is valid and the other is not valid. Thereby, by providing an effective pattern of a plurality of special areas, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the first special area or the second special area which is set effectively, and as a result, the game is performed in the second advantageous state. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game that makes the player infer whether or not the game is present.

In any of the gaming machines E0 to E5,
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
When it is determined by the determination means that the first lottery result (for example, the “latency probability variation A” lottery result) that can generate the second advantageous state, the advantageous state based on the first lottery result A valid passage means for passing the game ball to the special area that is valid (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g and turning on the right probability variation region solenoid 73b);
When it is determined by the determination means that the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state (for example, the result of lottery “Time A”), during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, Passage preventing means (for example, turning on the right probability variation effective flag 203g and turning off the right probability variation region solenoid 73b) that prevents the game ball from passing through the special region that is valid is provided. .

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E0 to E5, the following effects are produced. That is, when it is determined by the valid passage means provided in the second advantageous state means that the first lottery result can cause the second advantageous state to be generated by the determining means, the advantageous state based on the first lottery result Inside, it is configured to pass the game ball to a special area that is valid. On the other hand, when the passage blocking means provided in the second advantageous state means determines that the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state to be generated by the determining means, during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result The game ball is configured not to pass through a special area that is effective. That is, in the case of the first lottery result that can generate the second advantageous state, the second advantageous state is generated while the second advantageous state is not generated by passing the game ball to the effective special area. In the case of the second lottery result, the second advantageous state is not generated by preventing the game ball from passing through the valid special area. As a result, even if the game ball passes through the special area while generating the second advantageous state depending on whether or not the game ball is passed to the valid special area, the second advantageous state if the special area is not valid. It is possible to create a game that makes the player guess whether or not a game is being played in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game. There is.

In gaming machine E6,
First opening / closing means for opening and closing the first special area (for example, a right probability changing area opening / closing plate 73a);
A second opening / closing means for opening and closing the second special area (for example, a left probability changing area opening and closing plate 74a),
The effective passage means is
When the first special area is valid by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the first special area,
When the second special area is valid by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the second special area.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E6, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the first special area is opened and closed by the first opening and closing means, and the second special area is opened and closed by the second opening and closing means. Then, when the first special area is valid by the special area switching means by the effective passage means, the first opening / closing means is opened, and a game ball flows into the first special area, and the special area switching means When the special area is valid, the second opening / closing means is opened, and a game ball flows into the second special area. Thus, when the second advantageous state is generated, there is an effect that the second advantageous state can be appropriately generated by passing the game ball to the effective special area.

In gaming machine E7,
The passage blocking means is
When the first special area is valid by the special area switching means, the first opening and closing means is closed to prevent the game ball from flowing into the first special area,
When the second special area is valid by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is closed to prevent the game ball from flowing into the second special area.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E7, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first special area is valid by the special game switching means, the first opening / closing means is closed by the passage preventing means, and the game ball is not flowed into the first special area. Further, when the second special area is valid by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is closed by the passage preventing means, and the game ball is not flown into the second special area. Accordingly, when the second advantageous state is not generated, even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area by not passing the game ball to the effective special area, A situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur can be created. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game that allows the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E7 or E8,
The passage blocking means is
When the first special area is valid by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the second special area,
When the second special area is valid by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the first special area.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E7 or E8, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first special area is valid by the special game switching means, the second opening / closing means is opened by the passage prevention means, and the game ball is flowed into the second special area. Further, when the second special area is valid by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is opened by the passage blocking means, and the game ball is flowed into the first special area. As a result, even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area by passing the game ball to the special area that is not effective when the second advantageous state is not generated, 2. It is possible to create a situation where an advantageous state cannot be generated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game that allows the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines E6 to E9,
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
An effective pattern determining means (for example, probability variation area effective table 202g) for determining whether or not to enable the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means;
An opening / closing pattern determining means (for example, a probability variation area opening / closing table 202f) for determining whether or not a game ball is allowed to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means;
An opening / closing pattern identical means (for example, an opening / closing pattern “X1”) for making the opening / closing pattern of the special region the same by the opening / closing pattern determination means in the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
Effective pattern mismatching means (for example, effective patterns “A” and “B”) for making the effective pattern of the special area different by the effective pattern determining means depending on the first lottery result and the second lottery result. A gaming machine E10 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E6 to E9, the following effects are produced. In other words, the effective pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether to activate the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Similarly, the open / close pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not the game ball is allowed to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. The opening / closing pattern identical means makes the first lottery result and the second lottery result have the same opening / closing pattern of the special area by the opening / closing pattern determining means, and the effective pattern mismatch means makes the first lottery result and the second lottery result. Thus, the effective pattern of the special area by the effective pattern determining means is made different. Thereby, the opening / closing pattern of the special area is made the same in the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the lottery result cannot be identified only by the opening / closing pattern, while the special area is different in the first lottery result and the second lottery result. By making different effective patterns, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and creates a game property that allows the player to infer whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state. Thus, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines E6 to E10,
Display means for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result (for example, a special symbol display device 37);
Result discriminating means for making it difficult to discriminate the first lottery result or the second lottery result based on the display result by the display means (for example, 127 kinds of display patterns of “time reduction C” and “latency probability fluctuation C” A gaming machine E11 comprising 127 kinds of display patterns, and each display pattern is a random pattern having no regularity of eight LEDs.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E6 to E10, the following effects are produced. That is, the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed by the display means, and the first lottery result or the second lottery result is configured to be difficult to identify by the display result by the display means by the result identification difficult means. Thus, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, it is difficult to identify which lottery result is to prevent the player from recognizing the second advantageous state. If the second advantageous state cannot be recognized only by passing the game ball in the special area, and whether or not the second advantageous state also occurs in the display result of the display means. I can't recognize it. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to create game characteristics that allow the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines E0 to E11,
The special area is
A gaming machine E12, which is disposed at a position visible to a player.

  According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E0 to E11, the following effects are produced. That is, the special area is disposed at a position that can be visually recognized by the player. Thereby, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that the game ball has passed through the special area, and to create a game property that makes it possible to guess whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, thereby improving the interest of the game. effective.

<Group F: Interval time and opening time are synchronized>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is launched toward a gaming area provided on the gaming board, and the gaming ball is entered into one of a plurality of entrances provided in the gaming area. When the winning lottery is performed based on the fact that the player enters the ball, and a winning game such as winning is won in the corresponding lottery, a unit game that releases the normally closed variable pitching means is executed a plurality of times, A predetermined game value is given to the player.

  In such a gaming machine, a special area through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable pitching means can pass is provided, and the special area is controlled to be opened and closed by an opening and closing member or the like, and the opening and closing member is opened in a predetermined unit game. There is a pachinko machine that generates a special game value based on a second advantageous state different from a predetermined game value based on the advantageous state when a ball passes through the special region.

  Further, in the pachinko machine, for example, even when the second advantageous state occurs, the second advantageous state does not occur without notifying the player whether or not the second advantageous state occurs. Some perform the notification mode. In other words, the game is performed as if the second advantageous state does not occur for the player, and the game is created to infer whether or not the second advantageous state is given to the player. (For example, patent document 1 (Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2017-148264)).

  However, since the gaming machine is configured to generate the second advantageous state without exception when the game ball passes through the special area, the player can grasp the unit game in which the special area is released in advance, and the unit When the player visually recognizes that the game ball has passed through the special area in the game, the player recognizes that the second advantageous state occurs. For this reason, if the normal notification mode is executed after the player recognizes the occurrence of the second advantageous state due to the passing of the game ball to the special area, the player is provided with the expected interest of the game. However, there is still a room for improvement in this regard.

  The invention of group F has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

A launching means for launching a game ball (eg, a ball launching unit 112a);
A ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 winning opening 64b) into which a game ball launched by the launch means can enter,
Information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entry means;
Determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a);
Using the determination result of the determination means, gaming state changing means for changing the gaming state (for example, jackpot end processing (S415));
When the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, notification means (for example, a third symbol display device) that executes state suggestion notification (for example, “probability change notification effect mode”) that suggests the gaming state to the player. 81)
Variable ball entry means (for example, variable winning device 65) that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or inaccessible and a second state in which a game ball can enter;
By using the determination result by the determination means, the advantage state means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for changing the variable pitching means from the first state to the second state (for example, the big hit state). )
In one advantageous state, unit game execution means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for executing a unit game (for example, one round) for changing the variable pitching means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times )When,
In the one advantageous state, after the unit game is executed, the variable pitching means is changed from the second state to the first state, and then the waiting game (for example, interval time) is changed to the second state again. Standby game execution means to be executed (for example, S461 in the open process (S424));
A special region (for example, the right probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region 74) through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable entry means can pass;
Special region switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special region (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g or the left probability variation valid flag 203h),
The gaming state changing means is
When the game ball passes through the special area that is effectively set by the special area switching means, second advantageous state means (for example, probability change transition) that can generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means. Flag 203i),
The unit game execution means is
Pseudo standby execution means for executing a pseudo standby game (for example, pseudo interval time) in which the variable pitching means is in the first state for a period equivalent to or substantially equivalent to the standby game during the predetermined unit game. With
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
When the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, while generating the second advantageous state,
When the game ball passes through the special area that is not effectively set by the special area switching means, it is configured not to generate the second advantageous state,
The notification means includes
Suggestion notification non-execution means that does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the special region that is effectively set by the special region switching means (for example, “latency probability variation A The game machine F0 is provided with a “latent probability change effect mode” based on “winning”.

  According to the gaming machine F0, a game ball is launched by the launching means, and the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the entrance means, and the game ball has entered the entrance means. As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and by using the determination result of the determination means, the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, and the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means. When the change is made, the state suggestion notification for notifying the player of the gaming state is executed by the notification means. In addition, variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter is provided, and by using the determination result by the determination means, By the advantageous state means, the variable pitching means is changed from the first state to the second state. Here, in one advantageous state, the unit game execution means executes the unit game for changing the variable pitching means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times. In one advantageous state, the standby game execution means performs the unit game. After the game is executed, the waiting game is executed until the variable pitching means is changed from the second state to the first state and then is changed to the second state again. Then, a special area through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable pitching means can pass is provided, and whether or not to enable the special area is switched by the special area switching means. Further, when the game ball passes through the special area that is effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means by the second advantageous state means provided in the gaming state changing means. Can occur. Here, by the pseudo standby execution means provided in the unit game execution means, during the predetermined unit game, there is a pseudo standby game in which the variable pitching means is in the first state for a period equivalent to or substantially equivalent to the standby game. Executed. Then, when the game ball passes through the special area that is effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means, while it is set effectively by the special area switching means. The second advantageous state means is configured not to generate the second advantageous state when the game ball passes through a special area that does not exist. Then, the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means prevents the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state from being executed at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means. Composed. That is, even if the game ball passes through the special area, if the special area is not effective, the second advantageous state can be prevented, and the game ball passes through the special area that is set to be effective. However, it is not suggested to the player that the second advantageous state occurs at that timing. Further, by making it difficult for the player to distinguish between the standby game and the pseudo standby game, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the unit game being executed. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the unit game in which the special area is valid, and to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs. Therefore, when the suggestion notification non-execution means does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state and does not allow the player to recognize that it is in the second advantageous state, the game is performed in the second advantageous state. It is possible to create a game that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being performed, and to improve the interest of the game.

  The “period equivalent to or substantially equivalent to the standby game” may be any period as long as it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the standby time and the pseudo standby time. For example, the standby time And a period in which the pseudo standby time completely coincides, a period in which a difference in time difference (for example, about 0.2 seconds) that is difficult for humans to recognize is generated in the standby time and the pseudo standby time, and the like.

In the gaming machine F0,
The special area switching means includes
A gaming machine F1 comprising: a predetermined timing valid means for validating the special area at a predetermined timing other than the pseudo standby game by the pseudo standby execution means during the unit game.

  According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F0, the following effects are produced. That is, the special area is made effective at least at a predetermined timing other than the pseudo standby game by the pseudo standby execution means during the unit game by the predetermined timing valid means provided in the special area switching means. This enables the special area in a situation where the variable pitching means is in the second state, and allows the game ball to pass through the special area, thereby playing the special area when it is desired to generate the second advantageous state. There is an effect that the sphere can be passed and the second advantageous state can be surely generated.

In the gaming machine F0 or F1,
The unit game execution means is
The length of the period of the pseudo standby game executed by the pseudo standby execution means and the length of the period of the second state period in which the variable pitching means in the unit game is in the second state are the same. A game machine F2 that executes the unit game.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F0 or F1, the following effects are produced. That is, the length of the period of the pseudo standby game executed by the pseudo standby execution means by the unit game execution means is the same as the length of the second state period in which the variable pitching means during the unit game is in the second state. A unit game is executed so that As a result, it is difficult to distinguish each of the standby game and the pseudo standby game only, and it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to grasp the number of unit games being executed.

In gaming machine F2,
The unit game execution means is
The gaming machine F3, wherein the second state period is executed a plurality of times during one unit game.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the following effects are produced. That is, the second state period is executed a plurality of times during one unit game by the unit game execution means. Thereby, there is an effect that the number of unit games being executed can be made more difficult for the player to grasp.

In the gaming machine F2 or F3,
The pseudo standby execution means includes
The gaming machine F4, wherein the pseudo standby game is executed a plurality of times during one unit game.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2 or F3, the following effects are produced. That is, the pseudo standby execution means executes the pseudo standby game a plurality of times during one unit game. As a result, there is an effect that it becomes difficult to distinguish between the standby game and the pseudo standby game, and it becomes more difficult for the player to grasp the number of unit games being executed.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F4,
A game characterized by comprising, by the predetermined timing valid means, valid suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of valid setting of probability variation areas 73 and 74) that does not suggest that the special area is valid. Machine F5.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F0 to F4, the following effects are produced. That is, the effective suggestion non-execution means does not suggest that the special area is effective by the predetermined timing game effective means. As a result, the special area becomes effective in any of the unit games in the advantageous state, and it is not suggested that the special area is effective. By flowing the game ball into the special area during the unit game, the second advantageous state is obtained. Can be generated. Therefore, it is impossible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special area. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to create game characteristics that allow the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F5,
The special area is
The first special region (for example, the right probability variation region 73);
A second special region different from the first special region (for example, the left probability variation region 74),
The special area switching means includes
In the predetermined unit game, one of the first special area and the second special area is enabled, and the other is not enabled.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F0 to F5, the following effects are produced. That is, as the special area, a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area are provided, and in the predetermined unit game by the special area switching means, the first special area or the second special area. Either one is valid and the other is not valid. Thereby, by providing an effective pattern of a plurality of special areas, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the first special area or the second special area which is set effectively, and as a result, the game is performed in the second advantageous state. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game that makes the player infer whether or not the game is present.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F6,
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
When it is determined by the determination means that the first lottery result (for example, the “latency probability variation A” lottery result) that can generate the second advantageous state, the advantageous state based on the first lottery result A valid passage means for passing the game ball to the special area that is valid (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g and turning on the right probability variation region solenoid 73b);
When it is determined by the determination means that the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state (for example, the result of lottery “Time A”), during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, Passage preventing means (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g and turning off the right probability variation region solenoid 73b) that prevents the game ball from passing through the special region that is valid is provided. .

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines F0 to F6, the following effects are achieved. That is, when it is determined by the determination means that the first lottery result can generate the second advantageous state, the effective state passing means provided in the second advantageous state means is in the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. In addition, it is configured to pass the game ball to a special area that is effective. On the other hand, when it is determined by the determination means that the second lottery result does not generate the second advantageous state, the passage blocking means provided in the second advantageous state means during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, The game ball is configured not to pass through a special area that is effective. That is, in the case of the first lottery result that can generate the second advantageous state, the second advantageous state is generated while the second advantageous state is not generated by passing the game ball to the effective special area. In the case of the second lottery result, the second advantageous state is not generated by preventing the game ball from passing through the valid special area. As a result, even if the game ball passes through the special area while generating the second advantageous state depending on whether or not the game ball is passed to the valid special area, the second advantageous state if the special area is not valid. It is possible to create a game that makes the player guess whether or not a game is being played in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game. There is.

In gaming machine F7,
First opening / closing means for opening and closing the first special area (for example, a right probability changing area opening / closing plate 73a);
A second opening / closing means for opening and closing the second special area (for example, a left probability changing area opening and closing plate 74a),
The effective passage means is
When the first special area is valid by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the first special area,
When the second special area is valid by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the second special area, F8.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F7, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first special area is opened and closed by the first opening and closing means, and the second special area is opened and closed by the second opening and closing means. Then, when the first special area is valid by the special area switching means by the effective passage means, the first opening / closing means is opened, and a game ball flows into the first special area, and the special area switching means When the special area is valid, the second opening / closing means is opened, and a game ball flows into the second special area. Thus, when the second advantageous state is generated, there is an effect that the second advantageous state can be appropriately generated by passing the game ball to the effective special area.

In gaming machine F8,
The passage blocking means is
When the first special area is valid by the special area switching means, the first opening and closing means is closed, and the game ball does not flow into the first special area,
A gaming machine F9, wherein when the second special area is valid by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is closed to prevent a game ball from flowing into the second special area.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F8, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first special area is valid by the special game switching means, the first opening / closing means is closed by the passage preventing means, and the game ball is not flowed into the first special area. Further, when the second special area is valid by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is closed by the passage preventing means, and the game ball is not flown into the second special area. Accordingly, when the second advantageous state is not generated, even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area by not passing the game ball to the effective special area, A situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur can be created. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game that allows the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine F8 or F9,
The passage blocking means is
When the first special area is valid by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the second special area,
When the second special area is valid by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the first special area.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F8 or F9, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first special area is valid by the special game switching means, the second opening / closing means is opened by the passage prevention means, and the game ball is flowed into the second special area. Further, when the second special area is valid by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is opened by the passage blocking means, and the game ball is flowed into the first special area. As a result, even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area by passing the game ball to the special area that is not effective when the second advantageous state is not generated, 2. It is possible to create a situation where an advantageous state cannot be generated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game that allows the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines F7 to F10,
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
An effective pattern determining means (for example, probability variation area effective table 202g) for determining whether or not to enable the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means;
An opening / closing pattern determining means (for example, a probability variation area opening / closing table 202f) for determining whether or not a game ball is allowed to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means;
An opening / closing pattern identical means (for example, an opening / closing pattern “X1”) for making the opening / closing pattern of the special region the same by the opening / closing pattern determination means in the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
Effective pattern mismatching means (for example, effective patterns “A” and “B”) for making the effective pattern of the special area different by the effective pattern determining means depending on the first lottery result and the second lottery result. A gaming machine F11 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F7 to F10, the following effects are produced. In other words, the effective pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether to activate the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Similarly, the open / close pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not the game ball is allowed to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. The opening / closing pattern identical means makes the first lottery result and the second lottery result have the same opening / closing pattern of the special area by the opening / closing pattern determining means, and the effective pattern mismatch means makes the first lottery result and the second lottery result. Thus, the effective pattern of the special area by the effective pattern determining means is made different. Thereby, the opening / closing pattern of the special area is made the same in the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the lottery result cannot be identified only by the opening / closing pattern, while the special area is different in the first lottery result and the second lottery result. By making different effective patterns, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and creates a game property that allows the player to infer whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state. Thus, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines F7 to F11,
Display means for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result (for example, a special symbol display device 37);
Result discriminating means for making it difficult to discriminate the first lottery result or the second lottery result based on the display result by the display means (for example, 127 kinds of display patterns of “time reduction C” and “latency probability fluctuation C” A gaming machine F12 comprising 127 kinds of display patterns, and each display pattern is a random pattern having no regularity of eight LEDs.

  According to the gaming machine F12, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines F7 to F11, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed by the display means, and the first lottery result or the second lottery result is configured to be difficult to identify by the display result by the display means by the result identification difficult means. Thus, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, it is difficult to identify which lottery result is to prevent the player from recognizing the second advantageous state. If the second advantageous state cannot be recognized only by passing the game ball in the special area, and whether or not the second advantageous state also occurs in the display result of the display means. I can't recognize it. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to create game characteristics that allow the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F12,
The special area is
A gaming machine F13, which is disposed at a position visible to a player.

  According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F0 to F12, the following effects are produced. That is, the special area is disposed at a position that can be visually recognized by the player. Thereby, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that the game ball has passed through the special area, and to create a game property that makes it possible to guess whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, thereby improving the interest of the game. effective.

In gaming machines F0 to F13,
The unit game is
A pure unit game in which one unit game is ended as the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition after the variable pitching means is changed from the first state to the second state;
After changing the variable pitching means from the first state to the second state, the pseudo standby game is changed to the first state, and then further changed to the second state. A gaming machine F14, comprising: a pseudo unit game for ending one unit game as the first state.

  According to the gaming machine F14, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines F0 to F13, the following effects are achieved. That is, as a unit game, a pure unit game is provided in which one unit game is ended as a first state based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition after the variable pitching means is changed from the first state to the second state. . Similarly, as a unit game, the variable pitching means is changed from the first state to the second state, then the pseudo standby game is changed to the first state, and then further changed to the second state. As the first state, a pseudo unit game for ending one unit game is provided. Thereby, there is an effect that the variation of the unit game can be provided and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Group G: Operation check open before main release>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is launched toward a gaming area provided on the gaming board, and the gaming ball is entered into one of a plurality of entrances provided in the gaming area. When the winning / losing lottery is performed based on the player's entry and the winning / winning lottery is won, the variable closing means, which is normally closed, is opened to give the player a predetermined game value. Is provided.

  In such a gaming machine, a special area is provided through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable entry means can pass, and the special area is controlled to open and close by an opening and closing member or the like, and when the game ball passes the special area, There is a pachinko machine that generates a special game value based on a second advantageous state that is different from a predetermined game value based on the advantageous state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148264).

  However, in the above gaming machine, if some kind of abnormality occurs and the opening / closing member is not opened, the game ball cannot flow into the special area, and the player may suffer an unexpected disadvantage.

  The invention of group G has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that suppresses a disadvantage to a player.

A launching means for launching a game ball (eg, a ball launching unit 112a);
A ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 winning opening 64b) into which a game ball launched by the launch means can enter,
Information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entry means;
Determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a);
Variable ball entry means (for example, variable winning device 65) that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or inaccessible and a second state in which a game ball can enter;
By using the determination result by the determination means, the advantage state means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for changing the variable pitching means from the first state to the second state (for example, the big hit state). )When,
In a gaming machine comprising second advantageous state means (for example, probability change transition flag 203i) capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means,
A special region (for example, the right probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region 74) through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable entry means can pass;
Opening / closing means for opening and closing the special region (for example, the right probability changing region opening / closing plate 73a and the left probability changing region opening / closing plate 74a),
Drive means for opening and closing the opening and closing means (for example, right probability variation region solenoid 73b and left probability variation region solenoid 74b),
The driving means includes
Book release execution means for executing book release that allows a game ball to flow into the special area (for example, release of “2000 ms” based on a third count win);
Prior to execution of the book release by the book release execution means, provisional release execution means for executing provisional release for releasing the opening / closing means for a shorter time than the book release (for example, opening of “60 ms” based on the first count win) )When,
Temporary release determination means for determining whether or not the provisional release by the provisional release execution means has been normally executed (for example, the right probability change region solenoid 73b and the left probability change region solenoid 74b are normally operated based on the first count winning) To determine whether or not)
An abnormality notification means (for example, error notification) for notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the opening / closing means when the provisional opening determination means determines that the temporary opening is not normally executed. A gaming machine G0 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine G0, a game ball is launched by the launching means, and the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the entrance means, and the game ball has entered the entrance means. As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determination unit determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition unit. In addition, variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter is provided, and by using the determination result by the determination means, By the advantageous state means, the variable pitching means is changed from the first state to the second state. The second advantageous state means may generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means. Here, a special area through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass is provided, the special area is opened / closed by the opening / closing means, and the opening / closing means is driven to open / close by the driving means. Further, the book opening execution means provided in the driving means performs the book opening so that the game ball can flow into the special area, and the provisional opening execution means provided in the driving means also performs the book opening by the book opening execution means. Before execution, provisional opening is performed in which the opening / closing means is opened for a shorter time than the main opening. Similarly, the provisional release determination means provided in the drive means determines whether or not the provisional release by the provisional release execution means has been executed normally. If the provisional release determination means has not executed the provisional release normally. When the determination is made, the abnormality notification means notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the opening / closing means. Thus, it is possible to determine whether or not the special area is normally released by executing provisional release before flowing the game ball into the special area, and if the special area is not released, This can be recognized at an early stage by the notification. Therefore, it is possible to recognize early that the game ball cannot be allowed to flow into the special area before the main opening, and to allow the game shop clerk to recognize that fact. As a result, the store clerk of the game hall can deal with the player after grasping the abnormality of the opening and closing means, and can suppress the disadvantage to the player by not being given the second advantageous state, There is an effect.

In gaming machine G0,
A gaming machine G1 comprising game progress stopping means for stopping the progress of a game when the provisional release determining means determines that the provisional release is not normally executed.

  According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G0, the following effects are produced. That is, when it is determined by the provisional release determination means that the provisional release is not normally executed, the progress of the game is stopped by the game progress stop means. As a result, by stopping the progress of the game at the stage where an abnormality that the special area is not normally released is recognized, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem such that the game ball does not pass through the special area that can occur thereafter. It becomes possible and it has the effect that it can suppress giving a disadvantage to a player.

In gaming machine G1,
A gaming machine G2 comprising game resuming means for resuming a game based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition when a game is stopped by the game progress stopping means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the game is stopped by the game progress stopping means, the game is restarted by the game restarting means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Thereby, for example, by stopping the progress of the game at the stage when the abnormality in which the special area is not normally released is recognized, it is possible to restart the game after the stop after the abnormality is resolved, and the second advantageous state is There is an effect that it can suppress giving a disadvantage to a player by not giving.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G2,
The provisional opening execution means is
The gaming machine G3, wherein the opening / closing means is driven to open so that the game balls cannot or cannot flow into the special area.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G0 to G2, the following effects are produced. In other words, the opening / closing means is driven to open by the temporary opening execution means so that it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to flow into the special area. Thereby, by preventing the game ball from flowing into the special area at the time of provisional release, for example, it is possible to prevent an unexpected event such as a game ball staying in the variable ball entry means flowing into the special area, There is an effect that it is possible to give a player a game value as expected in the game specification and prevent an unexpected loss in the game hall.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G3,
The book opening execution means includes
A main opening determination means (for example, a probability change area opening / closing table 202f) for determining whether or not to execute the main opening;
Execution means for executing the book release when the book release decision means decides to perform the book release (for example, opening the right-side probability changing region 73 in the first round of “Time A”); Prepared,
The provisional opening execution means is
The gaming machine G4, wherein the temporary release is executed even when the execution means does not execute the full release.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G0 to G3, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the main opening determination means provided in the main opening execution means determines whether or not to perform the main opening, and when the main opening determination means determines to execute the main opening, the execution means This release is executed. The temporary release is executed by the temporary release execution means even when the execution means does not execute the actual release. Thereby, even when the special area is not fully opened, it is possible to recognize whether or not the opening / closing means can be normally opened to allow the game ball to flow into the special area. It is possible to recognize at an early stage that it cannot be allowed to flow into the game hall, and to make the game store clerk or the like aware of that. As a result, the store clerk of the game hall can deal with the player after grasping the abnormality of the opening and closing means, and can suppress the disadvantage to the player by not being given the second advantageous state, There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G4,
The special area is
The first special region (for example, the right probability variation region 73);
A second special region different from the first special region (for example, the left probability variation region 74),
The opening / closing means includes
First opening / closing means for opening and closing the first special area (for example, a right probability changing area opening / closing plate 73a);
A second opening / closing means for opening and closing the second special area (for example, a left probability changing area opening and closing plate 74a),
The book opening execution means includes
Opening one of the first opening / closing means or the second opening / closing means to perform the main opening,
The provisional opening execution means is
The game machine G5, wherein the temporary opening is executed by opening both the first opening and closing means and the second opening and closing means.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G0 to G4, the following effects are produced. That is, a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area are provided in the special area, and the first special area is opened and closed by the first opening and closing means provided in the opening and closing means. The second special area is opened and closed by the second opening and closing means provided in the means. Then, the first opening / closing means opens either the first opening / closing means or the second opening / closing means to perform the main opening, and the temporary opening execution means opens both the first opening / closing means and the second opening / closing means. And provisional release is executed. As a result, even if the first opening of the first special area or the second special area is not executed, the temporary opening is executed by both the first opening means and the second opening means, and both opening and closing means are normally opened and are specially opened. It is possible to recognize whether or not it is possible to allow a game ball to flow into the area. Therefore, it is possible to recognize at an early stage that the game ball cannot be allowed to flow into the special area, and to allow the game shop clerk to recognize that fact. As a result, the store clerk of the game hall can deal with the player after grasping the abnormality of the opening and closing means, and can suppress the disadvantage to the player by not being given the second advantageous state, There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G5,
Special region switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special region (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g or the left probability variation valid flag 203h),
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
When the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, while generating the second advantageous state,
The gaming machine G6 is configured so as not to generate the second advantageous state when a game ball passes through the special area that is not effectively set by the special area switching means.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines G0 to G5, the following effects are achieved. That is, whether or not to enable the special area is switched by the special area switching means. Then, when the game ball passes through the special area that is effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means, while it is set effectively by the special area switching means. The second advantageous state means is configured not to generate the second advantageous state when the game ball passes through a special area that does not exist. Thereby, even if the game ball passes through the special area, the second advantageous state can be prevented from occurring unless the special area is valid. Therefore, even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area, a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot be generated can be created, and the interest of the game can be improved. There is an effect that.

In any of gaming machines G0 to G6,
Using the determination result of the determination means, gaming state changing means for changing the gaming state (for example, jackpot end processing (S415));
When the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, notification means (for example, a third symbol display device) that executes state suggestion notification (for example, “probability change notification effect mode”) that suggests the gaming state to the player. 81), and
The notification means includes
Suggestion notification non-execution means that does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the special region that is effectively set by the special region switching means (for example, “latency probability variation A The game machine G7 is provided with a “latent probability change effect mode” based on the winning of “”.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines G0 to G6, the following effects are achieved. That is, by using the determination result of the determining means, when the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means and the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, the gaming state is notified to the player by the notifying means. A state suggestion notification is performed. Then, the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means. Configured. Thereby, when the suggestion notification non-execution means does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state and does not allow the player to recognize that it is in the second advantageous state, the game ball in the special area It is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing through. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to create game characteristics that allow the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine G6 or G7,
Said advantageous state means comprises:
In one advantageous state, unit game execution means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for executing a unit game (for example, one round) for changing the variable pitching means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times ), And
The special area switching means includes
In at least any one of the unit games, a unit game valid means for validating the special area (for example, the second round of “latency probability variation B”);
A game characterized in that the unit game valid means includes valid suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of valid setting of probability variation areas 73 and 74) that does not suggest that the special area is valid. Machine G8.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G6 or G7, the following effects are produced. That is, the unit game executing means provided in the advantageous state means executes the unit game for changing the variable pitching means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times in one advantageous state. Then, the special area is made valid in at least one of the unit games by the unit game valid means provided in the special area switching means, and the unit game is executed by the effective suggestion non-execution means also provided in the special area switching means. The effective means does not suggest that the special area is effective. As a result, the special area becomes effective in any of the unit games in the advantageous state, and it is not suggested that the special area is effective. By flowing the game ball into the special area during the unit game, the second advantageous state is obtained. Can be generated. Therefore, it is impossible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special area. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to create game characteristics that allow the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine G8,
The special area switching means includes
In the predetermined unit game, one of the first special area and the second special area is enabled, and the other is not enabled.

  According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G8, the following effects are produced. That is, the special area switching means is configured such that one of the first special area and the second special area is valid and the other is not valid in a predetermined unit game. Thereby, by providing an effective pattern of a plurality of special areas, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the first special area or the second special area which is set effectively, and as a result, the game is performed in the second advantageous state. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game that makes the player infer whether or not the game is present.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G9,
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
When it is determined by the determination means that the first lottery result (for example, the “latency probability variation A” lottery result) that can generate the second advantageous state, the advantageous state based on the first lottery result A valid passage means for passing the game ball to the special area that is valid (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g and turning on the right probability variation region solenoid 73b);
When it is determined by the determination means that the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state (for example, the result of lottery “Time A”), during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, Passage preventing means (for example, turning on the right probability variation effective flag 203g and turning off the right probability variation region solenoid 73b) that prevents the game ball from passing through the special region that is valid is provided. .

  According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G0 to G9, the following effects are produced. That is, when it is determined by the determination means that the first lottery result can generate the second advantageous state, the effective state passing means provided in the second advantageous state means is in the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. In addition, it is configured to pass the game ball to a special area that is effective. On the other hand, when it is determined by the determination means that the second lottery result does not generate the second advantageous state, the passage blocking means provided in the second advantageous state means during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, The game ball is configured not to pass through a special area that is effective. That is, in the case of the first lottery result that can generate the second advantageous state, the second advantageous state is generated while the second advantageous state is not generated by passing the game ball to the effective special area. In the case of the second lottery result, the second advantageous state is not generated by preventing the game ball from passing through the valid special area. As a result, even if the game ball passes through the special area while generating the second advantageous state depending on whether or not the game ball is passed to the valid special area, the second advantageous state if the special area is not valid. It is possible to create a game that makes the player guess whether or not a game is being played in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game. There is.

In gaming machine G10,
The effective passage means is
When the first special area is valid by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the first special area,
When the second special area is valid by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the second special area.

  According to the gaming machine G11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G10, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the first special area is valid by the special area switching means by the effective passage means, the first opening / closing means is opened and a game ball flows into the first special area, and the special area switching means When the special area is valid, the second opening / closing means is opened, and a game ball flows into the second special area. Thus, when the second advantageous state is generated, there is an effect that the second advantageous state can be appropriately generated by passing the game ball to the effective special area.

In gaming machine G10 or G11,
The passage blocking means is
When the first special area is valid by the special area switching means, the first opening and closing means is closed, and the game ball does not flow into the first special area,
A gaming machine G12, wherein when the second special area is valid by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is closed to prevent a game ball from flowing into the second special area.

  According to the gaming machine G12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G10 or G11, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first special area is valid by the special game switching means, the first opening / closing means is closed by the passage preventing means, and the game ball is not flowed into the first special area. Further, when the second special area is valid by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is closed by the passage preventing means, and the game ball is not flown into the second special area. Thereby, even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area by not allowing the game ball to pass to the effective special area when the second advantageous state is not generated. , It is possible to create a situation where the second advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game that allows the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine G11 or G12,
The passage blocking means is
When the first special area is valid by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the second special area,
A gaming machine G13, wherein when the second special area is valid by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the first special area.

  According to the gaming machine G13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G11 or G12, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first special area is valid by the special game switching means, the second opening / closing means is opened by the passage prevention means, and the game ball is flowed into the second special area. Further, when the second special area is valid by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is opened by the passage blocking means, and the game ball is flowed into the first special area. As a result, even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area by passing the game ball to the special area that is not effective when the second advantageous state is not generated, 2. It is possible to create a situation where an advantageous state cannot be generated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game that allows the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines G8 to G13,
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
An effective pattern determining means (for example, probability variation area effective table 202g) for determining whether or not to enable the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means;
An opening / closing pattern determining means (for example, a probability variation area opening / closing table 202f) for determining whether or not a game ball is allowed to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means;
An opening / closing pattern identical means (for example, an opening / closing pattern “X1”) for making the opening / closing pattern of the special region the same by the opening / closing pattern determination means in the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
Effective pattern mismatching means (for example, effective patterns “A” and “B”) for making the effective pattern of the special area different by the effective pattern determining means depending on the first lottery result and the second lottery result. A gaming machine G14 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine G14, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines G8 to G13, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the effective pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether to activate the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Similarly, the open / close pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to flow the game ball into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. The opening / closing pattern identical means makes the first lottery result and the second lottery result have the same opening / closing pattern of the special area by the opening / closing pattern determining means, and the effective pattern mismatch means makes the first lottery result and the second lottery result. Thus, the effective pattern of the special area by the effective pattern determining means is made different. Thereby, the opening / closing pattern of the special area is made the same in the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the lottery result cannot be identified only by the opening / closing pattern, while the special area is different in the first lottery result and the second lottery result. By making different effective patterns, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and creates a game property that allows the player to infer whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state. Thus, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of gaming machines G10 to G14,
Display means for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result (for example, a special symbol display device 37);
Result discriminating means for making it difficult to discriminate the first lottery result or the second lottery result based on the display result by the display means (for example, 127 kinds of display patterns of “time reduction C” and “latency probability fluctuation C” A gaming machine G15 comprising 127 kinds of display patterns, and each display pattern is a random pattern having no regularity of eight LEDs.

  According to the gaming machine G15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G10 to G14, the following effects are produced. That is, the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed by the display means, and the first lottery result or the second lottery result is configured to be difficult to identify by the display result by the display means by the result identification difficult means. Thus, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, it is difficult to identify which lottery result is to prevent the player from recognizing the second advantageous state. If the second advantageous state cannot be recognized only by passing the game ball in the special area, and whether or not the second advantageous state also occurs in the display result of the display means. I can't recognize it. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to create game characteristics that allow the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G15,
The special area is
A gaming machine G16, which is disposed at a position visible to a player.

  According to the gaming machine G16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G0 to G15, the following effects are produced. That is, the special area is disposed at a position that can be visually recognized by the player. Thereby, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that the game ball has passed through the special area, and to create a game property that makes it possible to guess whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, thereby improving the interest of the game. effective.

<Group H: Double Attacker x Individual Probability Change Area (No Opening Plate)>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is launched toward a gaming area provided on the gaming board, and the gaming ball is entered into one of a plurality of entrances provided in the gaming area. When the winning / losing lottery is performed based on the player's entry and the winning / winning lottery is won, the variable closing means, which is normally closed, is opened to give the player a predetermined game value. Is provided.

  In such a gaming machine, a special area is provided through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable entry means can pass, and the special area is controlled to be opened and closed by an opening / closing member or the like. There is a pachinko machine that generates a special game value based on a second advantageous state different from a predetermined game value based on the advantageous state.

  Further, in the pachinko machine, for example, even when the second advantageous state occurs, the second advantageous state does not occur without notifying the player whether or not the second advantageous state occurs. Some perform the notification mode. In other words, the game is performed as if the second advantageous state does not occur for the player, and the game is created to infer whether or not the second advantageous state is given to the player. (For example, patent document 1 (Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2017-148264)).

  However, in the above gaming machine, when the game ball passes through the special area, it is configured to generate the second advantageous state without fail, so when the player visually recognizes that the game ball has passed through the special area, 2. The player will recognize that an advantageous state will occur. For this reason, if the normal notification mode is executed after the player recognizes the occurrence of the second advantageous state due to the passing of the game ball to the special area, the player is provided with the expected interest of the game. However, there is still a room for improvement in this regard.

  The invention of group H has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of games.

A launching means for launching a game ball (eg, a ball launching unit 112a);
A ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 winning opening 64b) into which a game ball launched by the launch means can enter,
Information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entry means;
Determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a);
A game state changing means for changing the gaming state by using the determination result of the determining means (for example, from “normal gaming state” to “latency probability fluctuation state”);
When the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, notification means (for example, a third symbol display device) that executes state suggestion notification (for example, “probability change notification effect mode”) that suggests the gaming state to the player. 81)
A first variable entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) and a second variable entry that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which a game ball can enter. Means (for example, the second variable winning device 76);
By using the determination result by the determination unit, an advantageous state (for example, a big hit state) in which one or both of the first variable ball entering unit and the second variable ball entering unit are changed from the first state to the second state. In a gaming machine provided with advantageous state means (for example, opening of the big prize opening 65a and the second big prize opening 76a at the time of big hit)
A first special area through which the game ball that has flowed into the first variable entry means can pass (for example, the right-side probability change area 73);
A second special area through which the game ball that has flowed into the second variable entry means can pass (for example, the left-side probability variation area 74);
Special region switching means for switching between valid and invalid of the first special region or the second special region (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g or the left probability variation valid flag 203h),
The gaming state changing means is
Second advantageous state means capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means (for example, generation of “probability variation state”),
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
When the game ball passes through the first special area that is effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated,
When the game ball passes through the second special area that is effectively set by the special area switching means, while generating the second advantageous state,
When the game ball passes through the first special area that is not effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is configured not to occur,
When the game ball passes through the second special area that is not effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is configured not to occur,
The notification means includes
Suggestion notification non-execution means that does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the first special region or the second special region that is effectively set by the special region switching means. (For example, “latent probability variation effect mode” based on winning of “latency probability variation A”).

  According to the gaming machine H0, the game ball is launched by the launching means, and the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the entrance means, and the game ball has entered the entrance means. As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and by using the determination result of the determination means, the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, and the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means. When the change is made, the state suggestion notification for notifying the player of the gaming state is executed by the notification means. Further, a first variable ball entry means and a second variable ball entry means are provided, which can change between a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter, and a determination means. By using the determination result according to the above, the advantageous state means changes one or both of the first variable entry ball means and the second variable entry ball means from the first state to the advantageous state. Here, the game ball that has flowed into the first variable ball entry means is configured to pass through the first special area, and the game ball that has flowed into the second variable ball input means is configured to be able to pass through the second special area. Validity or invalidity of the first special area or the second special area is switched by the area switching means. Moreover, the second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means can be generated by the second advantageous state means provided in the gaming state changing means. Then, when the game ball passes through the first special area which is set effectively by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means, and is set effectively by the special area switching means. A second advantageous state is generated when a game ball passes through the second special area. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the first special area which is not set effectively by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state means is configured not to generate the second advantageous state, and the special area switching means When the game ball passes through the second special area which is not set effectively, the second advantageous state is not generated by the second advantageous state means. And the state corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the first special area or the second special area which is effectively set by the special area switching means by the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means Suggestion notification is not executed. That is, even if a game ball passes through the first special area or the second special area, the second advantageous state can be prevented from being generated unless the first special area or the second special area is valid. Even if the game ball passes through the effectively set first special area or second special area, it is not suggested to the player that the second advantageous state occurs at that timing. Thereby, even if it is a case where it is a case where a player recognizes passage of the game ball to the 1st special field or the 2nd special field, the situation which cannot generate the 2nd advantageous state can be created. Therefore, when the suggestion notification non-execution means does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state and does not allow the player to recognize that it is the second advantageous state, It is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game balls in the two special areas. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to create game characteristics that allow the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine H0,
Said advantageous state means comprises:
In one advantageous state, a unit game (for example, one round) for changing one of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times. Unit game execution means to execute (for example, jackpot processing (S103)),
The special area switching means includes
In at least any one of the unit games, a unit game effective means for enabling the first special area or the second special area (for example, the second round of “latency probability variation B”),
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
When it is determined by the determination means that a first lottery result (for example, a lottery result of “latency probability variation A”) that can generate the second advantageous state, during the advantageous state based on the first lottery result In addition, when the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means are controlled to open and close so as to allow the game ball to pass through the first special area or the second special area which is effective (for example, The right probability variation valid flag 203g is turned on and the special prize opening solenoid 65c is turned on),
When it is determined by the determination means that the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state (for example, the “short time A” lottery result), it is valid during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result. Passing prevention opening means for controlling the opening and closing of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means so as not to pass the game ball to the first special area or the second special area (for example, the right probability change effective) The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that the flag 203g is turned on and the special prize opening solenoid 65c is turned off.

  According to the gaming machine H1, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H0, the following effects are achieved. That is, a unit game in which one of the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means is changed from the first state to the second state in one advantageous state by the unit game execution means provided in the advantageous state means. Is executed multiple times. Further, the first special area or the second special area is validated in at least any one unit game by the unit game valid means provided in the special area switching means. And, when it is determined that the second advantageous state can be generated by the determination means by the effective opening means provided in the second advantageous state means, the advantageous state based on the first lottery result During this, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are controlled to open and close so that the game ball passes through the effective first special area or second special area. Similarly, when the passage blocking means provided in the second advantageous state means determines that the second lottery result does not generate the second advantageous state by the determining means, the advantageous state based on the second lottery result In addition, the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means are controlled to be opened and closed so that the game ball does not pass through the effective first special area or second special area. As a result, the second advantageous state according to the lottery result by the opening / closing control of the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means and the control of whether the first special area or the second special area is valid. It is not necessary to provide a member for opening and closing the special area in each special area, and the design of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means is complicated. In addition, there is an effect that the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means can be easily designed with a simple configuration. In addition, there is an effect that the number of parts of the gaming machine can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to consider the merging of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, the degree of freedom in designing the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means can be improved. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine H0 or H1,
Said advantageous state means comprises:
In the predetermined advantageous state, every time the unit game is executed, an alternate pitching means (for example, the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means are alternately and intermittently placed in the second state). And a variable winning device 65 and a second variable winning device 76 are opened without an interval time).

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H0 or H1, the following effects are produced. That is, by the alternate entry means provided in the advantageous state means, the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means are alternately repeated without interruption every time a unit game is executed in a predetermined advantageous state. Two states are set.

  Conventionally, when the advantageous state is digested by opening or closing one variable ball entry means, it is necessary to provide an interval time for closing the variable ball entry means, and it takes time to digest the advantageous state, There is a possibility that the game will be prolonged and the player may be awakened, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H2, the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means are alternately set to the second state for each unit game in a predetermined advantageous state by the alternate entry means. The interval time associated with the closing of the variable entry means can be eliminated. Therefore, the advantageous state can be quickly digested, and the game is not delayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being awakened. Also, by providing the second advantageous state by a combination of opening and closing of the two variable entry means and the validity or invalidity of the second special area, if the variation of each combination is not grasped in advance, the second advantageous state Can not recognize that occurs. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs while reducing the player's thinking time in an advantageous state that is performed quickly, and playing a game in the second advantageous state. It is possible to create a game that allows the player to infer whether or not, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2,
The special area switching means includes
Effective suggestion non-execution means that does not suggest that the first special area or the second special area is valid by the unit game valid means (for example, non-notification of valid setting of the probability variation areas 73 and 74). A gaming machine H3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the following effects are produced. That is, the effective suggestion non-execution means provided in the special area switching means does not suggest that the special area is effective by the unit game effective means. As a result, the first special area or the second special area becomes effective in any of the unit games in the advantageous state, and the first special area or the second special area that is effective during the unit game is not suggested to be effective. The second advantageous state can be generated by flowing the game ball into the two special areas. Therefore, it is impossible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the first special area or the second special area. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to create game characteristics that allow the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines H0 to H3,
The special area switching means includes
In the predetermined unit game, one of the first special area and the second special area is enabled, and the other is not enabled.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H0 to H3, the following effects are produced. That is, the special area switching means is configured such that one of the first special area and the second special area is valid and the other is not valid in a predetermined unit game. Thereby, by providing an effective pattern of a plurality of special areas, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the first special area or the second special area which is set effectively, and as a result, the game is performed in the second advantageous state. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game that makes the player infer whether or not the game is present.

In any of the gaming machines H0 to H4,
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
Effective pattern determining means (for example, probability variation area effective table) for determining whether to enable the first special area or the second special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. 202g)
By using the determination result by the determination means, for each unit game, the first variable entry means or the second variable entry means is opened to the first special area or the second special area. Open / close pattern determining means for determining whether or not to allow a game ball to flow (for example, a big prize opening / closing table 202h);
Opening / closing pattern identical means (for example, opening / closing pattern) for making the opening / closing pattern of the first variable entry means or the second variable entry means by the opening / closing pattern determination means identical in the first lottery result and the second lottery result Pattern "alternating lower and upper"),
Effective pattern mismatching means (for example, effective patterns “A” and “B”) for making the effective pattern of the special area different by the effective pattern determining means depending on the first lottery result and the second lottery result. A gaming machine H5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H0 to H4, the following effects are produced. That is, whether or not to validate the first special area or the second special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determination means by the effective pattern determination means provided in the second advantageous state means. It is determined. Similarly, the first variable entry means or the second variable entry means is opened for each unit game by using the determination result by the determination means by the opening / closing pattern determination means provided in the second advantageous state means. Thus, it is determined whether or not the game ball is allowed to flow into the first special area or the second special area. Then, the opening / closing pattern identical means makes the opening / closing pattern of the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means by the opening / closing pattern determination means the same in the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the effective pattern mismatch means Thus, the effective pattern of the special area by the effective pattern determining means is made different between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. Accordingly, the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means have the same opening / closing pattern in the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the lottery result cannot be identified only by the opening / closing pattern. By making the effective patterns of the first special area and the second special area different between the lottery result and the second lottery result, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game that makes the player guess whether or not the game is being performed.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5,
Display means for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result (for example, a special symbol display device 37);
Result discriminating means for making it difficult to discriminate the first lottery result or the second lottery result based on the display result by the display means (for example, 127 kinds of display patterns of “time reduction C” and “latency probability fluctuation C” A random number pattern having 127 kinds of display patterns and each display pattern having no regularity of eight LEDs).

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines H1 to H5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed by the display means, and the first lottery result or the second lottery result is configured to be difficult to identify by the display result by the display means by the result identification difficult means. Thus, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, it is difficult to identify which lottery result is to prevent the player from recognizing the second advantageous state. If the second advantageous state cannot be recognized only by passing the game ball in the special area, and whether or not the second advantageous state also occurs in the display result of the display means. I can't recognize it. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to create game characteristics that allow the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines H0 to H6,
The first special area and the second special area are:
A gaming machine H7, which is disposed at a position visible to a player.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines H0 to H6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first special area and the second special area are disposed at a position that can be visually recognized by the player. This creates a game that allows the player to visually recognize that the game ball has passed through the first special area or the second special area, and to infer whether or not the second advantageous state will occur. There is an effect that it can be improved.

<Group I: 2 specific areas (can be 1 specific area and discharge passage) overlap in depth direction>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is launched toward a gaming area provided on the gaming board, and the gaming ball is entered into one of a plurality of entrances provided in the gaming area. When the winning / losing lottery is performed based on the player's entry and the winning / winning lottery is won, the variable closing means, which is normally closed, is opened to give the player a predetermined game value. Is provided.

  In such a gaming machine, a special area is provided through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable entry means can pass, and the special area is controlled to be opened and closed by an opening / closing member or the like. There is a pachinko machine that generates a special game value based on a second advantageous state different from a predetermined game value based on the advantageous state.

  Further, in the pachinko machine, for example, even when the second advantageous state occurs, the second advantageous state does not occur without notifying the player whether or not the second advantageous state occurs. Some perform the notification mode. In other words, the game is performed as if the second advantageous state does not occur for the player, and the game is created to infer whether or not the second advantageous state is given to the player. (For example, patent document 1 (Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2017-148264)).

  However, in the above gaming machine, when the game ball passes through the special area, it is configured to generate the second advantageous state without fail, so when the player visually recognizes that the game ball has passed through the special area, 2. The player will recognize that an advantageous state will occur. For this reason, if the normal notification mode is executed after the player recognizes the occurrence of the second advantageous state due to the passing of the game ball to the special area, the player is provided with the expected interest of the game. However, there is still a room for improvement in this regard.

  The invention of Group I has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of games.

A launching means for launching a game ball (eg, a ball launching unit 112a);
A ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 winning opening 64b) into which a game ball launched by the launch means can enter,
Information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entry means;
Determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a);
Variable ball entry means (for example, variable winning device 65) that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or inaccessible and a second state in which a game ball can enter;
By using the determination result by the determination means, the advantage state means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for changing the variable pitching means from the first state to the second state (for example, the big hit state). )When,
In a gaming machine comprising a special area (for example, the front side probability variation area 73e and the back side probability variation area 74e) through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable pitching means can pass.
A second passage means (for example, the innermost discharge passage 75a) that is formed at a position overlapping with the special area in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine front view and through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable entry means can pass;
Second advantageous state means (for example, probability variation transition flag 203i) capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means when the game ball passes through the special area,
The second passing means is
Of the game balls that have flowed into the variable entry means, a game ball that does not pass through the special area passes.

  According to the gaming machine I0, the game ball is launched by the launching means, the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the entrance means, and the game ball has entered the entrance means. As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determination unit determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition unit. In addition, variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter is provided, and by using the determination result by the determination means, By the advantageous state means, the variable pitching means is changed from the first state to the second state. In addition, a special area through which game balls that have flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass is provided. Here, the game ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means is configured to be able to pass through the second passage means that is formed at a position overlapping in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine front view with respect to the special area. Then, when the game ball passes through the special area by the second advantageous state means, a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means may occur. And it is comprised so that the game ball which does not pass a special area | region among the game balls which flowed into the variable entrance means may pass a 2nd passage means. That is, when the game ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means passes through either the special area or the second passage means arranged so as to overlap from the front view of the gaming machine, and passes through the special area, The second advantageous state can be generated. As a result, since human vision generally makes it difficult to recognize the difference in the depth image than the difference in the plane image, the special region and the second passage means overlap in the front-rear direction of the front view of the gaming machine, thereby Compared to the case where the player is placed in a plane, it is recognized which flow path (special area) has flowed into the player who visually recognizes the special area and the second passing means from the front side of the gaming machine. Can be difficult. Therefore, it is difficult to identify whether or not the second advantageous state can occur by configuring whether or not the game ball has passed the special area. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether the second advantageous state is given, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine I0,
Said advantageous state means comprises:
Special region switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special region (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g or the left probability variation valid flag 203h),
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
When the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, while generating the second advantageous state,
The gaming machine I1 is configured not to generate the second advantageous state when a game ball passes through the special area that is not set effectively by the special area switching means.

  According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I0, the following effects are produced. That is, whether or not to enable the special area is switched by the special area switching means provided in the advantageous state means. Then, when the game ball passes through the special area that is effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means, while it is set effectively by the special area switching means. The second advantageous state means is configured not to generate the second advantageous state when the game ball passes through a special area that does not exist. That is, even if the game ball passes through the special area, the second advantageous state can be prevented from occurring unless the special area is valid. Thereby, even if it is a case where the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot be generated. Therefore, since it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special area, the gameability that makes the player infer whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state. Can be created and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I0 or I1,
The special area and / or the second passing means are:
A gaming machine I2 formed of a transparent or translucent material.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I0 or I1, the following effects are produced. That is, the special region and / or the second passing means are formed of a transparent or translucent material. Thereby, since the special area and / or the second passage means overlap in the front view of the gaming machine, it is difficult for the player to determine which flow path (special area) the game ball passes through. Can be made. As a result, it becomes difficult to recognize the inflow pattern to the special area or the second passage means in advance, and it is possible to create a game property that makes the player guess whether or not the game is being performed in the second advantageous state, There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2,
Using the determination result of the determination means, gaming state changing means for changing the gaming state (for example, jackpot end processing (S415));
When the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, notification means (for example, a third symbol display device) that executes state suggestion notification (for example, “probability change notification effect mode”) that suggests the gaming state to the player. 81), and
The notification means includes
Suggestion notification non-execution means that does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the special region that is effectively set by the special region switching means (for example, “latency probability variation A The game machine I3 is provided with a “latent probability change effect mode” based on the winning of “”.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the following effects are produced. That is, by using the determination result of the determining means, when the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means and the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, the gaming state is notified to the player by the notifying means. A state suggestion notification is performed. Then, the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means. That is, even if the game ball passes through the special area, if the special area is not effective, the second advantageous state can be prevented, and the game ball passes through the special area that is set to be effective. However, it is not suggested to the player that the second advantageous state occurs at that timing. Thereby, even if it is a case where the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot be generated. Then, the suggestion notification non-execution means does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the effectively set special area, and informs the player that it is in the second advantageous state. When the recognition is not performed, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special area. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to create game characteristics that allow the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3,
Said advantageous state means comprises:
In one advantageous state, unit game execution means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for executing a unit game (for example, one round) for changing the variable pitching means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times ), And
The special area switching means includes
In at least any one of the unit games, a unit game valid means for validating the special area (for example, the second round of “latency probability variation B”);
A game characterized in that the unit game valid means includes valid suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of valid setting of probability variation areas 73e and 74e) that does not suggest that the special area is valid. Machine I4.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I1 to I3, the following effects are produced. That is, the unit game executing means provided in the advantageous state means executes the unit game for changing the variable pitching means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times in one advantageous state. Then, the special area is made valid in at least one of the unit games by the unit game valid means provided in the special area switching means, and the unit game is executed by the effective suggestion non-execution means also provided in the special area switching means. The effective means does not suggest that the special area is effective. As a result, the special area becomes effective in any of the unit games in the advantageous state, and it is not suggested that the special area is effective. By flowing the game ball into the special area during the unit game, the second advantageous state is obtained. Can be generated. Therefore, it is impossible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special area. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to create game characteristics that allow the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine I4,
The special area is
The first special region (for example, the near side probability variation region 73e);
A second special region different from the first special region (for example, the back side probability variation region 74e),
The special area switching means includes
In the predetermined unit game, one of the first special area and the second special area is enabled, and the other is not enabled.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I4, the following effects are produced. That is, as the special area, a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area are provided, and in the predetermined unit game by the special area switching means, the first special area or the second special area. Either one is valid and the other is not valid. Thereby, by providing an effective pattern of a plurality of special areas, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the first special area or the second special area which is set effectively, and as a result, the game is performed in the second advantageous state. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game that makes the player infer whether or not the game is present.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I5,
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
When it is determined by the determination means that the first lottery result (for example, the “latency probability variation A” lottery result) that can generate the second advantageous state, the advantageous state based on the first lottery result And an effective passage means for passing the game ball to the special area that is valid (for example, turning on the right (front) probability change effective flag 203g and turning on the front probability change area solenoid 73g),
When it is determined by the determination means that the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state (for example, the result of lottery “Time A”), during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, Passing preventing means (for example, turning on the right (front) probability variation effective flag 203g and turning off the front probability variation region solenoid 73g) that prevents the game ball from passing through the special region that is valid is provided. Game machine I6.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines I1 to I5, the following effects are achieved. That is, when it is determined by the determination means that the first lottery result can generate the second advantageous state, the effective state passing means provided in the second advantageous state means is in the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. In addition, it is configured to pass the game ball to a special area that is effective. On the other hand, when it is determined by the determination means that the second lottery result does not generate the second advantageous state, the passage blocking means provided in the second advantageous state means during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, The game ball is configured not to pass through a special area that is effective. That is, in the case of the first lottery result that can generate the second advantageous state, the second advantageous state is generated while the second advantageous state is not generated by passing the game ball to the effective special area. In the case of the second lottery result, the second advantageous state is not generated by preventing the game ball from passing through the valid special area. As a result, even if the game ball passes through the special area while generating the second advantageous state depending on whether or not the game ball is passed to the valid special area, the second advantageous state if the special area is not valid. It is possible to create a game that makes the player guess whether or not a game is being played in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game. There is.

In the gaming machine I6,
Opening / closing means for opening and closing the special area (for example, front probability variation area opening / closing plate 73f and back probability variation area opening / closing plate 74f),
The effective passage means is
When the special area is valid by the special area switching means, the opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the special area.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I6, the following effects are produced. That is, the special area is opened and closed by the opening / closing means. Then, when the special area is valid by the special area switching means, the opening / closing means is opened and the game ball flows into the special area by the effective passage means. Thus, when the second advantageous state is generated, there is an effect that the second advantageous state can be appropriately generated by passing the game ball to the effective special area.

In the gaming machine I7,
The opening / closing means includes
A gaming machine I8 formed of a transparent or translucent material.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I7, the following effects are produced. That is, the opening / closing means is made of a transparent or translucent material. This makes it difficult for the player to determine the driving mode of the opening / closing means, so whether the opening / closing means can be opened and flow into the special area, or whether the opening / closing means can be closed and flow into the second flow path. It can be difficult to recognize. As a result, it becomes difficult to recognize the inflow pattern into the special area or the second flow path in advance, and it is possible to create a game property that makes the player guess whether or not the game is being performed in the second advantageous state, There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I7 or I8,
The passage blocking means is
When the special area is valid by the special area switching means, the opening / closing means is closed to prevent the game ball from flowing into the special area.

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I7 or I8, the following effects are produced. That is, when the special area is valid by the special game switching means by the passage prevention means, the opening / closing means is closed and the game ball is not flown into the special area. Thereby, even when the player recognizes that the game ball has flowed into the variable ball entry means by not allowing the game ball to pass through the effective special area when the second advantageous state is not generated. , It is possible to create a situation where the second advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game that allows the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines I7 to I9,
The opening / closing means includes
A first opening / closing means for opening and closing the first special area (for example, the front certain change area opening / closing plate 73f);
A second opening / closing means for opening and closing the second special area (for example, a depth probability changing area opening and closing plate 74f),
The passage blocking means is
When the first special area is valid by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the second special area,
When the second special area is valid by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the first special area.

  According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I7 to I9, the following effects are produced. That is, the first special area is opened / closed by the first opening / closing means provided in the opening / closing means, and the second special area is opened / closed by the second opening / closing means provided in the opening / closing means. Then, when the first special area is valid by the special game switching means by the passage prevention means, the second opening / closing means is opened, and the game ball flows into the second special area. Similarly, when the second special area is valid by the special area switching means by the passage blocking means, the first opening / closing means is opened and a game ball is flowed into the first special area. As a result, even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area by passing the game ball to the special area that is not effective when the second advantageous state is not generated, 2. It is possible to create a situation where an advantageous state cannot be generated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game that allows the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines I7 to I10,
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
Effective pattern determining means (for example, probability variation area effective table 202g) for determining whether to enable the special area for each unit game using the determination result by the determining means;
An opening / closing pattern determining means (for example, probability variation area opening / closing table 202f) for determining whether or not a game ball is allowed to flow into the special area for each unit game using the determination result by the determining means;
An opening / closing pattern identical means (for example, an opening / closing pattern “X1”) for making the opening / closing pattern of the special region the same by the opening / closing pattern determination means in the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
Effective pattern mismatching means (for example, effective patterns “A” and “B”) for making the effective pattern of the special area different by the effective pattern determining means depending on the first lottery result and the second lottery result. A gaming machine I11 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine I11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I7 to I10, the following effects are produced. That is, the effective pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to enable the special area for each unit game using the determination result by the determining means. Similarly, the open / close pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not the game ball is allowed to flow into the special area for each unit game using the determination result by the determining means. The opening / closing pattern identical means makes the first lottery result and the second lottery result have the same opening / closing pattern of the special area by the opening / closing pattern determining means, and the effective pattern mismatch means makes the first lottery result and the second lottery result. Thus, the effective pattern of the special area by the effective pattern determining means is made different. Thereby, the opening / closing pattern of the special area is made the same in the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the lottery result cannot be identified only by the opening / closing pattern, while the special area is different in the first lottery result and the second lottery result. By making different effective patterns, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and creates a game property that allows the player to infer whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state. Thus, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines I7 to I11,
Display means for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result (for example, a special symbol display device 37);
Result discriminating means for making it difficult to discriminate the first lottery result or the second lottery result based on the display result by the display means (for example, 127 kinds of display patterns of “time reduction C” and “latency probability fluctuation C” 127. A gaming machine I12 comprising: 127 kinds of display patterns, and each display pattern is a random pattern having no regularity of eight LEDs.

  According to the gaming machine I12, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines I7 to I11, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed by the display means, and the first lottery result or the second lottery result is configured to be difficult to identify by the display result by the display means by the result identification difficult means. Thus, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, it is difficult to identify which lottery result is to prevent the player from recognizing the second advantageous state. If the second advantageous state cannot be recognized only by passing the game ball in the special area, and whether or not the second advantageous state also occurs in the display result of the display means. I can't recognize it. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to create game characteristics that allow the player to guess whether or not a game is being performed in the second advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machines A0 to A10, the gaming machines B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, 10 to The configuration limited in any one of I12 may be applied.

  Further, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machines B0 to B12, the gaming machines A0 to A10, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, 10 to The configuration limited in any one of I12 may be applied.

  Further, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machines C0 to C12, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, 10 to The configuration limited in any one of I12 may be applied.

  Further, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machines D0 to D11, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, 10 to The configuration limited in any one of I12 may be applied.

  Further, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machines E0 to E12, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, 10 to The configuration limited in any one of I12 may be applied.

  Further, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machines F0 to F14, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, 10 to The configuration limited in any one of I12 may be applied.

  Further, with respect to any one of the gaming machines G0 to G16, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, H0 to H7, I0 to 0. The configuration limited in any one of I12 may be applied.

  Further, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machines H0 to H7, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, 10 to The configuration limited in any one of I12 may be applied.

  Further, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machines I0 to I12, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0. The configuration limited by any one of H7 may be applied.

  In these cases, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

  In the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, I0 to I12, the gaming machine is a slot machine A gaming machine J1 characterized by this. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  In the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, I0 to I12, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine J2 characterized by being. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (large winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, I0 to I12, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine J3 that is a fusion of a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
37 Special symbol display device (part of display means)
37b Second LED group (part of result difficult identification means)
64b Special Figure 1 winning entrance (part of the entry method)
65 Variable prize winning device (part of variable entry means, part of first variable entry means)
72 Guide channel (part of first channel, part of flow path)
73 Right Probability Area (part of special area, part of first special area)
73a Right probability change region opening / closing plate (part of first opening / closing means, part of opening / closing means)
73b Right probability variation region solenoid (part of passage means when effective, part of passage prevention means, part of driving means, part of full opening execution means)
73e Probability change area (part of special area, part of first special area)
73f Front probability change region opening / closing plate (part of opening / closing means, part of first opening / closing means)
73g Front Probability Solenoid (Part of passage means when enabled, part of passage prevention means)
74 Left probability variation area (part of special area, part of first special area)
74a Left probability changing region opening / closing plate (part of second opening / closing means, part of opening / closing means)
74b Left probability variation region solenoid (part of passage means when effective, part of passage prevention means, part of driving means, part of full opening execution means)
74e Probability change area on the back side (part of the special area, part of the second special area)
74f Depth change region opening / closing plate (part of opening / closing means, part of second opening / closing means)
74g Back Probability Change Area Solenoid (Part of passage means when effective, part of passage prevention means)
75 Discharge passage (part of discharge means)
75a innermost discharge passage (part of second passage means, part of discharge means)
76 Second variable winning device (a part of second variable winning means)
77 Communication passage (part of second flow path)
77a Merging section (part of merging means)
78a Probability changing region opening / closing motor (part of driving means)
78c Probability changing area opening / closing plate (part of opening / closing means)
81 3rd symbol display device (part of notification means, part of abnormality notification means)
110 Main controller (part of determination means)
112 Firing control device (part of specific interval firing means)
112a Ball launch unit (part of launching means)
201 MPU (part of game progress stop means, part of game restart means)
202a jackpot random number table (part of judging means)
202g Probability change area valid table (part of valid pattern determining means, part of valid pattern mismatch means, part of multiple timing inflow means, part of predetermined timing valid means)
202f Probability change area open / close table (part of open / close pattern determining means, part of open / close pattern identical means, part of multiple timing inflow means, part of pseudo standby execution means, part of full release execution means, provisional release execution means A part of provisional opening judgment means, a part of this opening determination means)
203d First reserved ball storage area (part of information acquisition means)
203g right probability change valid flag (part of special area switching means, part of unit game valid means)
203h Left probability variation valid flag (part of special area switching means, part of unit game valid means)
203i Probability transition flag (part of the second advantageous state means)
S103 jackpot processing (part of advantageous state means, part of unit game execution means)
S415 jackpot end processing (part of gaming state changing means)
S436 (part of the first drive pattern means, part of the second drive pattern means)
S452 (part of effective delay means)
S461 (standby game execution means)
S491 (part of effective means after the period)
S511 (part of alternate entry means)
S521 (part of the first direction driving means, part of the second direction driving means)
S1204 (part of suggestion notification non-execution means, part of effective suggestion non-execution means)

Claims (1)

A launching means for launching a game ball;
A ball entry means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launch means;
Information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the ball entry means;
Determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Variable entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or inaccessible and a second state in which a game ball can enter;
Using the determination result by the determination means, the advantageous state means for changing the variable pitching means from the first state to the second state;
A special area through which game balls that flow into the variable ball entry means can pass,
In a gaming machine comprising second advantageous state means capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means,
Said advantageous state means comprises:
Special area switching means for switching whether to enable the special area,
Said second advantageous state means comprises:
When the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, while generating the second advantageous state,
When the game ball passes through the special area that is not effectively set by the special area switching means, it is configured not to generate the second advantageous state,
A game having a plurality of timing inflow means for causing a game ball to flow into the special area that is effectively set at a plurality of timings during the advantageous state when the second advantageous state is generated. Machine.

Images